GNS-X C129 with GNS-X CDU

LS

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Operator’s Manual
Global

Rev. 3 Oct/02

N

WARNING
Prior to export of this document, review for export license requirement is needed.

COPYRIGHT NOTICE ©1997 - 2002 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of this publication or any portion thereof by any means without the express written permission of Honeywell International Inc. is prohibited. For further information contact the Manager, Technical Publications; Honeywell; One Technology Center; 23500 West 105th Street; Olathe, Kansas 66061. Telephone: (913) 782-0400.

Record of Revisions
Revision History and Instructions Manual Revision Part Number GNS-X C129 (with GNS-XLS CDU) Operator’s Manual 3, October 2002 006-08872-0000

This revision incorporates AFIS Printer Control, deletes Air Canada and calrifies SID/STAR operation. Insert the contents of this revision packet according to the following instructions:

Title Page Revision History Page Table of Contents Section 3 Section 7 Back Cover Page Back Binder Insert

Remove and Replace Insert Ahead of Existing Revision History Pages Remove and Replace Pages v/vi and xiii through xvi Remove and Replace Pages 3-9 through 3-20 and 3-75/3-76 Remove and Replace Pages 7-1/7-2, 7-7/7-8, 7-17 through 7-22 and 7-44 through 7-72 Remove and Replace Remove and Replace

R-1
Rev. 3 Oct/02 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

Record of Revisions
Revision History and Instructions Manual Revision Part Number GNS-X C129 (with GNS-XLS CDU) Operator’s Manual 2, August 2000 006-08872-0000

This revision incorporates GNS-X C129 Software Mod 4, 5 and 6. Insert the contents of this revision packet according to the following instructions: Front Binder Insert Title Page Revision History Page Table of Contents Section 2 Section 3 Remove and Replace Remove and Replace Insert Ahead of Existing Revision History Pages Remove and Replace Pages v/vi,ix/x, xi/xii, xiii/xiv and xv/xvi Remove and Replace Pages 2-1/2-2, 2-51/2-52, 2-57/2-58 and 2-77 through 2-82 Remove and Replace Pages 3-1 through 3-4, 3-15/3-16, 3-36.1/3-36.2, 3-39 through 3-50, 3-57 through 3-62, 3-105/3-106 and 3-109/3-110 Remove and Replace Remove and Replace

Back Cover Page Back Binder Insert

R-1
Rev. 2 Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

Record of Revisions
Revision History and Instructions Manual Revision Part Number GNS-X C129 (with GNS-XLS CDU) Operator’s Manual 1, August 1997 006- 08872-0000

This revision consists of the following: Add Company Routes (vi, 2-2, 3.36.1, 3-36.2, I-2) Add Dedicated DME Interface (2-59, 2-60) Add Approach Note (3-36.3) Typographic/Administrative Corrections (Front Covers, 2-1, 2-3, 2-10, 2-12, 2-82, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 3-37, Back Covers)

R-1
Rev. 1 Aug/97 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

Record of Revisions
Revision History and Instructions Manual Revision Part Number GNS-X C129 (with GNS-XLS CDU) Operator’s Manual 0, December 1996 006-08872-0000

This revision is a complete manual revision and supersedes previous revision level manuals. Superseded manuals should be discarded.

R-1
Rev. 0 Feb/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

Table of Contents
SECTION 1 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1 GENERAL TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 ON: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 BRIGHTNESS (BRT): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 MESSAGE KEY/ANNUNCIATOR (MSG): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 ALPHA KEYS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 NUMERIC KEYS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 HOLD KEY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 BACK KEY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 ENTER Key: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 DISPLAY SELECTOR KEYS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 PREVIOUS (PRV) KEY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 NEXT (NXT) KEY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 LINE SELECT KEYS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 COLORS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8 SECTION 2 PAGE DISPLAY DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 PAGE DISPLAYS AT POWER-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 SELF TEST PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 INITIALIZATION PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 FLIGHT PLAN SECTION (FPL KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2 FLIGHT PLAN PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2 FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2 FLIGHT PLAN “X” 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

i
Rev. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 NAVIGATION 2/4 (Page 2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28 GPS SUBSECTION PAGES . . . . . . . . . .2-29 GPS SUBSECTION 3/3 (Page 3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 NAVIGATION 1/4 (Page 1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32 LCS SUBSECTION 1/3 (Page 1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25 VPU SUBSECTION PAGES . . . . . . . . .2-29 GPS SUBSECTION 2/3 (Page 2 of 3) .2-21 VLF SUBSECTION 2/4 (Page 2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26 VPU SUBSECTION 1/4 (Page 1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . .2-23 VLF SUBSECTION 4/4 (Page 4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24 IRS/INS SUBSECTION PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Dec/96 .2-20 VLF SUBSECTION PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Table of Contents NAVIGATION SECTION (NAV KEY) . .2-17 NAVIGATION 3/4 (Page 3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25 IRS SUBSECTION 2/2 (Page 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32 LCS SUBSECTION 2/3 (Page 2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 VLF SUBSECTION 3/4 (Page 3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . .2-27 VPU SUBSECTION 4/4 (Page 4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26 VPU SUBSECTION 3/4 (Page 3 of 4) . . .2-13 NAVIGATION PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 NAVIGATION 4/4 (Page 4 of 4) .2-31 LORAN-C (LCS) SUBSECTION PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33 ii GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 VLF SUBSECTION 1/4 (Page 1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25 IRS (or INS) SUBSECTION 1/2 (Page 1 of 2) . . . . . . .2-26 VPU SUBSECTION 2/4 (Page 2 of 4) . . . . . . . .2-32 LCS SUBSECTION 3/3 (Page 3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29 GPS SUBSECTION 1/3 (Page 1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .2-43 AFIS SECTION (AFIS KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45 PLAN PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41 VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35 VNAV MODE: (Second line) . . . .2-52 FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . .(First line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .FLIGHT PLAN WayPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51 PLAN 7/8 (Page 7 of 8) FDE PREDICTION .2-45 PLAN 1/8 (Page 1 of 8) FUEL STATUS . . . . . . . .2-59 HOLDING PATTERN SECTION (HOLD KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61 iii Rev. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54 HEADING SECTION (HDG KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49 PLAN 4/8 (Page 4 of 8) FUEL FLOW . .2-47 PLAN 3/8 (Page 3 of 8) FUEL PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40 VNAV DATA 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . .2-58 TUNE 1/4 (Page 1 of 4) COMM . . . . .2-59 TUNE 4/4 (Page 4 of 4) XPDR/ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56 HEADING VECTOR 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . .2-58 TUNE 2/4 (Page 2 of 4) COMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Table of Contents VERTICAL NAVIGATION SECTION (VNAV KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System . . . .2-58 TUNE 3/4 (Page 3 of 4) NAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45 PLAN 2/8 (Page 2 of 8) TRIP PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54 PLAN 8/8 (Page 8 of 8) FDE COMPUTATION . . . . . .2-56 HEADING PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56 TUNING SECTION (TUNE KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45 PLANNING SECTION (PLAN KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50 PLAN 5/8 (Page 5 of 8) DATE/GMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35 VNAV 2/3 (Page 2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35 VNAV 1/3 (Page 1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . .2-50 PLAN 6/8 (Page 6 of 8) AIRCRAFT WEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Table of Contents HOLDING PATTERN PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1 POWER ON/OFF AND PARALLAX ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77 ADVISORY: . . .2-74 OCEANIC REPORTING WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72 PILOT ENTERED WPT (Personalized) Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75 MESSAGES (MSG Key) . . . . . . . . . . .2-72 OFFSET WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68 DATABASE WPT 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1 INITIALIZATION PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67 DIRECT TO PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67 DIRECT 1/2 (Page 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68 SPECIAL DATABASE WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67 WAYPOINT SECTION . . . . . . . .3-3 Option 1: Using the IDENT field for non-IRS equipped systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 INITIALIZATION POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73 SPECIAL WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61 HOLDING PATTERN 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . 0 Dec/96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-78 SENSOR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1 PRE-DEPARTURE . . . . . . .3-3 iv GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77 ACTION REQUIRED: . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68 WAYPOINT PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61 POSITION FIX PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66 DIRECT TO SECTION ( d KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76 SYSTEM MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 DATE and GMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-81 SECTION 3 SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 ADDING OR DELETING WAYPOINTS WITHIN A SID . . . . .3-24 Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23 To Delete a Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Table of Contents Option 2: Using the POS field . . . . . . . . .3-6 To Delete a Waypoint . . . . . . .3-18 REVIEWING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 3-20 EDITING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 BUILDING FLIGHT PLANS (FPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 SIDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 USING DUPLICATE WAYPOINT IDENTIFIERS . . . . . . . . . .3-12 FLIGHT PLAN (FPL) SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8 Deleting A Waypoint: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STARs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8 To Access The Desired Flight Plan: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9 ERASING A STORED FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Oct/02 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 RUNWAY LINE-UP (IRS EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VLF (RPU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 IRS. . . . .3-13 INITIAL LEG SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPROACHES AND ENROUTE AIRWAYS . . . . . . GPS AND/OR VPU EQUIPPED . . . .3-14 BEFORE TAXI (IRS EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8 ADDING A WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 v Rev. . . .3-9 Adding Oceanic Waypoints . .3-23 ENTERING AN AIRWAY FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16 ENTERING A SID ON THE ACTIVE FPL . . . . . .3-21 ERASING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . . . . . . .3-24 Option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11 REVIEWING WAYPOINT DATA/COORDINATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 MODIFYING A FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . .3-15 VLF (RPU) AND/OR VPU EQUIPPED ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34 ERASING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38 EXECUTING A GPS/GPS OVERLAY APPROACH . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 DELETING WAYPOINTS OF A STAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26 ENTERING A STAR OR PROFILE DESCENT FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39 Using Radar Vectors to FINAL APPROACH COURSE . . . . . 1 Aug/97 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 SELECTING A COMPANY ROUTE AND ADDING IT TO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN . . .3-34 EDITING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37 LOADING A GPS/GPS OVERLAY APPROACH . . . . . . . .1 EXECUTING APPROACHES . . . . . . . . . .3-35 DELETING AN APPROACH WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 ENTERING AN APPROACH ON A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 ERASING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40 USING OWN NAVIGATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51 DIRECT TO . . . . . . .NO DME ARC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 USING A STAR AND AN APPROACH IN THE SAME FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . .ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINT . . . . . . . .3-39 After receiving the final intercept vector from ATC: . . . . . . . .HP WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 ADDING WAYPOINTS WITHIN A STAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Table of Contents EDITING AN AIRWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 REVIEWING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . . .3-44 ENROUTE . . . . . . . .3-41 PROCEDURE TURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51 DIRECT TO . .3-41 USING RADAR VECTORS TO INTERCEPT A DME ARC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 EDITING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36. .3-27 REVIEWING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . . . . . . . . . .3-52 vi GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52 DIRECT TO . . . . . . . .3-74 REVIEWING VNAV WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . .3-59 PROGRAMMING A HEADING INTERCEPT TO THE FINAL APPROACH COURSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RANDOM WAYPOINT . . . . . . . .3-61 PROGRAMMING A HOLDING PATTERN . . . . . . .3-66 EXITING HOLDING PATTERN NEXT TIME OVER HOLDING FIX . . 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55 USING HEADING VECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . AND DEFAULT FLIGHT PATH ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-66 EXITING A HOLDING PATTERN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-66 CANCELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-71 CREATING/CHANGING VNAV WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-67 EXITING HOLDING PATTERN BY GOING DIRECT TO HOLDING FIX . . . . . TRANSITION LEVEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58 CANCELING HEADING SELECT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PRE-DEPARTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-57 PROGRAMMING A HEADING VECTOR . . . OR CANCELING A HOLDING PATTERN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52 To Cancel Holding Pattern:(from the Holding Pattern page) . . . . . . . .3-59 PROGRAMMING AN INTERCEPT . . .3-68 EXITING HOLDING PATTERN BY PERFORMING A LEG CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54 PSEUDO-VORTAC (SELECTED COURSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Table of Contents To Select and Go Direct To HP Waypoint: . . . . . . .3-72 To program a Path Descent . . .3-65 REVIEWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-57 CHANGING HEADING VECTOR WHILE IN HEADING SELECT MODE . . . . . . . . . . .3-68 VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNAV) OPERATION . . . . . . . .3-71 SETTING CRUISE ALTITUDE. . . . . . . . . . . .3-75 vii Rev. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EDITING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CLOSEST AIRPORT .3-53 DIRECT TO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-63 REVIEWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58 CHANGING TO WAYPOINT WHILE IN HEADING SELECT MODE . . . .3-65 EDITING . . . . . . . . .

. . . .VNAV WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . .3-76 PROGRAMMING VERTICAL PATH DESCENTS . . . .Table of Contents Using Active Flight Plan Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-79 Option 1: Using VNAV Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-84 Top of Climb (#TOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-95 FUEL PLANNING .3-89 TUNING COMMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-84 Top of Descent (#TOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-90 TRANSPONDER AND ADF KEYBOARD TUNE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-77 Using Manual (MAN) FPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-95 TRIP PLANNING .3-75 Using VNAV Flight Plan Waypoints Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-81 DIRECT TO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-76 VERTICAL NAVIGATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-85 Pre-Selected Altitude Intercept Point (#PRESL) . . . . . . . . . . . .3-77 Using Default ( DEF) FPA . . . . . . . . .3-78 EDITING ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS . . . . . . .3-89 TUNING NAVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-79 Option 2: Using VNAV FPL WAYPOINT Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-77 Using Automatic (AUTO) FPA . .3-80 DIRECT TO .3-90 Keyboard Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VNAV WAYPOINT AS LATERAL WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-79 Option 3: Using the VNAV WAYPOINT Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Dec/96 . . . . . . .3-76 Using Database (DB) FPA . .3-93 PLANNING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-96 viii GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ENROUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-86 Descent Reference Waypoints . . . . . . . . .3-83 CREATING VNAV PROFILE WAYPOINTS . . . . .3-86 REMOTE TUNING . . . . . . . . .

.3-111 Using An Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-107 PREVENTING AUTOMATIC LEG CHANGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-110 Using a Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OR ALT DISPLAY OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-106 SPECIAL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-102 VERIFYING OR CHANGING DATE AND TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-110 Over Known Point . . . . . . . .3-102 To Return to Automatic Fuel Flow: . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-112 PARALLEL COURSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . .Table of Contents To Enter Manual Groundspeed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-116 INITIALIZATION ENROUTE VLF (RPU) ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-102 To Return To Automatic Groundspeed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-115 SELECTING ETE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-105 RESETTING FUEL USED . . . . . .3-100 FLIGHT PLAN FUEL PLANNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ETA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-100 To Enter Manual Groundspeed: . . . . . . . .3-110 POSITION CHECK AND UPDATE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-118 ix Rev. . . . . . . .3-102 To Enter A Manual Fuel Flow: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-109 DEAD RECKONING (DR) TO PRIMARY NAVIGATION MODE VLF (RPU) ONLY EQUIPPED . . . . . .3-107 PILOT ENTERED LEG CHANGE . . .3-114 MANUAL MAGNETIC VARIATION ENTRY . . . . . .3-115 SELECTING NAV PAGE ETA OR ALT DISPLAY OPTION . . . . . . . .3-104 VERIFYING OR CHANGING AIRCRAFT WEIGHT PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . .3-98 To update the TRIP PLAN leg to the current TO waypoint with an Active Flight Plan selected: . . . . . . . . . .3-98 To Return to Automatic Groundspeed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-117 Position Update: . . . . . . . . .3-115 RETURNING TO AUTOMATIC VARIATION . . . . . . . .

4-1 LORAN-C OPERATING AREAS (LOA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-122 PRESENT POSITION AS A WAYPOINT .Table of Contents MANUAL TAS ENTRY only VLF is available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-125 LOSS OF POWER IN FLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-126 CREATING/CHANGING PILOT ENTERED (PERSONALIZED) WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-128 CREATING AN OFFSET WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-128 Changing Pilot Entered (Personalized) Waypoints: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-121 EXTERNAL WAYPOINT ACCEPTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-121 SENSOR DESELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-119 VLF/OMEGA STATION DESELECTION . . . . . . 2 Aug/00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-124 Aircraft Not Equipped With A TRUE/MAG Switch . . . . . . .3-124 Aircraft Equipped With TRUE/MAG Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-125 SET HEADING ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1 DATA BASE UPDATE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . .3-128 TRUE HEADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-118 MANUAL HEADING ENTRY only if IRS or VLF is available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1 TO UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-123 NAVIGATION AT EXTREME LATITUDES . . . . . . . . . .5-1 x GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. . . .3-120 LORAN-C MANUAL OPERATIONS . . . .3-129 SECTION 4 LORAN-C OPERATING AREAS (LOA) AND VLF/OMEGA TRANSMITTER SITES . . . . . .4-20 SECTION 5 DATABASE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20 OMEGA NAVIGATIONAL NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 VLF/OMEGA TRANSMITTER SITES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-127 Creating Pilot Entered (Personalized) Waypoints: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20 VLF COMMUNICATIONS STATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flight Level and Route . . . .7-11 SIGMETS Pages . . . . . . . . . . .7-9 AFIS FLT PLAN Page 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2 Data Management Unit (DMU) . . . . . . . . . . .7-3 Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2 Data Transfer Unit (DTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3 AFIS Flight Plan List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11 Performance Bias . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3 PAGE DISPLAY DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10 AFIS FLT PLAN Page 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Table of Contents WHEN UPDATE IS COMPLETE . . . . . .7-3 High Power Amplifier/ Low Noise Amplifier (HPA/LNA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9 Weights. . . . . 2 Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6 AFIS FLT PLAN Pages . . . . . . . .7-3 Flight Plan Progress (NAVIGATION Page 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10 Operator Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7 AFIS FLT PLAN Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3 SECTION 6 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11 xi Rev. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7 Fuel and Time Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4 AFIS Menu Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1 Global Data Center (GDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2 Antenna Switching Unit (ASU) . . . . . . . .7-2 Satellite Communications Unit (SCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2 IF UPDATE FAILS .7-7 AFIS FLT PLAN Page 2 . . . .6-1 SECTION 7 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .7-27 To enter an AFIS Flight Plan . .7-13 RECALL AFIS FPL Page . . . . . . . . . . .7-13 WINDS ALOFT Pages . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20 OPERATING MODES Page (For AFIS Users NOT Equipped with Satellite Data Communications System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22 Active Flight Plan Page (for AFIS Flight Plan Updating) . . . . . .7-18 OPERATING MODES Page (For AFIS Users Equipped with Satellite Data Communications System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24 SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13 WINDS ALOFT Data Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27 xii GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. . . . . . . . .7-17 DISPLAY AFIS MSG Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19 VHF LINK CONTROL Page . . . . . . .7-14 SEND AFIS MESSAGE Page . . . . . .7-21 AUTO WX UPDT (weather update): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24 SYSTEM MESSAGES . .7-18 AUTO REPORT: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21 AUTO REPORT: .7-24 ADVISORY: . . . . .7-23 SYSTEM MESSAGES Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18 AUTO WX UPDT (weather update): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12 TERMINAL WX DATA Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15 PPM MENU Page (Preprogrammed Messages) . . . .7-20 SAT LINK CONTROL Page . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27 AFIS Flight Plan Selection . . . . . . . .7-27 Pre-Departure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Aug/00 . . . . . . . . . .Table of Contents TERMINAL WEATHER Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17 PREPROGRAMMED MESSAGE Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23 AFIS UPDATE Verification Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-40 Sending/building a Preprogrammed Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-43 Turning AUTO REPORT / Auto WX Update OFF . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42 AFIS Messages Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-43 Selecting Operating Modes (For AFIS Users Equipped with Satellite Data Communications System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29 AFIS Flight Plan Page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28 Reviewing AFIS Flight Plan Data . . . . . . . . . . .7-29 AFIS Flight Plan Page 1 .7-36 Recall Option 1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36 Recall Option 2: . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28 Reviewing AFIS Planned Leg Data . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37 Sending a Text Message or PDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42 Continue Sending Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30 AFIS Flight Plan Page 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-35 To delete text when there is no data entry in progress: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-44 xiii Rev. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-33 To insert a new identifier: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Data update and Review .7-31 SIGMETS Review/update . . . . . . .Table of Contents ENROUTE . .7-41 Editing/entering a Preprogrammed Message .7-38 To Return to the AFIS Menu Page . . .7-34 Winds Aloft Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34 To delete text when there is no data entry in progress: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36 Recalling AFIS Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-31 AFIS Flight Plan Page 4 . . . .7-43 Auto Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28 Reviewing Flight Plan Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Data update and Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34 To insert a new identifier: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32 Terminal Weather Menu . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-60 Turning AUTO REPORT OFF . . . . . . . . . .7-53 Returning to AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-55 Auto Print MSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-57 Printing Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-47 VHF and Satellite Network Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48 Turning VHF Network OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-51 Turning Satellite Network ON . . . . . .7-45 Auto Weather Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46 Returning to AUTO WX UPDT . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-49 Turning AUTO to MAN or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Oct/02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-60 Returning to AUTO REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-54 Auto Form Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-53 PRINTER CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-54 Weather DEST .7-46 Turning AUTO WX UPDT OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-56 Auto Print WX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-52 Turning AUTO to MAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48 Turning VHF Network ON . . . . . . . . . . .7-61 xiv GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-50 Returning to AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-57 Printing Flight Plans .7-50 Turning Satellite Network OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-56 PRINTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-60 Auto Reporting . . . . .Table of Contents Returning to AUTO REPORT/auto WX Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-57 Printing Weather . .7-54 Message DEST . . . .7-58 SELECTING OPERATING MODES (For AFIS Users NOT Equipped with Satellite Data Communications System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-65 Updating AFIS Flight Plan and Weather . . . . . . . . . .7-70 To update the Winds Aloft Data Pages . . . . . . . . . . . .7-71 To insert a new identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-64 Returning to AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-69 To Update Terminal Weather Data Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-67 Updating SIGMETS . . . . . . . . . . .7-71 xv Rev. . . . . . . . .7-68 Updating Weather . . . . .7-66 Selecting Update as Active Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-70 Updating Winds Aloft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Oct/02 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System . . . .7-62 Returning to AUTO WX UPDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-70 To insert a new identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-64 AUTO to MAN or OFF Mode .7-66 Updating AFIS Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Table of Contents Auto Weather Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-63 Ground Network Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-62 Turning AUTO WX UPDT OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0 Dec/96 .Table of Contents THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK xvi GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

Description SECTION 1 DESCRIPTION OVERVIEW The GNS-X C129 Flight Management System is an integrated system designed to give the pilot centralized control for the navigation sensors. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 1-1 . All these are housed in a panel/pedestal mounted Control Display Unit (CDU). The GNS-X C129 has a full color flat panel LCD display. alpha-numeric and function keys. All aircraft interface requirements are accomplished through the GNS-X C129. ADF. Specific aircraft requirements are programmed into a Configuration Module. The system supports analog and digital inputs in any combination. such as an optional VLF/Omega RPU. position information is accepted from up to eight navigation sensors. These navigation sensor inputs can be blended to form a single composite position. a Global Positioning Sensor (GPS). COMM Radio Tuning RPU . Accuracy of this composite position is Rev. and a navigation data base. LORAN-C sensors. This module mounts directly to the rear connector. fuel management.VLF/Omega Cross Side FMS LORAN-C ANALOG Altitude Altitude Rate Cross Track Deviation Discretes Dual VOR/DME Fuel Flow Heading HSI Course & Bearing Roll Steering True Air Speed Vertical Deviation In addition to the GPS sensor. thus remaining in the aircraft. The following is a summary of the digital and analog interfaces: DIGITAL AFIS Air Data Computer EFIS Fuel Flow Inertial Navigation Sensor Inertial Reference Sensor VOR/DME. XPDR. This allows hardware to be easily moved between aircraft types without changing system configuration. inertial position sensors. or VOR/DME radios. and radio management. computer based flight planning.

Description enhanced by using the best characteristics of each type of sensor. each containing up to 50 waypoints. For example. In these cases the waypoint identifiers are renamed in the database. the GPS sensor is the sole contributor to the composite position. Due to the way the GNS-X C129 database is structured. In addition to this database. Two naming conventions are used. STAR. Trip Plan and Fuel Plan functions are also available. It also contains altitudes at appropriate waypoints.000 waypoints. It is an internal function of the GPS receiver and determines the accuracy of it’s navigation solution. Additional capabilities of the GNS-X C129 include direct navigation from present position to any waypoint. and APPROACH procedures. NOTE: RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) is a quality factor used to determine the accuracy of the GPS position. when RAIM is available. Individual navigation points can be organized into 56 different stored flight plans. This worldwide database contains over 50. and data crossfill capability for dual installations. MA11 at KPRC becomes MA11RC in the database. waypoints must have unique identifiers. The internal GPS sensor has excellent overall characteristics and will usually be the dominant sensor during blending. some duplicate ICAO identifiers exist for more than one waypoint. an Inertial Reference System (IRS) has excellent short term characteristics while VLF/Omega has excellent long term stability. one for four character identifiers and one for five character identifiers. Five character waypoints keep the first five characters and add the last character of the ICAO airport identifier as shown in the following example. the memory can store up to 999 operator generated waypoints. This Database Disk is inserted in a Data Transfer Unit (DTU) or Portable Data Transfer Unit (PDTU) to download the database. SID. navaids and airports. However. The navigation data base is updated on a 28-day cycle by way of a Database Disk. 1-2 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. AIRWAY. However. 0 Dec/96 . Four character waypoints keep the first four characters and the last two characters of the ICAO airport identifier as shown in the following example. There is capability for creating a PSEUDO-VORTAC (selected course) to any waypoint and establishing an offset parallel course. MA27L at KOAK becomes MA27LK in the database.

or BACK Key can be used to move forward or backward through pages of a subsection. ADFs and transponders can be tuned through the system or by using the individual control heads. NXT. PAGE: Information is arranged in sections and subsections much like chapters in a book. Each section is selected by depressing the appropriate Display Selector Key located at the top of the GNS-X C129. Blinking of a field indicates that the computer has not accepted the entry because of unreasonable or invalid information. WAYPOINT:A navigation point consisting of 1 to 6 alpha. numeric characters that has a specific latitude and longitude. the cursor will move to the next enterable field or disappear from the screen when the last field is entered. The cursor is normally out of view unless brought into view by depressing the Line Select Keys on either side of the screen. A subsection page is selected by depressing the Line Select Key next to the topic desired. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 1-3 . The PRV.Description NAVs. When information is entered into a field and the ENTER Key is depressed. If the first page of a subsection is displayed. CURSOR: Yellow rectangular box placed over a field to enter or change the information in that field. then depressing the ENTER Key. Each subsequent push of the key will select the next page of that section. GENERAL TERMS FIELD: A line of information. Rev. Individual screen displays are referred to as pages. the BACK Key will exit the subsection. COMMs.

This key is also used for parallax adjustment of the Line Select Keys P R V N X T NAV VNAV AFIS FPL ON BRT PLAN HDG HOLD TUNE MSG 1 4 7 # BACK 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 D NOTE: The illumination of the front panel and keyboard is normally controlled through the aircraft panel lighting control.Description CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ON: NAV VNAV AFIS FPL ON BRT PLAN HDG HOLD TUNE Depress and release the ON Key to apply power to the system. A I S B J T C K U D L V M W ENTER E O Y F P Z G Q H R SP N X * MESSAGE KEY/ANNUNCIATOR (MSG): The MSG annunciator will flash to alert the operator that a message needs to be viewed on one of the SYSTEM MESSAGES or SENSOR MESSAGES Pages. There is a warm-up period of approximately 30 seconds. MSG P R V N X T 1 4 7 # BACK 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 D A B C D E F G H Depressing the ON Key for I J K L M N O P Q R approximately three seconds S T U V W X Y Z will initiate the system power off * sequence. BRIGHTNESS (BRT): The BRT Key is used to change the illumination of the display. P R V N X T NAV VNAV AFIS FPL ON BRT PLAN HDG HOLD TUNE MSG 1 4 7 # BACK 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 D A I S B J T C K U D L V M W ENTER E O Y F P Z G Q H R SP N X * 1-4 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. This is to prevent inadvertent system shutdown. During the sequence the display will show SYSTEM TURNING OFF. The display illumination will initially be set at 75% of full bright. 0 Dec/96 . ENTER SP NOTE: The system is also capable of being turned on and off by cycling aircraft power.

The newest message will be indicated with a flashing asterisk to the left of the message. depressing the HOLD Key accesses the Holding Pattern page. NAV VNAV AFIS FPL ON BRT PLAN HDG HOLD TUNE MSG P R V N X T 1 4 7 # BACK 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 D A B J T C K U D L V M W ENTER E O Y F P Z G Q H R SP HOLD KEY: If the cursor is positioned over a waypoint identifier. If the message requires some action be taken by the operator. the MSG annunciator will remain on steadily until the action is completed. depressing the HOLD Key accesses the POSITION FIX Page and is used for position updates and verification as well as entering the primary navigation mode. and it is appropriate to program a Holding Pattern at that waypoint. # and ±. MSG P R V N X T 1 4 7 # BACK 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 D A I S B J T C K U D L V M W ENTER E O Y F P Z G Q H R SP N X * NUMERIC KEYS: The numeric keys are used to enter numbers 0 to 9. the MSG annunciator will extinguish when the message page is exited. If the cursor is not displayed. If no action is required. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 1-5 . NAV VNAV AFIS FPL ON BRT PLAN HDG HOLD TUNE ALPHA KEYS: The alpha keys are used to enter the 26 letters of the alphabet and an asterisk. I S N X * NAV VNAV AFIS FPL ON BRT PLAN HDG HOLD TUNE MSG P R V N X T 1 4 7 # BACK 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 D A I S B J T C K U D L V M W ENTER E O Y F P Z G Q H R SP N X * Rev.Description Depressing the MSG Key will display the message page.

0 Dec/96 . the next sequential page will be displayed. FPL (Flight Plan).Description BACK KEY: The BACK Key is used to erase errors and page backward when the cursor is not displayed. NAV VNAV AFIS FPL ON BRT PLAN HDG HOLD TUNE MSG P R V N X T 1 4 7 # BACK 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 D A I B J T C K U D L V M W ENTER E O Y F P Z G Q H R SP N X ENTER KEY: When the ENTER Key is depressed. D A I S B J T C K U D L V M W ENTER E O Y F P Z G Q H R SP N X * NAV VNAV AFIS FPL ON BRT PLAN HDG HOLD TUNE MSG P R V N X T 1 4 7 # BACK 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 D A I S B J T C K U D L V M W ENTER E O Y F P Z G Q H R SP N X * 1-6 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. This key is not functional if AFIS is not installed in the system. and d (Direct) are used to select the pages pertaining to that particular section. VNAV (Vertical Navigation). AFIS (Airborne Flight Information System). HDG (Heading). With each subsequent press of the Key. It can also be used to change data in a field if the cursor is present. TUNE (Radio Tuning). NAV VNAV AFIS FPL ON BRT PLAN HDG HOLD TUNE MSG P R V N X T 1 4 7 # BACK 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 D A I S B J T C K U D L V M W ENTER E O Y F P Z G Q H R SP N X * SPACE (SP) KEY: The SP Key is used to enter a space when entering a message on an AFIS Page. data is entered into the computer memory. PLAN (Planning). The first page of a section is displayed first when a Display Selector Key is pressed. P R V N X T S * NAV VNAV AFIS FPL ON BRT PLAN HDG HOLD TUNE MSG 1 4 7 # BACK 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 DISPLAY SELECTOR KEYS: NAV (Navigation).

0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 1-7 . NAV VNAV AFIS FPL ON BRT PLAN HDG HOLD TUNE MSG P R V N X T 1 4 7 # BACK 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 D A I S B J T C K U D L V M W ENTER E O Y F P Z G Q H R SP N X * NAV VNAV AFIS FPL ON BRT PLAN HDG HOLD TUNE NEXT (NXT) KEY: The NXT Key is used to display the next page of a section or subsection. MSG P R V N X T 1 4 7 # BACK 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 D A I S B J T C K U D L V M W ENTER E O Y F P Z G Q H R SP N X * NAV VNAV AFIS FPL ON BRT PLAN HDG HOLD TUNE LINE SELECT KEYS: These keys are used to place the cursor in the field next to that key. This key also allows the operator to remain in a section or subsection by looping from the first to the last and back to the first page of that section or subsection. This key also allows the operator to remain in a section or subsection by looping from the first to the last and back to the first page of that section or subsection. MSG P R V N X T 1 4 7 # BACK 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 D A I S B J T C K U D L V M W ENTER E O Y F P Z G Q H R SP N X * Rev. Each line select key controls 2 lines of text.Description PREVIOUS (PRV) KEY: The PRV Key is used to display the previous page of a section or subsection. White symbols (< or >) displayed on either side of the display indicate active Line Select Keys for each individual page.

0 Dec/96 . Vertical TO Waypoint. and TO Waypoint FROM Waypoint Caution Messages Data entered. but not yet accepted by the computer.Description COLORS: The CDU displays are color coded to assist the operator in recognizing information. Date and Times Tuned Frequencies or Codes Altitudes Navigation and Fuel Data General Page Data Page Titles and Prompts Warnings Waypoint Numbers Cyan Green White Red Blue 1-8 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. The following is a list of these colors and their meanings: Magenta Yellow Lateral TO Waypoint.

If the system detects a problem the SELF TEST display may be replaced by a NO DATA RECEIVED message. 14141-0624 SM06 SELF TEST GLOBAL HONEYWELL INTERNATIONAL INC. The unit may have to be removed for service. PAGE DISPLAYS AT POWER-UP For a better understanding of the GNS-X C129 functions. 2 Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-1 . the computer performs extensive internal tests that must be successfully completed before proceeding further. INITIALIZATION PAGE After the Self Test is successfully completed. month and year.Page Display Definitions SECTION 2 PAGE DISPLAY DEFINITIONS The following section contains definitions pertaining to information and format seen when a particular function key is depressed. GMT: Time of day is displayed in Greenwich Mean Time hours and minutes. Refer to Figure 2-2. DATE: The current Greenwich Date is displayed as day. COPYRIGHT 2000 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Figure 2-1 DATE GMT INITIALIZATION 01 JUL 00 18:42 > > IDENT KDAL POS ------------------- > Figure 2-2 Rev. SELF TEST PAGE For the first 40 seconds after the system if is turned on. this section should be reviewed prior to operating the system. the INITIALIZATION Page will be displayed.

PART NUMBER AND SOFTWARE MODIFICATION STATUS: The bottom line of the display shows the unit part number and the software level of the unit. the system must be turned off and then turned back on. FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) The FLIGHT PLAN LIST page will be displayed automatically after system initialization. 1 Aug/97 . POS: Displays the last system position at shut down. Dashes will be displayed when the cursor is placed over the position (POS) field. and POS have been entered. the cursor will automatically be positioned over the first matching Flight Plan. NOTE: The FLIGHT PLAN LIST page will be automatically displayed if the ENTER key is depressed at least three times while on the initialization page. the COMPANY ROUTES page is displayed first. GMT. FLIGHT PLAN PAGES NOTE: If AFIS equipped the first page displayed after system initialization will be the AFIS FPL LIST page in lieu of the FLIGHT PLAN LIST page. If the initialization airport matches a departure airport on the FLIGHT PLAN LIST. 2-2 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. FLIGHT PLAN SECTION (FPL KEY) Upon pressing the FPL Key the FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/1 Page will be displayed and the following can be observed. In order to display this again. Figure 2-2 shows a sample part number and software mod status.Page Display Definitions IDENT: Displays the airport identifier for the airport closest to the system shut down position. NOTE: If the data base contains company routes. See the AFIS Section 7-4. Dashes are displayed when the cursor is over the IDENT field. NOTE: This page cannot be recalled once DATE. If both AFIS and Company Routes are present. the first page displayed after system initialization will be the COMPANY ROUTES page in lieu of the FLIGHT PLAN LIST page.

Using the PRV or NXT Key pages through the Flight Plan List subsection. (Figure 2-4) Other indications can be as follows: • Indented Waypoints: Indicates a SID. thus. (Figure 2-4) < < < < FLIGHT PLAN 6 1/1 KDAL BUJ HOT BWZ ISLET XFILL SELECT ERASE DEPART ARRIVE < APPROACH < Figure 2-4 Rev. STAR. 1 Aug/97 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-3 . Each stored flight plan's origin and destination points are listed in alphabetical order. Up to 50 waypoint identifiers may be placed on each stored Flight Plan. An identifier may be used more than once on the same Flight Plan. (Figure 2-3) Waypoint Identifiers: Waypoint identifiers may consist of from one to six alphanumeric characters. (Figure 2-4) This stored flight plan page is accessed through the FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page by pressing the Line Select Key corresponding to the desired flight plan number. (Figure 2-3) FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/1 KABQ KDAL KDAL KHPN KHPN KLAX KPRC KSFO KMSY KHPN KSFO KORD KORD KSTL KSNA KHPN 1 6 8 2 9 4 3 7 > > > > A new FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page is created when the previous page has eight flight Figure 2-3 plan origin-destination pairs on it.Page Display Definitions There are seven pages possible with a maximum of 56 flight plans stored in nonvolatile memory. or APPROACH procedure is part of the Flight Plan. then pressing ENTER. (Figure 2-3) FLIGHT PLAN "X" 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) "X" can be Flight Plan numbers 1 through 56. placing the cursor over that number.

The system will fly current track beyond the last waypoint prior to the fence but no Auto Leg change will occur. • ****** : Follows the last waypoint on the Flight Plan and indicates where the next waypoint entry will normally begin. • ------: "fence" indicating a discontinuity in the flight plan. If a d isperformed to a waypoint beyond this type of fence all waypoints prior to the fence will be deleted from the active flight plan. ETA. DEPART: Used to access the DEPARTURE Page to enter a Standard Instrument Departure (SID). This type of fence will not cause waypoints of the active flight plan to be deleted prior to the fence if a waypoint beyond the fence is selected using the d function. (Figure 2-5) ARRIVE: Used to access the ARRIVAL Page to enter a Standard Terminal 2-4 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. • IAF (Initial Approach Fix): Automatically loaded from the data base when a non-precision approach is selected. • ARC (DME Arc end waypoint): Automatically loaded from the data base when a non-precision approach is selected. (Figure 2-5) • PT (Procedure Turn): Indicates a procedure turn is programmed at a particular waypoint. No Auto Leg changes will take place beyond the last waypoint prior to the fence and no ALT. or DIS will be displayed. No Altitude constraints will be displayed beyond the fence.Page Display Definitions • HP (Holding Pattern): Indicates a holding pattern is programmed at a particular waypoint. • MAP (Missed Approach Point): Automatically loaded from the data base when a non-precision approach is selected. ETE. • FAF (Final Approach Fix): Automatically loaded from the data base when a non-precision approach is selected. FLIGHT PLAN 6 2/2 RW34 +++++ < HP CMK ##### < < < < DEPART ARRIVE APPROACH XFILL SELECT ERASE < • ++++++: A flight plan discontinuity "fence" separating Figure 2-5 the missed approach waypoint from the rest of the approach (Figure 2-5). 0 Dec/96 .

or it can be selected from a list made available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the RUNWAY field. or it can be manually entered. (Figure 2-5) XFILL: Used to transfer information between systems in a dual system installation. This field prefills if first waypoint on the flight plan is an airport or runway.Page Display Definitions Arrival (STAR) or Profile Descent. Depressing the BACK Key when the cursor is over this field brings up INVERT?. In a single system installation. DEPARTURE: Departure airport identifier. With the cursor over DEPART press ENTER. 0 Dec/96 DEPARTURE KLAX 1/1 RUNWAY -----SID -----TRANSITION -----RW06L RW06R RW07L RW07R ‘ erase < < < < Figure 2-6 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-5 . (Figure 2-5) DEPARTURE Page Accessed by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to DEPART on the FLIGHT PLAN Page. (Figure 2-6) RUNWAY: Departing runway. (Figure 2-5) ERASE: Used to clear an entire flight plan. this prompt will not be displayed. This field prefills if first waypoint on the flight plan is a runway. A NO SIDS AVAILABLE message will appear at the bottom of the screen. NOTE: Each field will prefill if there is only one choice for that particular field or DEPARTURE airport field will flash if no Departure is available. which is used to transfer the waypoint of a Stored Flight Plan to the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page in reverse order. (Figure 2-6) Rev. SELECT or INVERT: Used to transfer a Stored Flight Plan to the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page. (Figure 2-5) APPROACH: Used to access the APPROACH Page to enter a non-precision approach.

and a NO STARS AVAILABLE message will appear at the bottom of the screen. < DEPARTURE KLAX 1/1 RUNWAY RW06L SID GMN1 TRANSITION AVE WAYPOINTS OF SID: GMN COREZ AVE SELECT? ‘ eraseERASE < < < Figure 2-7 NOTE: Each field will prefill if there is only one choice for that particular field or ARRIVAL field will flash if no Arrival is available. TRANSITION: The Transition waypoint can be selected from a list made available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the TRANSITION field. WAYPOINTS OF SID: The waypoints that constitute the SID. (Figure 2-7) ERASE: Used to erase a SID. With the cursor over ARRIVE press ENTER. or can be manually entered.Page Display Definitions SID: The Standard Instrument Departure (SID) can be selected from a list made available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the SID field. or can be selected from a list made available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the RUNWAY field. (Figure 2-7) SELECT?: Used to select the defined SID. ARRIVAL: Arrival airport identifier. This field Figure 2-8 prefills if the last waypoint on the flight plan is a runway. This field prefills if the last waypoint on the flight plan is an airport or runway. 0 Dec/96 . This is the default field if the departure airport is preprogrammed on the flight plan. (Figure 28) RUNWAY: Arriving runway. (Figure 2-8) ARRIVAL KLAX RUNWAY TRANSITION STAR RWO6L < RW06R RW07L < RW07R 1/1 ---------------< < 2-6 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. (Figure 2-7) ARRIVAL Page Accessed by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to ARRIVE on the FLIGHT PLAN Page.

0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-7 . STAR: The Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be selected from a list made available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the STAR field. This field prefills if last waypoint on the flight plan is an airport or runway. (Figure 210) < < < < APCH KLAX RUNWAY TYPE TRANSITION RW24R RW24L RW07R RW07L ‘ 1/2 ---------------- < < eraseERASE < Figure 2-10 Rev. (Figure 2-9) SELECT?: Used to select the defined STAR. < ARRIVAL KLAX 1/1 RUNWAY RW06L TRANSITION CIVET STAR CIVET1 WAYPOINTS OF STAR: CIVET BREMR ARNES SELECT? ERASE < < < Figure 2-9 NOTE: Each field will prefill if there is only one choice for that particular field or Approach Airport field will flash if no Approach is available and a NO APPROACH AVAILABLE message will appear at the bottom of the screen. WAYPOINTS OF STAR: The waypoints that constitute the STAR. This is the default field if the airport ID is preprogrammed on the flight plan. or can be manually entered. (Figure 2-9) ERASE: Used to erase a STAR. APCH: Approach airport identifier. (Figure 2-9 ) APPROACH Page Accessed by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to APPROACH on the FLIGHT PLAN Page. With the cursor over APPROACH press ENTER.Page Display Definitions TRANSITION: The Transition waypoint may be prefilled or selected from a list made available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the TRANSITION field.

• IAF: Indicates the Initial Approach Fix.Page Display Definitions RUNWAY: Approach runway prefills if only one runway is available. NOTE: If the runway selected on the Approach Page differs from the runway dictated by the STAR. APCH KLAX 1/1 < RUNWAY RW24R TYPE NDB < TRANSITION LAHAB WPTS OF APPROACH: IAF LAHAB MAP RW24R LAX16 +++++ DOWNE HP RAFFS FAF OSNB < < SELECT?erase ERASE < Figure 2-11 TYPE (Circle. TRANSITION: The Transition waypoint may be prefilled or selected from a list made available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the TRANSITION field. (Figure 2-11) • HP (Holding Pattern): Indicates a holding pattern is programmed at a particular waypoint. • ARC (DME ARC): Indicates a DME ARC is programmed at a particular waypoint. • FAF: Indicates the Final Approach Fix. In order to bring up a circling approach. 2-8 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. or can be selected from a list made available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the RUNWAY field. (Figure 2-11) This is the default field if the airport ID is preprogrammed on the flight plan. the type field must be selected with no runway in the runway field. VOR. NDB. "SEL RWY FROM STAR PG" is displayed at the bottom of the screen. last waypoint on Flight Plan is a runway. (Figure 2-11) • PT (Procedure Turn): Indicates a Procedure Turn is programmed at a particular waypoint. (Figure 2-10) WAYPOINTS OF APPROACH: The waypoints that constitute the APPROACH. or RNAV): Type may be prefilled or selected from a list made available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the TYPE field. 0 Dec/96 .

Page Display Definitions
• MAP: Indicates the Missed Approach Fix. • FCF : Indicates Final Approach Course Alignment Fix. • ++++++: Separates the missed approach procedure waypoint from the rest of the approach. When the approach is flown, the system will continue to provide guidance along the final approach course and beyond the MAP until the pilot manually sequences to the missed approach waypoint by using a DIRECT TO or HEADING mode procedure. (Figure 2-11) No Auto Leg changes will occur beyond the last waypoint prior to the fence. This type of fence will not cause waypoints of the active flight plan to be deleted prior to the fence if a waypoint beyond the fence is selected using the d function. SELECT?: Used to select the defined APPROACH. (Figure 2-11) ERASE: Used to erase an APPROACH. (Figure 2-11) AIRWAY Page Enroute Airways may be manually entered on a Flight Plan Page by preceding the route or airway ident with a pound sign (#), e.g., #J (Jet Airway), #V (VOR Airway), #UG (Upper Green) or #R (Red Airway). The waypoint on the Flight Plan that the cursor is placed over or after must be part of the Airway being entered in order for the Airway to be accepted. This waypoint will normally be the From waypoint on the AIRWAY Waypoint Page. AIRWAY: Airway identifier. (Figure 2-12) FR: Starting point on airway. (Figure 2-12) TO: Ending point on airway as selected by the operator. (Figure 2-12)
AIRWAY J29 FR MEM TIGRS < TINGS PXV < IMPEL JUDDI < KURTZ TO KURTZ? < SELECT ENDING WPT
<

1/1 < ROD DJB < CXR14 DORET < JHW SYR < TUPER LAGGS <

Figure 2-12

Rev. 0 Dec/96

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

2-9

Page Display Definitions
SELECT ENDING WPT: Select the desired ending waypoint on the airway, by moving the cursor up or down and depress ENTER. (Figure 2-12) ACTIVE FPL (Flight Plan)Page FR: Current FROM waypoint. May also display DIRECT, PSEUDO VORTAC, DME ARC, or PROCEDURE TURN. (Figure 2-13) TO: Current TO (Figure 2-13) waypoint.
ACTIVE FPL FR MEM TO BWG < -----KDAL DFW < KHART DEPART < ARRIVE
<

1/2 205 11 -CMK

DIS

<

Figure 2-13 Waypoint Identifiers:Up to 100 waypoint identifiers may be placed on the Active Flight Plan Pages. An identifier may be used more than once on the same Flight Plan.
• Indented Waypoints: indicate a SID, STAR, or APPROACH Procedure is part of the Flight Plan. (Figure 2-13, DFW) • HP (Holding Pattern): indicates a holding pattern is programmed at a particular waypoint. (Figure 2-14) • PT (Procedure Turn): indicates a procedure turn is programmed at a particular waypoint. ------:
ACTIVE FPL RYMES -10 ISLET < MAPRW34 ++++++ < HP CMK ****** < DEPART ARRIVE < APPROACH 2/2 3000 2000G 435G

ALT ERASE

<

Figure 2-14 A "fence" separating the current FR/TO leg from the originally selected Active Flight Plan when the TO waypoint is not on the original Flight Plan. Also separates non-continuous Flight Plan segments. (Figure 2-13) No Auto Leg change will occur to waypoints that appear after the fence. This type of fence will not cause waypoints of the active flight plan to be deleted prior to the fence if a waypoint beyond the fence is selected using the d function.

2-10

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

Rev. 1 Aug/97

Page Display Definitions
NOTE: When a "fence" (++++++) appears in an Approach it separates the missed approach holding fix from the rest of the approach. (Figure 214) No Auto Leg change will occur to waypoints beyond the fence.
******: Same as stored Flight Plan Page. DEPART: Same as stored Flight Plan Page. ARRIVE: Same as stored Flight Plan Page. APPROACH: Same as stored Flight Plan Page. ETA: (ETE/DIS/ALT) Estimated Time of Arrival at each waypoint on the Active Flight Plan based on current groundspeed. (Figure 2-15)

NOTE: When the cursor is placed over the ETA field and the BACK Key is pressed, ETE, DIS, or ALT can be displayed. Press ENTER to select the desired option. No ETE, ETA, ALT or DIS inforFigure 2-15 mation is displayed for waypoints beyond the missed approach "fence" (++++++) or the flight plan discontinuity (------).
ETE:

ACTIVE FPL 1/2 DIRECT TO KHART 19:37 19DFW 19:49 ELD 20:13 MEI 21:03 DELBE 21:22 < DEPART ARRIVE ETA < APPROACH ERASE

<

Estimated Time Enroute between waypoints on the Active Flight Plan based on current groundspeed. DIS: Distance between each waypoint on the Active Flight Plan.

Rev. 0 Dec/96

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

2-11

Page Display Definitions
ALT: Constraint altitude and waypoint offset of programmed VNAV waypoints for applicable waypoints on the Active Flight Plan (Figure 2-16).
ACTIVE FPL RYMES -10 ISLET < MAPRW34 ++++++ < HP CMK ****** < DEPART ARRIVE < APPROACH 2/2 3000 2000G 435G

NOTE: No database altitude ALT < constraints will be displayed ERASE at the MAP if the MAP is abeam or beyond the runFigure 2-16 way threshold . No altitude constraints are displayed on an approach if a PT is part of the approach procedure.
The following may appear in the waypoint altitude field: • FL: Flight Level • A: at or above • B: at or below • G: glide path (programmed Flight Path Angle)

NOTE: If an approach is programmed at the destination airport, and the MAP is the end of the runway, the altitude value displayed next to the MAP is approximately 50 feet above the runway threshold elevation. If the MAP is prior to the end of the runway and the approach is straight-in, the altitude displayed at the MAP is computed based on a line drawn from the FAF through the MAP to a point 50 feet above the runway threshold. The altitude may not be the MDA (Figure 216). If no approach is programmed, the altitude value will be the airport elevation regardless of runway selection. The Waypoint VNAV offset is given in nautical miles where a negative (-)offset is prior to the waypoint (Figure 2-16, interpreted as "cross ten miles before RYMES at 3000 feet") and a positive offset is after the waypoint. If dashes appear in the altitude constraint field, NO altitude is programmed at that waypoint.
ERASE: Same as for Stored Flight Plans except the current FROM/TO leg cannot be erased. The Active Flight Plan is automatically erased upon system shut-down.

2-12

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

Rev. 1 Aug/97

Page Display Definitions
NAVIGATION SECTION (NAV KEY)
Upon pressing the NAV Key the NAVIGATION 1/4 Page will be displayed and the following can be observed. NAVIGATION PAGES

NOTE: If AFIS is installed in the system, the NAV section will consist of five pages. NAVIGATION 1/4 (Page 1 of 4)
FR: The FROM waypoint identifier is displayed on the left. If the system has a valid ground speed, the time of departure or time overhead at that waypoint displayed on the right. This line can also display DIRECT, HOLD, PROCEDURE TURN, DME ARC or PSEUDO VORTAC. (Figure 2-17) TO:
NAVIGATION 1/4 FR 19DFW 20:28 TO ELD 20:30 <
<

> >

DIS ETE DTK GS WIND

-AUTO-

1.6 00:00.6 074 156 284/ 7

>

Figure 2-17

The TO waypoint identifier is displayed on the left. If the system has a valid ground speed, the ETA at that waypoint is displayed on the right. The TO field may also display AR, HP or PT if the waypoint indicates a DME ARC, Holding Pattern or Procedure Turn. The ETA field can be changed to display constraint altitude and waypoint offset distance if an altitude constraint has been programmed at the current TO waypoint by placing the cursor over this field and dressing the BACK Key (Figure 2-17) See Section 3 for the procedure. NX: This line is normally blank (Figure 2-18) except during Waypoint Alert (30 seconds prior to crossing the TO waypoint). In this case the next (NX) waypoint identifier on the Active Flight Plan and the ETA at that waypoint is displayed (Figure 2-19). When a Procedure Turn, Holding Pattern, Heading, or Heading Intercept mode is in use, appropriate information pertaining to that mode will be displayed in this field.

Rev. 0 Dec/96

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

2-13

Page Display Definitions
DIS: The distance in nautical miles and tenths from the aircraft present position to the TO waypoint. During Waypoint Alert, the distance in whole nautical miles to the NX waypoint on the Active Flight Plan is displayed in parentheses. (Figure 2-18) ETE:
NAVIGATION 1/4 FR 19DFW 20:28 TO ELD 20:30 < < NX MEI 21:49 DIS (42) 1.6 ETE 00:00.6 DTK (90) 074 < GS 156 WIND 284/ 7 < -AUTO<

Figure 2-18

The estimated time enroute in hours, minutes and tenths, from the aircraft present position to the TO waypoint based on current groundspeed. (Figure 2-18) DTK: The desired track is the Great Circle course in whole degrees between the FROM and TO waypoints. When in the PSEUDO VORTAC mode, the DTK is entered by the operator. During the Waypoint Alert, desired track to the next (NX) waypoint on the Active Flight Plan is displayed in parentheses. (Figure 2-18)

NOTE: The DTK field will be dashes if the FROM waypoint or present position are north of N 70° or south of S 60° Latitude, unless a manual MAG VAR is entered or a discrete MAG/True switch is moved to the True position.
GS: The current groundspeed. (Figure 2-19) WIND: The current wind direction referenced to True North and speed in knots. (Figure 219)
<

NAVIGATION 1/4 FR KHART 20:02 TO 19DFW -10 15000A < < DIS ETE DTK GS WIND XFILL? 47.3 00:19.4 079 < 146 160/ 14 <

-AUTO-

Figure 2-19
XFILL: If the aircraft is configured for dual systems, the XFILL prompt will appear on line 10 indicating the systems contain dissimilar data.
Rev. 0 Dec/96

2-14

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

Page Display Definitions
NOTE: XFILL will not appear when DME ARC, ARC Intercept, Procedure Turn or Holding Pattern are in progress on the system performing the procedure.
AUTO: The leg change mode. AUTO or MAN, may be selected if the cursor is over this field using the BACK Key. (Figure 2-19) If AUTO is selected the system will sequence to the next leg on the FPL. If MAN is selected the system will not sequence to the next leg on the FPL and fly the current track. NAVIGATION 1/4 with a Holding Pattern, Procedure Turn, Heading, or Heading Intercept Programmed. HOLD: Indicates that a Holding Procedure has been initiated and is displayed 30 seconds prior to crossing the HP waypoint. (Figure 2-20) • RIGHT or LEFT: Indicates the programmed turn direction around the holding pattern as entered on the HOLD Page. (Figure 220) • MANUAL or AUTO: Indicates the programmed EXIT MODE as entered on the Hold Page. Selecting MANUAL initiates a continuous hold at the fix until some action is taken by the pilot to exit the hold. Selecting AUTO will cause the aircraft to EXIT HOLD the next time the aircraft passes over the fix (Figure 2-21). If AUTO is programmed during the hold procedure, the aircraft will sequence to the next waypoint on the Active Flight Plan the next time the hold fix is crossed. This field can be edited using the BACK Key when the cursor is over this field. (Figure 2-20) AT: The Holding Pattern procedure is in progress at the TO waypoint and the ETA next time over the holding fix if ETA has been selected and the system has a valid ground speed. This field can also display the following: (Figure 2-20)
NAVIGATION 1/4 HOLD RIGHT MANUAL AT MEI 20:41 < HOLDING DIS 3.3 ETE 00:08.3 INBOUND CRS 101 GS 159 WIND 292/ 10
<

<

< <

Figure 2-20

Rev. 0 Dec/96

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

2-15

) • PARALLEL ENTRY: Indicates the system will use a parallel entry to the holding pattern.) (Figure 220) • TEARDROP ENTRY: Indicates the system will use a teardrop entry to the holding pattern. • PT (Procedure Turn): Indicates a procedure turn is programmed from the database at the TO waypoint. (This message appears 30 seconds prior to entering the holding procedure and changes to HOLDING after crossing the fix.) • HOLDING: Normal status while holding. The next time over the PT waypoint. The airplane will fly the procedure turn. (This message appears 30 seconds prior to entering the hold procedure and changes to HOLDING after crossing the fix the second time. • AR (DME Arc) Indicates a DME Arc is programmed at the TO waypoint.Page Display Definitions • HP (Holding Pattern): Indicates a holding pattern is programmed at the TO waypoint. (This message appears 30 seconds prior to entering the hold procedure and changes to HOLDING after crossing the fix the second time. the system will sequence to the following waypoint on the flight plan. • EXIT HOLD: Indicates the system will exit the holding pattern the next time over the holding fix. 0 Dec/96 . The ETE to the holding fix is also displayed. HOLDING STATUS MESSAGE: (Line 4) • DIRECT ENTRY: Indicates the system will use a direct entry to the holding pattern. 2-16 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

Rev. NX/Holding Status: Same as discussed for NAVIGATION 1/4. (Figure 2-21) GS: The current groundspeed. (Figure 2-21) ETE: The estimated time enroute to the next time over holding fix based on the path around the Hold “racetrack”.9 DIS 4. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-17 . (Figure 2-21) NAVIGATION 1/4 < HOLD RIGHT AUTO AT MEI 20:41 < < EXIT HOLD 00:07.8 ETE 00:07.9 INBOUND CRS 101 GS 154 WIND 286/ 12 < Figure 2-21 NOTE: The leg change mode (AUTO or MAN normally displayed on the last line of NAVIGATION Page 1) is not displayed while holding. TO/AT/AR/HP/PT: Same as discussed for NAVIGATION 1/4.Page Display Definitions DIS: The direct distance in nautical miles and tenths from the aircraft present position to the holding fix. FR/DIRECT/HOLD/PROCEDURE TURN/DME ARC: Same as discussed for NAVIGATION 1/4. NAVIGATION 2/4 (Page 2 of 4) Pressing the NAV Key again will display the second NAVIGATION Page and the following can be observed. (Figure 2-21) INBOUND CRS (course): The inbound holding course in whole degrees. (Figure 2-21) WIND: The current wind direction referenced to True North and speed in knots.

.or ++++++ ). APPR.. XTK: The crosstrack distance is the lateral displacement of the aircraft in nautical miles and tenths left or right of the desired track (125 NM maximum). A “fence” is a discontinuity in the flight plan. No data is computed beyond the fence and there is no Auto Leg change across the fence... A parenthesis around any of these indicates the displayed sensitivity has been selected manually.Page Display Definitions WIND: The first field displays headwind/tailwind in knots with an up arrow (↑) for tailwind or a down arrow (↓) for headwind. 0 Dec/96 . 1NM full scale deflection. (Figure 2-22) ETA: Estimated Time of Arrival at the last waypoint on the Active Flight Plan prior to a “fence” (. and ENRTE CDI sensitivity is as follows: Enroute: Terminal: Approach: 5NM full scale deflection. The second field displays the crosswind component in knots with a right pointing arrow (→) for a left crosswind or a left pointing arrow (← ) for a right crosswind. (Figure 2-22) TKE: The Track Angle Error as defined as the difference between the desired track and the actual track in degrees. 0. See Section 3 for operating procedures (Figure 2-22). Scaling for the TRMNL. APRCH or ENRTE is displayed to indicate the current CDI sensitivity. TRMNL.3NM full scale deflection. NAVIGATION 2/4 DIRECT 09:20 AT D259J 09:44 < < WIND % 11 ETA-RW11RC FUEL-RW11RC TKE XTK TRMNL SXTK 8& 09:54 1727 R 008 L 0. (Figure 2-22) FUEL: Estimated fuel remaining at destination. R (right) and L (left) are displayed to show the direction of error in relation to the desired track.06 ------ Figure 2-22 2-18 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

Rev. (Figure 2-22) NAVIGATION 3/4 (Page 3 of 4) Pressing the NAV Key again will display the third NAVIGATION Page and the following can be observed. See Section 3 for procedures. (MAN) will be displayed in the VAR field after a manual entry is made.0 and south of S60:00. MAN will be displayed.9 NM maximum). (Figure 2-23) DRIFT VAR TAS HDG BRG TK (MAN) R E 001 2 420 < 044 045 < 045 NOTE: The maximum enterable manual TAS is 850 knots. If TAS is manually inserted. Manual entry of variation is required north of N70:00.0 and S 60 00. in whole degrees. The TAS field is enterable only if air data is invalid. left or right of aircraft heading compared to current track. Manual variation can be entered and overrides the automatic computation. (Figure 2-23) TAS: The aircraft true airspeed in knots received from the Air Data Computer.0 latitude. (Figure 2-23) VAR: NAVIGATION 3/4 FR VUZ 19:36 20:04 < < TO VXV < The magnetic variation value in whole degrees computed automatically between N70 Figure 2-23 00.0 latitude. NX/Holding Status: Same as NAVIGATION 1/4. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-19 . TO/AT/AR/HP/PT: Same as NAVIGATION 1/4. FR/DIRECT/HOLD/PROCEDURE TURN/DME ARC: Same as NAVIGATION 1/4. DRIFT: The drift angle.Page Display Definitions SXTK: The selected crosstrack distance entered by the pilot to provide steering to an offset course parallel to the desired track (99.

minutes.31 0. (Figure 2-23) TK: The track angle in whole degrees. Sensors not being used in the composite position solution will display the radial difference in yellow.0 > > Figure 2-24 VLF. MAN will be displayed.Page Display Definitions HDG: The heading input received from an IRS or the aircraft compass system. 0 Dec/96 . (Figure 2-24) POS: The current composite position (latitude and longitude) computed in degrees.0 0. and hundredths of minutes. VPU. (Figure 2-24) < NAVIGATION 4/4 IDENT POS IRS LCS -----> > N 34 42. Sensors being used will display the radial difference in green. The radial difference between the individual sensor position and the composite position is displayed in nautical miles and tenths. and GPS: A listing of all interfaced sensors. IDENT: A waypoint identifier of a fix to be overflown can be entered here to update the system position. 2-20 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.1 VPU 0. If HDG can be manually inserted. (Figure 2-23) NAVIGATION 4/4 (Page 4 of 4) Pressing the NAV Key again will display the fourth NAVIGATION Page and the following can be observed.56 W112 37. (Figure 2-23) BRG: The bearing in whole degrees from the aircraft present position to the TO waypoint.1 GPS 0. The GPS sensor will normally be the sole contributing sensor to the composite position as long as RAIM is available. IRS/INS. LCS. (Figure 2-24) NOTE: IRS radial error is always green because velocity values are used to aid GPS position.

40 0. NO STD will be displayed if the rubidium frequency standard in the RPU is unstable. access is through the NAVIGATION 4/5 Page) by pressing the Line Select Key corresponding to the VLF sensor.00 1/4 Figure 2-25 VLF SUBSECTION 2/4 (Page 2 of 4) Pressing the NXT Key will display the second VLF SUBSECTION Page and the following can be observed. Use the NAV. (Figure 2-26) Rev. VLF: The actual position computed by the sensor. when in the NAV mode. minutes and hundredths. PRV or NXT Key to page through the sensor SUBSECTION pages.90 53. (Figure 2-25) DIF‘ VLF SUBSECTION POS VLF N 38 W094 N 38 W094 N E 49.40 49. QUALITY: Quality Factor is a numerical display that indicates the reliability of position data and determines the weight of the VLF/Omega Sensor input to the composite position. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-21 .90 53. Accessed through the NAVIGATION 4/4 Page (if AFIS is installed in the system.Page Display Definitions VLF SUBSECTION PAGES NOTE: The sensor SUBSECTION Pages may be accessed by placing the cursor over the individual position sensor and pressing the ENTER Key.00 0. (Figure 2-25) DIF: The difference between the composite position and the sensor computed position in degrees. and from 8 to 99 in the dead reckoning mode (DR). then pressing ENTER. VLF SUBSECTION 1/4 (Page 1 of 4) POS: Same as on NAVIGATION 4/4. The number will range from 2 to 7 (with 2 being optimum) in the primary navigation mode.

This information is not displayed if the system has never been in DR. (Figure 2-26) OMEGA RCVD: The number of Omega stations being received by the VLF/Omega Sensor.S. This information is not displayed if the system has never been in DR. Naval Communication stations being received by the VLF/Omega Sensor. (Figure 2-26) USED: The number of communication stations being used for navigation. (Figure 2-26) VLF RCVD: The number of U.Page Display Definitions DR#: The number of times the VLF/Omega Sensor has been in DR since first entering the VLF (primary) navigation mode. (Figure 2-26) USED: The number of Omega stations being used for navigation. 2-22 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. (Figure 226) NOTE: A maximum of eight stations in any combination can be used for navigation. 0 Dec/96 . (Figure 2-26) DR TIME: VLF SUBSECTION 2/4 2 1 3 8 6 8 2 QUALITY DR# DR TIME: VLF‘ OMEGA RCVD USED RCVD USED Figure 2-26 The total number of minutes the VLF/Omega Sensor has been in DR since the operator last manually verified position.

Maryland VLF SUBSECTION 99 00 99 99 99 99 99 99 + TOO FAR + + + SPARE + + 3/4 Column 2: The station amplitude ranging from 01 (minimum acceptable) to 99 (maximum strength). England or • ANN: Annapolis. Japan • GBR: Rugby. Australia • ANT: Anthorne. Maine • HAW: Lualualei. (Figure 2-27) WSH AUS ANT < MNE HAW < JPN GBR‘ < ANN < Figure 2-27 Column 3: Status Messages. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-23 . Rev. Hawaii • JPN: Yosami. -: The station is weak or unacquired.Page Display Definitions VLF SUBSECTION 3/4 (Page 3 of 4) Pressing the NXT Key again will display the third VLF SUBSECTION Page and the following can be observed. Column 1: (Figure 2-27) VLF COMM Stations • WSH: Jim Creek. England • MNE: Cutler. Dashes (-) indicate the station amplitude is less than the minimum acceptable. TOO FAR: The station is not used because of its distance from the aircraft position. (Figure 2-27) +: The station is being used for navigation. Washington • AUS: Northwest Cape.

Japan < VLF NOR LIB HAW < DAK REN < ARG AUS‘ < JPN SUBSECTION 99 99 99 99 00 99 99 99 SPARE SPARE + + TOO FAR SPARE SPARE SPARE 4/4 Figure 2-28 Rev. Indian Ocean • ARG: Gulfo Nuevo. FAILED: The computer has detected a failure in the receiver assigned to that station. N. Argentina • AUS: Darriman. UNSTABLE: The station has sufficient amplitude for use but has not passed the stability test. Column 1: (Figure 2-28) OMEGA Stations • NOR: Aldra. Australia • JPN: Tsushima. DESELECT: The station has been manually deselected. CUTOUT: The station has been eliminated from use because its position determining information is unacceptable.Page Display Definitions SPARE: The station is acquired and acceptable but is not needed for navigation. Hawaii • DAK: LeMoure. Norway • LIB: Liberia. Africa • HAW: Haiku. 0 Dec/96 2-24 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System . A message indicating a VLF/OMEGA receiver has failed will be displayed on the sensor messages page as RCVR FAIL VLF SUBSECTION 4/4 (Page 4 of 4) Pressing the NXT Key again will display the fourth VLF SUBSECTION Page and the following can be observed. Dakota • REN: Reunion Island.

Page Display Definitions Columns 2 and 3: Same as VLF SUBSECTION 3/4. The messages that can appear are ATTITUDE.20 41. or NAV. (Figure 2-29) IRS SUBSECTION 2/2 (Page 2 of 2) TIME TO NAV: The time remaining until alignment is complete.10 55. (Figure 2-29) IRS/INS: The actual position computed by the specified sensor when in NAV mode.30 Figure 2-29 The difference between the composite position and the sensor computed position in degrees. and hundredths. ALIGN. (Figure 2-30) CURRENT MODE: This field annunciates the current mode of the IRS. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-25 .60 50. (Figure 2-29) DIF: IRS SUBSECTION POS IRS N 49 W111 N 38 W094 50.20 1/2 DIF‘ N 11 00. IRS/INS SUBSECTION PAGES IRS (or INS) SUBSECTION 1/2 (Page 1 of 2) POS: The position in this field is the same as POS on NAVIGATION 4/4. Figure 2-30 Rev. (Figure 2-30) IRS TIME SUBSECTION IRS STATUS TO NAV 2/2 ---- CURRENT MODE: NAV NOTE: Page 2 is only displayed with an IRS.10 W 16 46. minutes.

(Figure 2-32) VPU SUBSECTION 2/4 99 -> QUALITY ADVISE IF > CURRENT MODE: NO MEASURMENTS Figure 2-32 Rev. minutes and hundredths.90 53. when in the NAV mode. If the VPU QUALITY exceeds this value a message is displayed on SENSOR MESSAGES Page. (Figure 2-31) VPU: The actual position computed by the sensor. 0 Dec/96 2-26 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System . then pressing ENTER.00 0. (Figure 2-32) ADVISE IF>: This field is an enterable field in which the operator may input a quality factor value from 2 to 98.00 1/4 Figure 2-31 The difference between the composite position and the sensor computed position in degrees.40 49. access is through the NAVIGATION 4/5 Page) by pressing the Line Select Key corresponding to the VPU sensor.90 53. (Figure 2-31) VPU SUBSECTION 2/4 (Page 2 of 4) Pressing the NXT Key again will display the second VPU SUBSECTION Page and the following can be observed.Page Display Definitions VPU SUBSECTION PAGES Accessed through the NAVIGATION 4/4 Page (if AFIS is installed in the system.40 0. VPU SUBSECTION 1/4 (Page 1 of 4) POS: The position in this field is the same as POS on NAVIGATION 4/4. QUALITY: The numerical display in this field indicates the reliability of the position data from the VPU. The number will range from 2 to 99 (with 2 being optimum and 99 as dead reckoning). (Figure 2-31) DIF: DIF VPU SUBSECTION POS VPU N 38 W094 N 38 W094 N E 49.

Page Display Definitions NOTE: Entering 99 in this field will eliminate any previously entered value and no CHECK QUALITY message will appear. • BAD GEOMETRY indicates that station geometry is inadequate for navigation. The messages that can appear under it: (Figure 2-32) • NO MEASUREMENTS indicates that VPU is not receiving valid data for navigation. Rev. CURRENT MODE: Indicates the current mode of VPU navigation.60 RNG 51. • VOR/DME indicates that distance and bearing (rho/theta) information is used to generate VPU position.7 252 Figure 2-33 Bearing in whole degrees from aircraft present position to the VOR. RNG: The range in nautical miles and tenths from aircraft present position to the DME station.00 34.CONFLICT: The VPU is not using a manually or keyboard tuned station because of a possible station frequency conflict within the aircraft’s current line-of-sight. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-27 . BRG: VPU SUBSECTION 3/4 VPU STATIONS NAV 1 PRX 113.2 BRG 304 NAV 2 RNG BRG UIM 114. VPU Sensor With Single Channel DME Inputs (Figure 2-33) NAV 1 and NAV 2: The station identifier and frequency being used for navigation. • DME/DME indicates distance (rho/rho) data is received and used to generate VPU position.CONFLICT or NAV 2 . (Figure 2-32) VPU SUBSECTION 3/4 (Page 3 of 4) Pressing the NXT Key again will display the third VPU SUBSECTION Page and the following can be observed. NAV 1 .

70 RNG 10.30 RNG 42. BRG: Same as above.00 RNG 83. This frequency is not displayed on the control head. This frequency may or may not be displayed on the control head. RNG: Same as above. and is automatically tuned by the system. The page appears the same as VPU SUBSECTION 3/4. VPU SUBSECTION 3/4 VPU STATIONS NAV 1 TCL 117. CH 2: The station identifier and frequency for an additional station that the multiple channel DME is receiving.5 Figure 2-34 VPU SUBSECTION 4/4 (Page 4 of 4) Pressing the NXT Key again will display the fourth VPU SUBSECTION Page and the following can be observed. RNG: The range in nautical miles and tenths from the aircraft’s present position to the Channel 2 DME station.Page Display Definitions VPU with Multiple Channel DME Inputs (Figure 2-34) NAV 1: The stations received by the NAV 1 VOR/DME receivers. CH 3: The station identifier and frequency for the third station that is being received. The station identifier is shown adjacent to the field with the ACTIVE frequency.6 CH 3 TGE 117. 0 Dec/96 .4 BRG 315 CH 2 MXF 113. RNG: Same as for CH 2. If the VPU has multiple channel DME inputs VPU SUBSECTION 4/4 appears and displays NAV 2 data. 2-28 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

POS: The current composite position (latitude and longitude) computed in degrees.30NM 23:43:55 STATE NAVIGATION MODE OCEANIC/REMOTE ALT AIDED? YES RAIM/FDE YES/YES Figure 2-36 Rev. when GPS is in navigation mode.83 25. then pressing ENTER. DIF: The difference between the composite position and sensor computed position in degrees. minutes.Page Display Definitions GPS SUBSECTION PAGES Accessed through the NAVIGATION 4/4 Page (if AFIS is installed in the system.02 1/3 Figure 2-35 The current GPS position. GPS SUBSECTION 2/3 HPE POS UNCERT GPS TIME 03.10 0. and hundredths of minutes. This information is only displayed when GPS is in the NAV mode. access is through the NAVIGATION 4/5 Page) by pressing the Line Select Key corresponding to the GPS sensor. GPS SUBSECTION 1/3 (Page 1 of 3) See Figure 2-35. POS UNCERT: Estimated Position Uncertainty. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-29 .08 38. minutes and hundredths. See Figure 2-36.65NM 07.01 0. GPS: GPS SUBSECTION POS GPS DIF N 34 W112 N 34 W112 N E 38. HPE: Horizontal Position Error displayed in nautical miles as a measure of GPS accuracy. in nautical miles. GPS SUBSECTION 2/3 (Page 2 of 3) Pressing the NXT Key will display the second GPS SUBSECTION Page and the following can be observed.82 25.

NOTE: GPS TIME may vary several seconds from GMT due to leap second input of UTC. STATE: Dashes: INITIALIZE: The GPS receiver state can be one of the following: Idle or no mode data. When the position is valid and sufficient satellite measurements are unavailable. ACQUISITION: Constellation selection and channel assignments are being done. The position is invalid after 30 seconds. 0 Dec/96 . to another state. TERMINAL. The receiver is updated with initial position and time information. such as ACQUISITION. other-wise the time field displays dashes.Page Display Definitions GPS TIME: GPS Time in hours. NAVIGATION: The GPS receiver is in navigation mode and has at least a two dimensional position fix. SKY SEARCH: No almanac is available. and APPROACH. These modes are used to determine what accuracy parameters should be used for a particular phase of flight. DR: The system is in dead reckon mode. and position and then assigns channels in order received. MODE: Possible receiver modes are ENROUTE. minutes and seconds. Carrier and code lock are in progress. data. TRANSITION: The receiver is transitioning from one state. such as NAVIGATION. 2-30 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. The advisory time is displayed when at least one satellite is being tracked. The system searches for any satellite in the visible table based on the internal or external time. ALT AIDED?: Indicates the GPS receiver is using an externally supplied altitude input for position calculation. the receiver will continue to output valid position for a maximum of 30 seconds while using the last known velocity and track information.

Page Display Definitions RAIM:/FDE Indicates RAIM or FDE is Available or Unavailable. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-31 . The GPS receiver is an 8 channel receiver. The information displayed is as follows: (Figure 2-37) GPS SAT: This is the satellite (PRN) number. This page displays the GPS receiver status.--. GPS SAT -14 15 22 25 29 18 -SUBSECTION 3/3 AZ EL SNR HLTH T --.Not Available SATS TRACKED: Indicates the number satellites presently being tracked.---- Figure 2-37 Rev. YES/YES Available. AZ: This is the satellite azimuth position displayed in degrees.-. HLTH: Satellite health is displayed as BAD or GOOD. therefore. SNR: This the received signal-to-noise ratio for each satellite. up to 8 lines of satellite information is displayed. T: YES or NO displayed as to whether this satellite is presently being tracked. GPS SUBSECTION 3/3 (Page 3 of 3) Pressing the NXT Key again will display the third GPS SUBSECTION Page and the following can be observed. EL: Satellite elevation displayed in degrees above the horizon. NO/NO .--.---304 71 44 GOOD Y 214 23 40 GOOD Y 124 47 44 GOOD Y 46 35 43 GOOD Y 304 40 40 GOOD Y 288 10 36 GOOD Y --.

10 1/3 Figure 2-39 2-32 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. DIF: The difference between the NMU composite position and the sensor computed position. 3.10 1/3 Figure 2-38 LCS SUBSECTION 2/3 (Page 2 of 3) ESTIMATED ERROR: (Estimated Position Error) Loran position based on the geometry of the Loran stations contributing to the sensor position.60 43.Page Display Definitions LORAN-C (LCS) SUBSECTION PAGES If multiple Loran sensors are installed each sensor has its own subsection of pages (e. The number will range from 0.20 0. and tenths. in degrees. when in the NAV mode. 0 Dec/96 .g. LCS1) LCS SUBSECTION 1/3 (Page 1 of 3) POS: The position in this field is the same as POS on NAV Page 4. The higher the EPE the less weight the Loran sensor input is given in the composite position.60 43. LCS1 SUBSECTION POS N 33 W075 LCS1 N 33 W075 DIF N E 29.30 29.1 to 9.0 or greater EPE will cause the Loran sensor to DR. LCS1 SUBSECTION POS N 33 W075 LCS1 N 33 W075 DIF N E 29. LCS: The actual position computed by the Loran-C sensor.20 0.80 43.20 0.9 nm.20 0.80 43.30 29. minutes.

ACCURACY WARN indicates that EPE > 2.Page Display Definitions CURRENT MODE: Indicates the current mode of Loran navigation. LCS1 < SUBSECTION 3/3 NE USA GT LKE AUTO 9960 MXYZ 8970 MWX NOTE: The identifier 9960 (NE USA) indicates that the gap between the transmissions of any two consecutive master signals is 99.9 nm. NOTE: Up to two chains can be displayed in the AUTO mode. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-33 . NO CONVERGENCE indicates the the Loran-C sensor can not acquire and track from initial position or cannot converge through base line extension region. LCS SUBSECTION 3/3 (Page 3 of 3) (AUTO Mode) AUTO: The Loran-C Sensor Mode of operation. NAV indicates that the Loran is suitable for navigation. Rev.600 microseconds long. LORAN FAIL indicates that the sensor interface is not operable. See Section 4 for a complete listing of possible chains. STATION SEARCH indicates that the Loran receiver is attempting to locate stations. . Column 1: The numerical display for the Loran-C chain GRI (Group Repetition Interval). The messages that can appear: INSUF STATIONS indicates that there is an insufficient number of stations for navigation. Column 2: The stations being used. Figure 2-40 Column 3 and 4: The Loran-C chain identifier.

Page Display Definitions LCS SUBSECTION 3/3 (Page 3 of 3) (MANUAL Mode) 9960: The selected GRI. 0 Dec/96 . • TOO FAR: Station is out of ground wave range. • TRACK: Station being used for navigation. LCS1 < < SUBSECTION 3/3 > MANUAL 9960 NE USA M 85 4. 2-34 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. W. or Z Station Column 2: Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR. 0. NE USA: The Loran Chain identifier. Y.0 to 9.0 SPARE --4. < < Figure 2-41 NOTE: Dashes in Column 2 and 3 indicate station is not being received. Column 4: Status Messages • DESELECT: Station has been manually deselected. Column 3: Envelope to Cycle Discrepancy (ECD. X.5 TRACK W X Y Z 30 70 -45 5.1 TRACK 6. • SPARE: Station acquired but not used to navigation.9 where 5.0 is optimum). 01 to 99). • BLINK: The coded warning contained in a Loran signal indicating the transmitted signal is in error.0 TRACK Status of Stations in Chain: Column 1: M. V.

As a result no altitude constraints will be provided for SIDS.Page Display Definitions VERTICAL NAVIGATION SECTION (VNAV KEY) Upon pressing the VNAV Key the VNAV 1/3 Page will be displayed and the following can be observed. EFIS altitude constraints at waypoints and VNAV WPT ALERT annunciation. Rev. including VERT DEV. SIDs. NO SXTK programmed 5. The MDA must be observed if the runway is not in sight. Can display one of the following: • INVALID: Indicates VNAV function is invalid. Valid lateral TO Waypoint 3. If the airport. Crosstrack (XTK) < 12. Valid vertical TO waypoint 4. the altitude associated with the MAP waypoint is computed from the FAF through the MAP waypoint to a point 50 feet above the runway threshold. VNAV 1/3 (Page 1 of 3) VNAV MODE: Mode required to fly to the vertical TO waypoint and Baro Altitude in feet. In order to be set valid the following must be met: 1.5NM • INACTIVE: VNAV system is not activated because non-volatile memory was erased during software update or it was manually set inactive before shutdown. STARS or Approaches. all external VNAV outputs are disabled. STARS or Approaches are obtained from the database altitudes will be provided. Air Data valid (baro altitude and altitude rate) 2. In some programmed approaches. Using BACK Key with the cursor over the inactive field can display one of the following: NOTE: When VNAV Mode is inactive. including airport elevation. VNAV PAGES NOTE: AFIS flight plans do not support any altitudes. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-35 . MDA may be reached prior to the MAP waypoint.

• LEVEL: Indicates aircraft should fly level to next constraint.4 01:13. TO Waypoint: Vertical TO waypoint with constraint altitude and applicable waypoint offset. (Figure 2-42) • CRUISE: Indicates holding altitude while enroute to Top of Descent (#TOD) point. (Figure 2-43) • PATH DESCENT: Indicates descent via programmed Flight Path Angle.4 08:06.5 400 97 /NM < < ACTUAL FPM UP < CLIMB GRAD < DATA Figure 2-42 VNAV 1/3 CRUISE TO #TOD < RANGE (NM) ETE @ #TOD FPM DN ACTUAL FPM UP < < < FL350 FL350 1214. (Figure 2-44) 2-36 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. This point becomes the Vertical TO Waypoint once the aircraft has passed the final climb constraint waypoint and is climbing. A= At or Above. The VERT DEV field will not be displayed if there is no vertical path programmed. Vertical Deviation will be enabled on the Vertical Deviation needle and the VERT DEV field is active.Page Display Definitions • CLIMB: Indicates climb required to cruise altitude or to next altitude restriction.8 800 0 ----- < VERT DEV < DATA Figure 2-43 VNAV 1/3 PATH DESCENT TO ELD -5 < EST CROSSING < < < FL345 FL250G FL250 600 600 87 REQUIRED FPM DN ACTUAL FPM DN < VERT DEV HIGH DATA? Figure 2-44 One of the following system generated VNAV profile points may also appear as the TO waypoint: • #TOC: Indicates the Top of Climb target altitude. Letters preceding or following the altitude constraint have the following meaning: FL=Flight Level. and a blank space=At constraint. VNAV 1/3 CLIMB TO #TOC < RANGE (NM) ETE < 5566 FL350 300. (Figure 2-44) • DESCENT: Indicates nonpath or Air Mass descent to altitude restriction. 0 Dec/96 . B=At or Below. G=Glide Path.

In this case #TOD will be determined using the default FPA from the VNAV DATA Page. (Figure 2-42) NOTE: VERT DEV data field is dashes if the ETE to descent path intercept is greater than one minute.Page Display Definitions • #TOD: Indicates the Top of Descent target altitude where the aircraft should begin its descent in order to arrive at the Descent Reference Waypoint at the required altitude. UP indicates a positive vertical speed and DN indicates a negative vertical speed. minutes and tenths. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-37 . HIGH indicates aircraft is above the path (Figure 2-44). (Figure 2-43) NOTE: If no Descent Reference Waypoint with crossing altitude is programmed. from the aircraft present position to the Vertical TO Waypoint #TOC or #TOD. (Figure 2-43) ACTUAL FPM: Actual vertical speed in feet per minute. This line will be blank if no FPA is programmed at descent reference waypoint. the system will use the arrival airport elevation to fix the #TOD as long as an airport is the last waypoint on the Active FPL. EST CROSSING: Altitude trajectory computed by the system to the Vertical TO waypoint based on current groundspeed and vertical speed (Figure 2-40). UP indicates a positive vertical speed and DN indicates a negative vertical speed (Figure 2-44). CLIMB GRAD xxx/NM is displayed during CLIMB mode to indicate current aircraft climb performance in feet per nautical mile. This field will display RANGE (NM) in miles and tenths when the Vertical TO Waypoint is a #TOD or #TOC profile point. (Figure 2-43) ETE: The estimated time enroute in hours. (Figure 243) REQUIRED FPM: Required vertical speed in feet per minute to make the altitude constraint based on current ground speed. LOW indicates aircraft is below path. Rev. This field will display @#TOD FPM DN when the Vertical TO Waypoint is the Top of Descent and indicate the descent target vertical speed. (Figures 2-43 and 244) VERT DEV: Vertical deviation of aircraft from this descent path in feet. However the FPA must still be entered for the system to provide a path.

2 595 0 ----- < < < CLIMB GRAD < DATA VERT DEV < DATA #TOC HEMET -5 15000A #TOD XYZ 10000G VNAV 1/3 CLIMB TO HEMET -5 < EST CROSSING < 1862 15000A 15329 575 575 233 /NM < < VNAV 1/3 PATH DESCENT TO XYZ < EST CROSSING < 12030 10000G 10500 1000 950 446 < < REQUIRED FPM UP ACTUAL FPM UP < REQUIRED FPM DN ACTUAL FPM DN < CLIMB GRAD DATA VERT DEV HIGH DATA Progression of Vertical Waypoints from Climb to Path Decent on VNAV 1/1 Figure 2-45 Rev. (Figure 2-44) Figures 2-45 and 2-46 further illustrate the meanings of the fields on VNAV Page 1.5 01:05. by placing the cursor over the DATA field and pressing the ENTER Key. VNAV 1/3 CLIMB TO #TOC < RANGE (NM) ETE < 15276 FL250 33.4 00:13.2 595 233 /NM < < ACTUAL FPM UP < VNAV 1/3 CRUISE TO #TOD < RANGE (NM) ETE @ #TOD FPM DN ACTUAL FPM UP < FL230 FL230 150. 0 Dec/96 2-38 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System .Page Display Definitions DATA: A prompt to access the VNAV DATA Page.

5 00:13.Page Display Definitions VNAV 1/3 CLIMB TO #TOC < RANGE (NM) ETE < 15276 FL250 33.2 595 233 /NM < < ACTUAL < FPM UP CLIMB GRAD DATA CLIMB #TOC Cruise Altitude =FL250 Last Departure altitude Groundspeed #TOC Range 1nm Vertical NOTE: Top of Climb appears as a Vertical Waypoint on the VNAV FPL Page when the aircraft is within 1 NM of the last departure waypoint that has an altitude VNAV 1/3 PATH DESCENT TO XYZ < EST CROSSING < 12030 10000G 10500 1000 950 446 < < DESCENT < REQUIRED FPM DN ACTUAL FPM DN VERT DEV HIGH DATA Vert Dev Required Vert Spd Actual Vert Spd Programmed Descent Path Direct FPA Programmed FPA Est Crossing Alt XYZ 10000G Descent Reference Wpt (at altitude constraint) Definition of Climb and Decent on VNAV 1/1 Figure 2-46 Rev. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-39 .

B=At or Below. A= At or Above. WAYPOINTS: Lateral and Vertical waypoints listed in order of occurrence with respect to the vertical profile. 0 Dec/96 . with constraint altitude and applicable waypoint offset. • PATH DESCENT: Same as on VNAV 1/1.FLIGHT PLAN WayPoint Pressing the VNAV Key will display the second VNAV Page and the following can be observed. (Figure 2-47) One of the following system generated VNAV profile points may also appear: • #TOC: Indicates the Top of Climb target altitude. • LEVEL: Same as on VNAV 1/1. VNAV MODE: Mode required to fly to the vertical TO waypoint and Baro Altitude in feet. (Figure 2-48) VNAV 2/3 PATH DESCENT ELD -5 < #PRESL MEI < DELBE VUZ < VXV BOSEY < < < < < < < FL338 FL250G FL250 --------FL180 --------ERASE Figure 2-47 VNAV 3/3 PATH DESCENT #T0D < BDR ALIXX < ISLET RW34 < +++++++ CMK < < FL338 FL250 --------2000G 435G ----2000A ERASE < < < < < Figure 2-48 2-40 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. and a blank space=At constraint. • CRUISE: Same as on VNAV 1/1. where FL=Flight Level.Page Display Definitions VNAV 2/3 (Page 2 of 3) . G=Glide Path. • #TOD: Indicates the Top of Descent target altitude. Can display one of the following: • INVALID: Same as on VNAV 1/1. • CLIMB: Same as on VNAV 1/1. • INACTIVE: Same as on VNAV 1/1. • DESCENT: Same as on VNAV 1/1.

(Figure 2-47) No Auto Leg change will occur beyond this point. Enter new waypoints on ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page. (Figure 2-48) ++++++ : A discontinuity in the flight plan that separates the missed approach waypoint from the rest of the approach. the CRUISE ALT changes to the same value as the PRESEL ALT. CRUISE ALT: Manually entered cruise altitude in feet or Flight Level (FL). Rev. VNAV DATA 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) NOTE: This page is accessed by using the Line Select Key to place the cursor over the DATA prompt on VNAV Page 1/X and pressing ENTER Key. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-41 . except the altitude constraint at the current lateral TO Waypoint. ERASE: < DATA ERASE < Figure 2-49 Used to erase all altitude constraints. WAYPOINT IDENTIFIERS: May consist of from one to six alphanumeric characters. subsequent pages will list the remaining waypoints. (Figure 2-49) DEN KAPA < VNAV 1/X ----5883 NOTE: Waypoints cannot be added to the active flight plan from the VNAV section. Field does not appear unless the system is configured for an altitude preselector and the aircraft is flying toward this altitude. An altitude less than 1000 feet must be entered with a preceding zero. If more identifiers are present than can be listed on this page.Page Display Definitions • #PRESL: Indicates the estimated position where the aircraft will arrive at the altitude shown on the Altitude Pre-Selector. (Figure 2-50) NOTE: In a climb. Any altitude entered greater than the transition level is converted and displayed as flight level (rounded off to the nearest hundred feet). when the aircraft is within 200ft of the Preselect Altitude.

TRANS LEVEL: Transition Level used to determine the altitude at which the system converts altitudes to Flight Levels. (Figure 2-50) NOTE: An analog type preselector only displays PRESEL ALT when the aircraft is within 1000ft of actual altitude. (Figure 2-50) 2-42 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. Range to Pre-selected Altitude in nautical miles and tenths (0. The default descent Flight Path Angle can be manually entered in degrees and tenths (0.0 range) (Figure 2-46). PRESEL ALT: If configured. RANGE (NM): If configured. If the PRESEL is analog the altitude value will remain in the CRUISE ALT field.7 00:13. However an FPA must be entered on the VNAV waypoint page to establish a PATH DESCENT and for Vert Dev or vertical deviations to be valid. the estimated time enroute to the Pre-selected Altitude in hours. minutes and tenths.0 < < < PRESEL RANGE ETE < ALT (NM) FL250 33. Preselected Altitude input from system. 0 Dec/96 . When the aircraft is within 200ft of the PRESEL ALT the CRUISE ALT changes again to the same value as the PRESEL ALT.0 Figure 2-50 unless it is manually entered. DEFAULT FPA is used to calculate #TOD to the first altitude constraint on the Active Flight Plan. as the decimal point (. (Figure 2-50) DEFAULT FPA: VNAV DATA 1/1 CRUISE ALT FL250 TRANS LEVEL FL180 < DEFAULT FPA 3. (Figure 2-50) ETE: If configured.0 to 999. in feet or Flight Level.) prefills as a default.9 range). NOTE: Pilot enters numbers only. This field defaults to FL180 if the pilot does not enter a value.Page Display Definitions The field also goes to dashes during a descent (digital systems only) when the aircraft is 200ft lower than the CRUISE ALT and the Preselect is set to a lower value.1 to 6.6 < The FPA defaults to the 3.

The following may appear in the altitude field: • FL: Flight Level (Preceding the Altitude Value) • A: At or Above (Following the Altitude Value) • B: At or Below (Following the Altitude Value) • Blank space: At (Following the Altitude Value) NOTE: If the destination airport or runway is manually entered. (Figure 2-51) This field is displayed for the active vertical waypoint.8 < < < Figure 2-51 Rev. Any altitude entered greater than the transition level (from the VNAV DATA Page) is converted and displayed as flight level rounded off to the nearest hundred feet.Page Display Definitions VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) Accessed by placing the cursor over a lateral WPT and pressing the VNAV Key or by placing the cursor over a WPT in the VNAV section and pressing ENTER key. An altitude less than 1000 feet must be entered with a preceding zero. EST CROSSING: Altitude trajectory computed by the system to the Vertical TO Waypoint based on current groundspeed and Vertical speed. the airport elevation will be displayed in the altitude field. the airport elevation will not be available. or if the airport/runway is loaded from the database. If the flight plan is loaded through AFIS.0 DIRECT FPA DN 2. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-43 . Altitudes below sea level are limited to -1000 feet. WAYPOINT: VNAV waypoint will consist of from one to six alphanumeric characters. ALT: Constraint altitude prefills from database or can be manually entered. VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1 WAYPOINT ISTET ALT 2000 EST CROSSING FL250 OFFSET --REQ FPM DN 825 FPA (AUTO) DN 3.

but a (-) prefills as a default to cross prior to the fix. OFFSET: VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1 WAYPOINT VUZ ALT FL180 EST CROSSING FL180 OFFSET --REQ FPM DN 825 FPA (AUTO) DN 3.3 < < < Figure 2-53 Rev. • DIR: Indicates direct FPA programmed. (Figure 2-53) • AUTO: Indicates system computed FPA.3 DIRECT FPA DN 2. 0 Dec/96 2-44 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System . VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1 WAYPOINT ELD ALT FL250 EST CROSSING FL254 OFFSET -5 REQ FPM DN 625 FPA (DIR) DN 2. FPA (Flight Path Angle): Flight Path Angle for path descent to waypoint in degrees and tenths with valid range 0.4 < < < Figure 2-52 Pilot entered value in nautical miles (-99 to +99 range) where a positive entry (+) indicates an offset beyond the waypoint and a negative (-) entry is prior to the waypoint. UP indicates a positive vertical speed and DN indicates a negative vertical speed is required. NOTE: If PLAN CROSSING is displayed. NOTE: Pilot must enter the leading (+) sign for the offset to be beyond the fix.Page Display Definitions PLAN CROSSING: System determined crossing based on programmed constraints and flight path angles for descent. • MAN: Indicates manually entered FPA.0. REQ FPM will be dashes if ground speed or air data is not valid. (Figure 2-52) This field is displayed for other than the Active Vertical Waypoint and will be displayed in place of EST CROSSING.1 to 6. then the REQ FPM is the planned vertical speed for the waypoint. The following may appear in parentheses: • DB: Indicates FPA from database.0 DIRECT FPA DN 0. REQ FPM (Required Feet Per Minute): Required vertical speed in feet per minute the aircraft must maintain to reach the Vertical waypoint.

This quantity must be initially entered or verified by the pilot and may require periodic verification or update. These examples show the maximum number of pages available. (Figure 2-54) Rev.0). (Figure 2-54) PLAN 1/8 FUEL STATUS REMAINING RESERVE FLOW HOURS RANGE NM/LB LB 2990 1000 1200 01+39 229 0. REMAINING: Figure 2-54 The total fuel on board in pounds or kilograms.0 to 90.Page Display Definitions • DEF: Indicates FPA default from VNAV DATA Page. and DEF can be accessed using the BACK Key. AUTO. NOTE: DIR. This unit can be manually changed to KG if desired. DIRECT FPA: Direct Flight Path Angle from the current aircraft altitude to the Vertical waypoint in degrees and tenths (valid range 0. NOTE: The number of PLAN pages (which can vary from 6 to 8) is dynamically allocated deprending on system configuration and whether FDE has been calculated. where DN indicates negative FPA and UP indicates positive FPA. PLANNING SECTION (PLAN KEY) Upon pressing the PLAN Key the PLAN 1/8 Page will be displayed and the following can be observed. PLAN PAGES PLAN 1/8 (Page 1 of 8) FUEL STATUS FUEL STATUS LB: Indicates that fuel is being computed in pounds.115 > > NOTE: The cursor must first be placed over the remaining field so the LB field can be activated. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-45 . AFIS SECTION (AFIS KEY) Refer to Section 7 for description and operation of AFIS. using the BACK Key when the cursor is over the LB field.

This may require periodic verification or update.Page Display Definitions RESERVE: The desired reserve. as entered or verified by the operator. 0 Dec/96 . (MAN) indicates a pilot manual entry and the entry must be manually verified and periodically updated. 2-46 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. (Figure 2-55) Fuel flow and ground speed must be valid.115 > > NOTE: The above three quantities will flash after 15 Figure 2-55 minutes and will require verification by using the Line Select and ENTER Keys if MAN fuel flow was selected. RANGE: The nautical mile range available until the reserve fuel quantity is reached. VERIFY INPUTS: Each of the flashing values must be verified or entered by pressing the ENTER Key when the cursor is over each field. This field only appears if fuel flow is input manually. (Figure 2-54) FLOW: The current fuel flow in pounds or kilograms input automatically from fuel flow indicators. (Figure 2-55) NOTE: This field displays VERIFY INPUTS at system turn-on since REMAINING and RESERVE are stored in non-volatile memory during system shut-down. (Figure 2-55) LAST INPUT: The time in hours and minutes since the above three quantities were verified. HOURS: The hours and minutes of fuel remaining until the reserve fuel quantity is reached. This field is only displayed after the system is turned on and will be displayed in place of the LAST INPUT field on line 6. (Figure 2-55) Fuel flow and ground speed must be valid. displayed in pounds or kilograms. (Figure 2-55) PLAN 1/8 FUEL STATUS REMAINING RESERVE FLOW (MAN) LAST INPUT: HOURS RANGE NM/LB LB 2990 1000 1200 00:15 01+39 229 0.

When a leg change occurs it will not be evident as long as the Trip Plan page is displayed. (Figure 256) NOTE: The TO field is not dynamic as long as the Trip Plan page is displayed.5 FPL 1346/05+18 ETA @ LIT 16:18 RAIM @ LIT AVAIL < < < The FROM waypoint identifier is followed on the same Figure 2-56 line by the first waypoint (origin) on the selected flight plan (KDAL). The FROM waypoint is usually replaced by DIRECT.0/T073 ETE 00:16. (Figure 2-56) FR: PLAN 2/8 TRIP PLAN A DIRECT KDAL < TO ELD RW34 GS (MAN) 254 DIS/DTK 21. TRIP PLAN: The flight plan selected will be designated by an "A" for the Active Flight Plan. (MAN) and ETA value will change to yellow.Page Display Definitions NM/LB: The number of nautical miles for each pound (or kilogram) of fuel consumed. PLAN 2/8 (Page 2 of 8) TRIP PLAN Pressing the PLAN Key again will display the PLAN 2/8 Page. (CALC) will replace (MAN) field if a manual ETA is entered on line 9. a number (1 to 56) for a stored flight plan. The GS value.. (Figure 2-56) TO: The TO waypoint identifier is followed on the same line by the last waypoint (destination) on the selected flight plan (RW34). This page may be used to monitor the Active Flight Plan progress or a stored flight plan may be loaded on this page for planning purposes.dashes if no active Flight Plan is loaded.. or . (Figure 2-56) Rev. GS: The groundspeed in knots is input automatically when the groundspeed is valid or can be inserted manually which is indicated by (MAN). 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-47 . (Figure 2-55)Fuel flow and ground speed must be valid.

2-48 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. or last waypoint on the Active Flight Plan that precedes a "fence". The DTK will have a T adjacent to it if a true heading input is received or if the FROM waypoint is north N 70° or south S 60° latitude. indicating that the ETA is calculated based on the manual ground speed value. (or the aircraft's present position when a Direct To leg is displayed). minutes and tenths of minutes between the aircraft's present position and the TO waypoint or the FROM and TO waypoints based on the GS value. appears when a DIRECT TO leg is displayed. STANDBY will be displayed momentarily while the system calculates RAIM availability. (Figure 2-56) ETE: The estimated time enroute in hours. RAIM @: Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring at the last flight plan waypoint will display AVAIL (available) or NOT AVAIL (not available) at the ETA. (Figure 2-56) FPL: The total active or stored flight plan distance and time remaining via the Flight Planned route from the FROM waypoint. Distance is displayed in whole miles and time is in hours and minutes. (Figure 2-56) NOTE: The ETA value field will turn yellow if a ground speed is entered manually.Page Display Definitions DIS/DTK: The distance in nautical miles and tenths between either the FROM and TO waypoints or between the aircraft's present position and the TO waypoint. (Figure 2-56) ETA @: Estimated time of arrival at the destination. to the last waypoint on the selected flight plan that precedes a "fence". If a manual ground speed or ETA has been entered. The GS field will turn yellow and (CALC) will be displayed if a manual ETA value is entered. 0 Dec/96 . NO NAV will be displayed. The desired track is the Great Circle course between the FROM and TO waypoints. If GPS is not functioning.

(Figure 2-57) GS: The ground speed in knots is input automatically when the groundspeed is valid or can be input manually. (Figure 2-57) LEG FUEL: The amount of fuel in pounds (or kilograms) used on the current FROM/TO leg or from the aircraft's present position to the current TO waypoint. (Figure 2-57) TO: The TO waypoint identifier is followed on the same line by the last waypoint (destination) on the selected flight plan. FUEL PLAN: The "A" indicates that Active Flight Plan information is being displayed. (Figure 2-57) FLOW: The fuel flow in pounds or kilograms is input automatically from fuel flow indicators/transmitters or can be inserted manually. fuel flow and distance. This calculated value Rev. (Figure 257) FPL FUEL: The total amount of fuel anticipated to be consumed to the last waypoint on the flight plan that precedes a "fence". (Figure 2-57) Dashes are displayed if there is no active Flight Plan. which is indicated by (MAN). A numeric entry in the field provides fuel planning for stored flight plans. The FROM waypoint is usually replaced by DIRECT. based on groundspeed.Page Display Definitions PLAN 3/8 (Page 3 of 8) FUEL PLAN Pressing the FPL Key again will display the PLAN 3/8 Page. GS value and (MAN) will be yellow. FR: PLAN 3/8 FUEL PLAN A DIRECT KDAL < TO ELD RW34 GS (MAN) FLOW (MAN) LEG FUEL FPL FUEL REM @ RW34 < 250 400 105 2148 675 < The FROM waypoint identifiFigure 2-57 er is followed on the same line by the first waypoint (origin) on the selected flight plan. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-49 . which is indicated by (MAN).

It indicates the amount of fuel remaining overhead at destination. for each engine as taken from the fuel flow indication system. DATE: Same as the Initialization Page. PLAN 4/8 (Page 4 of 8) FUEL FLOW Pressing the FPL Key again will display the PLAN 4/8 Page. (Figure 2-57) REM @: Appears only if a DIRECT TO leg is displayed. groundspeed values and distance. both DATE and GMT can be corrected on this page but the takeoff and time values will be affected. from all engines. NOTE: If necessary. PLAN 5/8 (Page 5 of 8) DATE/GMT Pressing the PLAN Key again will display the PLAN 5/8 Page. 0 Dec/96 2-50 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System . ENGINE: The fuel flow. in pounds or kilograms per hour. (Figure 2-58). (Figure 2-58) PLAN 4/8 FUEL FLOW ENGINE ENGINE ENGINE ENGINE TOTAL 1 2 3 4 300 298 295 307 1200 Figure 2-58 NOTE: This page will appear only if the system is configured for automatic fuel flow and the individual engine fuel flow is available. or the last waypoint on the Flight Plan that precedes a "fence". Rev. TOTAL: The total fuel flow. GMT: Same as the Initialization Page. The entire REM @ field will turn yellow if the REM @ value is less than the programmed reserve on PLAN 1/8 Page. This value is based on the REMAINING fuel quantity from the FUEL STATUS page minus the total FPL fuel (Figure 2-57).Page Display Definitions is based on the current fuel flow. the number of engines shown will depend on system configuration. under current conditions. in pounds or kilograms per hour.

This field is not displayed until weight-on-wheels plus 10 seconds occurs. (Figure 2-59) DATE GMT TAKEOFF LAND FLIGHT TIME PLAN 5/8 18 FEB 95 14:13 20:43 22:45 02+02 < Figure 2-59 NOTE: TAKEOFF and LAND times may be based on groundspeed and/or TAS valids depending upon system configuration. BASIC OP WT: The combined weight in pounds or kilograms of the empty aircraft. (Figure 2-60) VERIFY INPUTS: Each of the flashing values must be verified or entered by pressing the ENTER Key when the cursor is over each field. and crew baggage.Page Display Definitions TAKEOFF: The GMT at weight-offwheels plus 10 seconds. cargo. (Figure 2-60) PAYLOAD: Weight in pounds or kilograms of passengers. 2 Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-51 . crew members. (Figure 2-59) PLAN 6/8 (Page 6 of 8) AIRCRAFT WEIGHT Pressing the PLAN Key again will display the PLAN 6/8 Page. This field is displayed only after system turn on. PLAN 6/8 AIRCRAFT WEIGHT BASIC OP WT PAYLOAD FUEL ON BOARD VERIFY FUEL FUEL USED GROSS WT 7400 400 2937 101 10737 < < < Figure 2-60 Rev. and baggage (excluding crew). (Figure 2-59) LAND: The GMT at weight-onwheels. FLIGHT TIME: The elapsed flight time is displayed in hours and minutes. (Figure 2-60) FUEL ON BOARD: Weight in pounds or kilograms of fuel on board.

Page Display Definitions VERIFY FUEL: This is displayed in the same field as VERIFY INPUTS if a manual fuel flow has been entered and has not been verified for 15 minutes or more. DEPART GMT: Time for which FDE prediction is to be calculated. 2-52 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. This page is used DEPART DT 20 DEC 95 < if GPS will be the sole naviDEPART GMT --:-gation source in ROUTE SPACING -. 0 Dec/96 . GROSS WT: The total weight in pounds or kilograms of basic operating weight. and accuraFigure 2-61 cy.< END FDE WPT ----entered to make the necesEXCLUDE SATS (QTY 0) < sary FDE prediction to deterPREDICTION UNAVAIL mine sufficient satellite availability. integrity. (Figure 2-60) PLAN 7/8 (Page 7 of 8) FDE Prediction Pressing the PLAN Key PLAN 7/8 again will display the PLAN FDE 7/8 Page. DEPART DT: Date for which FDE prediction is to be calculated. ROUTE SPACING: Centerline to centerline route spacing of segment for which FDE is being calculated. FUEL USED: If configured for Automatic Fuel Flow. payload and fuel on board displayed after all values have been entered. All entries made on this page will remain until changed or the system is powered down. (Figure 2-60) NOTE: This field appears as dashes at power up and increments as auto fuel flow data is available.< Oceanic/Remote operation. 1 to 99 nautical miles may be entered. EXPECTED GS --The following information is START FDE WPT ----. the weight in pounds or kilograms of fuel consumed. See Figure 2-61. 60NM is a normal entry.

Page Display Definitions EXPECTED GS: Estimated ground speed for the route segment. When the cursor is placed over this field and ENTER is pressed. EXCLUDE SATS (QTY x): Displays the number of satellites currently being excluded from the FDE prediction. See Figure 2-65 FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1/1 EXCLUDED SATS LIST SAT #-< < OK? ENTER Figure 2-63 Rev. The following is a list of the other possible messages displayed in this field: • START CALC? ENTER: This is displayed when the aircraft is on the ground and all data has been entered. resulting in an undefined Oceanic/Remote segment. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-53 . A value of 100 to 999 may be entered. Pressing ENTER while the dashes are displayed will clear the start and end waypoints. Pressing the BACK Key will cycle through the waypoints on the active flight plan. Placing the cursor over this field allows waypoint entry. See Figure 2-63 ENTRY REQUIRED: PLAN 7/8 FDE DEPART DT 25 DEC 95 < DEPART GMT 13:00 ROUTE SPACING 35 < EXPECTED GS 300 START FDE WPT JFK < END FDE WPT EBBR EXCLUDE SATS (QTY 0) < START CALC? ENTER Figure 2-62 This is displayed If the aircraft is on the ground and not all the data has been entered. Dashes are displayed prior to the last waypoint on the flight plan. The BACK and dashes operate the same here as in the START FDE WPT field. Up to seven satellites may be excluded at a given time. the FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1/1 Page will be displayed. START FDE WPT: First waypoint on the Oceanic/Remote route segment. END FDE WPT: Last waypoint in the Oceanic/Remote route segment. Pressing ENTER will start the FDE calculation and display PLAN 8/8 FDE COMPUTATION.

All other fields are disabled at this point. SAT #: OK? ENTER FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1/1 EXCLUDED SATS LIST 12 14 02 16 19 22 07 SAT #02 CLEAR ALL < < Figure 2-64 The desired satellite being excluded from FDE prediction is entered by pressing the Line Select Key by this field and entering the number of the satellite. See Figures 2-65 xx% COMPLETE: The number displayed is the percentage of calculation completed. • PREDICTION UNAVAIL: This will be displayed if the GPS is not in the idle state or the aircraft is not on the ground. Entering a number already listed and pressing ENTER will remove the number from the list. FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) This page is accessed by placing the cursor over the EXCLUDE SATS (QTY x) field on PLAN 7/8 Page and pressing ENTER. Press ENTER to add the satellite to the list.Page Display Definitions • NEED ACTIVE FPL: This will be displayed if there are less than two waypoints on the active flight plan. • PRED IN PROGRESS: This is displayed when an FDE prediction is in progress.STANDBY: This display will flash while FDE prediction is being calculated.STANDBY 51% COMPLETE CANCEL COMPUTE < Figure 2-65 2-54 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. PLAN 8/8 FDE COMPUTATION COMPUTING . EXCLUDE SATS LIST: The designated satellite number being excluded from the FDE prediction is listed here. Pressing the Line Select Key next to CLEAR ALL and pressing ENTER will remove all satellites from the exclusion list. • BACK FOR NEXT WPT: Displayed when the cursor is over the start or end waypoint field. 0 Dec/96 . PLAN 8/8 (Page 8 of 8) FDE COMPUTATION COMPUTING .

Page Display Definitions When the FDE prediction is complete. PLAN 8/8 FDE COMPUTATION FDE AVAILABLE NAV AVAILABLE GPS PRIMARY MEANS NAV OK Figure 2-66 PLAN 8/8 FDE COMPUTATION FDE UNAVAILABLE NAV UNAVAILABLE GPS PRIMARY MEANS NAV NOT ALLOWED Figure 2-67 Rev. Normal calculation time is from ten to twenty minutes. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-55 . the system will display either FDE and NAV are available or unavailable. See Figures 2-66 and 2-67.

2-56 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. A T indicates the system is operating in the Figure 2-68 true heading mode. but no intercept. (Figure 2-69) • CANCEL: indicates Heading Mode is OFF. HEADING VECTOR 1/1 < < < HDG 348 INTERCEPT TO DFW DTK 270 NO COURSE INTERCEPT OK? ENTER > Figure 2-69 NOTE: If any of the mode words are followed by a ? the mode is not active. the cursor will move to the Heading Mode field and HDG SELECT? will be displayed. This field < may also prefill with current CANCEL aircraft heading if heading is valid. HEADING PAGE HEADING VECTOR 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) HDG: HEADING VECTOR 1/1 Commanded heading in HDG 348 whole degrees. 0 Dec/96 . Pilot may manually TO DFW DTK 270 < enter heading. The ENTER key must be pressed to activate the mode. After a heading entry is made and the ENTER Key is pressed. • HDG SELECT: indicates Heading Mode is ON. A turn direction R or L may also be ENTER HDG entered. HEADING MODE: Use BACK Key to select one of the following: • INTERCEPT: indicates Heading Mode is ON and will intercept next leg of the flight plan if the remaining fields are verified or entered.Page Display Definitions HEADING SECTION (HDG KEY) Upon pressing the HDG Key the HEADING VECTOR 1/1 Page will be displayed and the following can be observed.

ARC. FCF. INTERCEPT Messages: If the Intercept Mode is programmed one of the following messages may appear. PT. (The TO side of the fix) • NO ARC INTERCEPT indicates commanded heading will not intercept the arc programmed on the approach procedure. OK? ENTER: The procedure for accepting the entered heading. NOTE: If the default desired track is changed. HP. FAF or MAP waypoint above the TO waypoint field. • No Message indicates an intercept is not programmed. (Figure 2-69) Rev. the DTK will be from present position to the current TO waypoint. (Figure 2-69) If the system is displaying Direct TO a waypoint. DTK: Desired track is the Great Circle course in whole degrees between the FROM and TO waypoints from Navigation Page 1. • NO COURSE INTERCEPT indicates the commanded heading will cause the aircraft to diverge from the programmed course (crosstrack deviation will increase). (Figure 2-69) • INTERCEPT BEYOND FIX indicates the commanded heading will cause the aircraft to intercept the programmed course on the FROM side of the fix. using the BACK Key will step through to the end of the Active Flight Plan waypoints. 2 Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-57 . a Pseudo Vortac (selected course) leg will be programmed on the NAVIGATION 1/4 Page. The system will identify an IAF. (Figure 2-69) NOTE: With the cursor over the TO Waypoint field.Page Display Definitions TO WAYPOINT: Prefills with current TO Waypoint or is enterable (from one to six alphanumeric characters). or the commanded heading will intercept the programmed course prior to the fix. TO waypoint or DTK is to depress the ENTER Key.

COMM 1 or COMM 2: The information for each Comm radio. (Figure 2-70) TUNE 1/4 COMM 1 ACTIVE (MAN) PRESET TRANSFER? COMM 2 ACTIVE (MAN) PRESET 121. TUNING PAGES TUNE 1/4 (Page 1 of 4) COMM NOTE: If the system is configured for two or less communications radios.55 127. If the (MAN) field is blank. (MAN) in this field indicates the frequency was manually entered via the control head (Figure 2-70). the tune section will display only three pages.50 135. (Figure 2-70) ACTIVE: NOTE: If the frequency currently tuned and displayed on the respective control head. (Figure 2-70) TRANSFER?: The displayed PRESET frequency can be transferred to ACTIVE when the ENTER key is depressed. the system interface does not provide a return frequency input. appears briefly but turns to dashes.20 132.77 > > Figure 2-70 TUNE 2/4 (Page 2 of 4) COMM The same information from the first page is displayed here for additional COMM radios. the system was tuned via the CDU keyboard. The control head will reflect this change. 0 Dec/96 . PRESET: The pilot can enter and store a frequency in this field through the keyboard.Page Display Definitions TUNING SECTION (TUNE KEY) Upon pressing the TUNE Key the TUNE 1/4 Page will be displayed and the following can be observed. 2-58 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

FREQ: The frequency currently tuned and displayed on the respective control head. TUNE 3/4 The field may also show (KEY) if the ident is unknown NAV 1 SGF < and the frequency was tuned FREQ (MAN) 116. NO ID is displayed in this field if the identifier of the held station is unknown. RANGE 105.Page Display Definitions TUNE 3/4 (Page 3 of 4) NAV Pressing the TUNE Key again will display this page and the following information may be observed.2 this field indicates the VPU is BRG 071 automatically tuning the NAV radio. (MAN) in this field indicates the frequency was manually entered via the control head.50 is known.90 via the CDU keyboard. 1 Aug/97 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-59 . NAV 1 or NAV 2: The station identifier to which the respective NAV receiver is tuned. (KEY) will be displayed when the frequency or identifier of the station has been entered using the CDU keyboard. (Figure 2-71) The station identifier can also appear in the field between the range and range value field if the control head is placed in the DME HOLD mode. (Figure 2-71) Rev. BRG: The bearing in whole degrees from aircraft present position to the VOR. No annunciation in RANGE 109. (Figure 2-71) Figure 2-71 RANGE: The range in nautical miles and tenths from aircraft present position to the DME.0 (KEY) will appear in the NAV BRG 350 1 or NAV 2 field if the IDENT NAV 2 ARG < FREQ (MAN) 114.

The Bearing information is suppressed and DME is annunciated instead of NAV.71a).1 4.2 54.3 ARG 118. Figure 2-71a TUNE 3/4 DME 1 FREQ RANGE DME 2 FREQ RANGE DRK 114. the system interface does not provide a return frequency input. (Figure 2-72) NOTE: If either the XPDR or ADF frequencies are tuned via the CDU keyboard the (MAN) field will be blank.6 < < When the non-dedicated DM441B is configured.71b). 1 Aug/97 2-60 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System . It may also be annunciated with (MAN). (MAN) indicates the entry was made through the control head. < Figure 2-71b XPDR: NOTE: If the transponder reply code appears briefly after tuning but turns to dashes.3 ARG 118. The Bearing information is suppressed . the TUNE 3/4 page is different (Figure 2. the TUNE 3/4 page is different (Figure 2.2 54.1 4. (Figure 2-72) ADF: NOTE: If the frequency that the ADF is tuned to appears briefly but turns to dashes because the system interface does not provide a return frequency input. TUNE 3/4 DME 1 FREQ RANGE DME 2 FREQ RANGE DRK 114. TUNE 4/4 XPDR 1 XPDR 2 ADF ADF 1 2 (MAN) (MAN) (MAN) (MAN) 1200 2400 610 930 > > > Figure 2-72 Rev.Page Display Definitions When the dedicated DM441B is configured.6 < TUNE 4/4 (Page 4 of 4) XPDR/ADF Pressing the TUNE Key again will display this page and the following information may be observed.

(Figure 2-73) Figure 2-73 • HOLDING PATTERN ENTRY AND STATUS MESSAGE: If the entry course to the holding fix can be determined. PLAN 8/8 FDE COMPUTATION FDE AVAILABLE NAV AVAILABLE GPS PRIMARY MEANS NAV OK HOLDING PATTERN 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) AT: The Holding Fix and country name or airport ident. Rev. • PARALLEL ENTRY: indicates the system will use a parallel entry to the holding pattern. See Figure 2-75 for Teardrop Entry pattern. • TEARDROP ENTRY: indicates the system will use a teardrop entry to the holding pattern. See Figure 2-74 for Direct Entry pattern.Page Display Definitions HOLDING PATTERN SECTION (HOLD KEY) HOLDING PATTERN PAGE This page is accessed by depressing the HOLD Key when the cursor is positioned over a Waypoint Identifier. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-61 . • DIRECT ENTRY: indicates the system will use a direct entry to the holding pattern. See Figure 2-76 for Parallel Entry pattern. the entry procedure will be annunciated after all the holding pattern parameters are entered.

Page Display Definitions

Entry Course

Outbound End Turn Point 70°

Holding Course

Outbound End Turn Point 70°

Holding Course

Entry Course

Direct Entry Pattern Figure 2-74

2-62

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

Rev. 0 Dec/96

Page Display Definitions

Turn Anticipation

F 30°

rom

Ho

ng ldi

Co

urs

e

Leg Le

ngth
Holding Course

Entry Course 70°

Direct to Holding Fix

30°

m Fro

H

ing old

Cou

rse

Leg Le

ngth
Holding Course

Entry Course 70°

Teardrop Entry Pattern Figure 2-75

Rev. 0 Dec/96

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

2-63

Page Display Definitions

Entry Course 110° Go Direct to Holding Fix Holding Course

Leg Length

Out Bound End Turn Point

Note Path of 1st lap of holding pattern after entry procedure

110°

Entry C

ourse

Holding Course

Parallel Entry Pattern Figure 2-76

2-64

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

Rev. 0 Dec/96

Page Display Definitions
• HOLDING: indicates the system has entered the Holding Pattern. (Figure 2-77) • EXIT HOLD: indicates the system will exit the holding pattern the next time over the holding fix. INBOUND CRS (course): The inbound holding course in whole degrees. This field can be True or Magnetic according to the display mode selected by the TRUE/MAG switch input. A T appears if in the True mode (Figure 2-77). The T field will be blank if the system is Magnetic mode. MAX HOLDING TAS: This field is computed based on configuration module max holding indicated airspeed and worst case winds. It represents the maximum true airspeed in the holding pattern that will assure that the aircraft remains in protected airspace. (Figure 2-77) TURN DIR (direction): RIGHT indicates the standard default holding pattern turn direction. The non-standard LEFT turn can be accessed using the BACK Key when the cursor is over this field. (Figure 2-77) LEG TIME: Holding Pattern inbound leg time in minutes and tenths (1.0 to 9.9). (Figure 2-77)
HOLDING PATTERN 1/1 AT DILLY HOLDING < INBOUND CRS T305 MAX HOLDING TAS 261 < TURN DIR RIGHT LEG TIME 1.5 < LEG DIS (5.8) EXIT MODE MANUAL < CANCEL?

Figure 2-77

NOTE: The LEG TIME may be in parentheses indicating that the time has been calculated using LEG DIS.
LEG DIST (distance): Holding Pattern inbound leg distance in nautical miles (1.0 nm to 50.0 nm). (Figure 2-77)

NOTE: The LEG DIS may be in parentheses indicating that the distance has been calculated using LEG TIME.

Rev. 0 Dec/96

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

2-65

Page Display Definitions
EXIT MODE: The MANUAL default indicates the system will stay in the holding pattern indefinitely. Using the BACK Key with the cursor over this field AUTO can be selected if the ENTER key is pressed. The system will then execute a holding pattern entry and exit the next time crossing the fix waypoint. (Figure 2-77)

NOTE: If a holding pattern is selected an HP is annunciated next to the waypoint on Flight Plan, Navigation and Direct To Pages.
OK? ENTER: Depressing ENTER Key when this prompt appears at the bottom of the Holding Pattern Page programs a Holding Pattern for a particular waypoint.

NOTE: The cursor will not appear in this field.
CANCEL: Used to cancel a holding pattern. (Figure 2-77) POSITION FIX PAGE This page is accessed by depressing the HOLD Key anytime the cursor is not displayed over a waypoint. POS: The composite (system) position coordinates at the moment the HOLD Key was depressed in degrees, minutes, and hundredths of minutes. (Figure 2-78) IDENT: The alphanumeric designator of the reference waypoint used to check or update position. (Figure 2-78) FIX : The actual coordinates of the reference point in degrees, minutes, and hundredths of minutes. (Figure 2-78)
POSITION FIX POS N 33 37.50 W116 09.50
< <

IDENT ----FIX ---------< ---------DIF -------------------

Figure 2-78

2-66

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

Rev. 0 Dec/96

Page Display Definitions
DIF: The difference between the composite position and the FIX (or other sensor) position in degrees, minutes and hundredths of minutes. (Figure 2-78)

NOTE: Position coordinates of individual sensors and the difference between those sensor positions and the composite (system) position may be displayed by moving the cursor over the FIX field and depressing the BACK Key. The composite position may be updated to the most accurate sensor by pressing the BACK Key until the desired sensor appears, then pressing the ENTER Key twice.

DIRECT TO SECTION ( d KEY)
DIRECT TO PAGES

DIRECT 1/2 (Page 1 of 2)
This display is accessed through the d key and presents a listing of all Active Flight Plan waypoints on as many pages as is appropriate to display all of the waypoints. The cursor may be positioned over any desired identifier (ahead of or behind the aircraft) to proceed DIRECT (Figure 2-79). A new waypoint may be added to the flight plan to proceed direct. TO: When this page is accessed, the cursor is displayed over the current TO waypoint. (Figure 2-79) The following may also be displayed with a waypoint: HP (Holding Pattern), PT (Procedure Turn), MAP (Missed Approach Point), FAF (Final Approach Fix), and IAF (Initial Approach Fix).
DIRECT KDAL DFW < TO HART 19DFW < HP ELD MEI < DELBE VUZ < VZV
<

1/2

BOSEY BULEY HNN SUMET AIR CYN BUONO DPK GWENY

< < < < <

Figure 2-79

Rev. 0 Dec/96

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

2-67

Page Display Definitions
DIR CLOSEST ARP 2/2 (Page 2 of 2)
DIRECT TO CLOSEST AIRPORT: The Closest Airport page is the last page in the DIRECT TO section. Up to nine airports are displayed, in order of their proximity to the aircraft, with the closest airport listed first. (Figure 280)
DIR CLOSET ARP 1/2 TO 312 344/ 10 I18 045/ 14 < I43 301/ 29 KUNI 344/ 29 < KCRW 141/ 31 KHTS 230/ 34 < I28 254/ 35 KPMH 281/ 39 < KPKB 040/ 45
<

< > < > < > < > > <

Figure 2-80

NOTE: Airports listed from the database on this page have runways 4000 ft long or greater and are hard surfaced.

WAYPOINT SECTION
WAYPOINT PAGES Waypoints fall into four categories: • Database generated • Pilot entered (personalized/ offset) • Special • Obsolete Waypoint Pages can be accessed from any FLIGHT PLAN, NAV, d , HOLD, INITIALIZATION, HEADING, or TRIP PLAN/FUEL PLAN Pages.

DATABASE WPT 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) Database Generated Waypoints
This page is accessed by typing in a waypoint identifier or by placing the cursor over a waypoint identifier and pressing ENTER. Database Generated Waypoints are automatically updated when accessed and cannot be modified by the operator. The four basic types of waypoints residing in the data base are navaids, airports, intersections and special waypoints.

2-68

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

Rev. 0 Dec/96

60 W02705. for another location. (Figure 2-81) Figure 2-81 Press the NXT Key to sequence to the next waypoint page with a different country code. the closest waypoint to the aircraft position will be shown and the country code will be displayed beneath the waypoint identifier. (Figure 2-81) ELEV: The elevation in feet of the station (DME equipped VHF Navaids only). Additional country codes and corresponding POS coordinates will be sequentially displayed. A (-) indicates elevation is below sea level.20 W 14 172 Figure 2-82 Rev. (Figure 2-81) WAYPOINT POS FREQ VAR ELEV NDB-ENTER TRM USA N 3337.60 116. (Figure 2-81) VAR: The magnetic variation of the station. POS: The coordinates of the waypoint as stored in the database memory. (Figure 2-82) DATABASE WPT WAYPOINT POS FREQ VAR ELEV NDB-ENTER 2/4 TRM PORTU N 3845.20 E 13 -110 DATABASE WPT 1/4 NOTE: If the waypoint has a duplicate identifier in the database.Page Display Definitions VHF Navaids WAYPOINT: Alphanumeric designator for the Navaid. The PRV Key can be used to sequence backward through the waypoint pages. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-69 .60 116. (Figure 2-81) FREQ: The VHF frequency for the station. (Figure 2-81) NDB -ENTER: The procedure for accepting the waypoint from the Navigation Data Base is to depress the ENTER Key.70 W11609.

Canada and the Continental USA. For example.10 RW19R Figure 2-84 2-70 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. use the IDENTIFIER found in the Jeppesen charts.40 NDB-ENTER Figure 2-83 International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) identifiers are used to access data in the database.50 W117 52. In most cases. Hawaii and Alaska identifiers begin with "P".Page Display Definitions Non-Directional Beacons (NDBs) NDBs stored in the internal database are listed in Jeppesen publications with a 1. you must enter PRNB. The ICAO code letter prefix for Continental USA airports is "K". ICAO identifiers differ in some cases from those familiar to many pilots. To distinguish these NDBs from VHF NAVAIDS. these identifiers begin with a letter that corresponds to the geographic area in which the airport is located. The following are guidelines to access information from the database: Except for a few hundred 3 or 4 letter/number airport identifiers in Alaska. To access a 4 character identifier. all airport identifiers stored in the database have 4 letters. (Figure 2-83) Airports DATABASE WPT WAYPOINT POS 1/14 PRNB CAN N 54 15. 0 Dec/96 . 2 or 3 letter identifier. Example: To access the Prince Rupert (PR) NDB. you must add an "NB" suffix to the database identifier. (Figure 2-84) DATABASE WPT WAYPOINT POS OM19R RW01L RW01R RW19L 1/1 KSNA ARP N 33 40.80 W130 25. enter KSNA for Santa Ana.

Florida) enter 31J.70 RW36L RW36R > Figure 2-85 DATABASE WPT WAYPOINT POS < 6/8 RW10 RW26 31J ARP N 30 10.90 W082 34. Example: 31J (Lake City. The airport identifier Shifts to and replaces the ARP field below. • If the airport shows a 3 character (letters and numbers) IDENTIFIER.Page Display Definitions • If the airport shows a 3 letter IDENTIFIER. (Figure 2-87) DATABASE WPT WAYPOINT POS RW09 RW18L < RW18R RW27 < 5/8 KNEW ARP N 30 02. Some outer markers and all runway thresholds for which data is stored in the database are also displayed on the airport waypoint page (also known as airport continuation records page) and can be accessed by pressing the PRV or NXT Key or Line Select Keys. (Figure 2-86) Airport Reference Points. (Figure 2-87) The selected outer marker or runway threshold will then be displayed in place of the airport identifier in the waypoint field. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-71 . Runway Thresholds Airport Reference Point (ARP) coordinates are always displayed in response to the airport identifier.60 Figure 2-86 DATABASE WPT WAYPOINT POS OM19R RW01L < RW01R RW19L < 7/8 OM19R KSNA N 33 46. enter the identifier as printed. Example: NEW (New Orleans Lake Front) add a "K" prefix and enter KNEW (Figure 2-85).70 W117 48.30 RW19R > Figure 2-87 Rev.60 W090 01. Outer Markers. add the correct ICAO prefix letter.

Identifiers can consist of up to six characters. When initially accessed (waypoint not yet in memory) the coordinate fields are both dashed and covered by a double cursor.-------. 0 Dec/96 . (Figure 2-88) SPECIAL DATABASE WAYPOINTS DATABASE WPT WAYPOINT POS 1/2 PILOT ENTERED WPT (Personalized) Waypoint The operator is responsible for generating the waypoint data and maintaining its accuracy.96 NDB-ENTER Figure 2-88 The alphanumeric designator selected by the pilot. and 5 letter and number combinations exist. (Figure 2-89) WPTS AVAILABLE: PILOT ENTERED WAYPOINT POS WPT GLOBAL USA ---.Page Display Definitions Intersections/Enroute Waypoints Most intersection waypoint identifiers consist of 5 letters. the asterisk (*) and pound sign (#) have special functions. (Figure 2-89) However. and can be composed of any of the characters on the keyboard.87 W066 59. Maximum waypoint storage in non-volatile memory is 999. 4. POS: Blank fields for entering the latitude and longitude of the waypoint. To access these waypoints. However. WAYPOINT: WHALE USA N 42 11. 3.----- 944 WPTS AVAIL Figure 2-89 The number of waypoints available in memory after this waypoint is defined. simply enter the identifier from the Jeppesen chart. (Figure 2-89) 2-72 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. Example: WHALE intersection.

DIS.30 ENTER 090.0 > < OK? Figure 2-91 NOTE: The offset waypoint uses station declination. (Figure 2-91) More than one offset waypoint is allowed from one parent. as identifying notation. All waypoints defined by a VHF Navaid in the National/International Airspace System are based on the VHF Navaid station declination. the RAD. Since the magnetic variation and station declination may not be the same at a given Navaid. if available. (Figure 2-90) PILOT ENTERED WPT WAYPOINT POS GLOBAL USA N 33 39. and POS fields are all dashed. OFFSET WPT WAYPOINT RAD DIS 1/1 TRM* USA POS N 33 46. the coordinates of the waypoint will be displayed as stored in memory. An * following the parent waypoint denotes an offset waypoint. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-73 . When an offset waypoint identifier is entered and the waypoint has not been previously defined. WAYPOINT: The parent waypoint identifier followed by an *. Same as previous. These coordinates may be changed at any time. Rev. POS: If the waypoint has been previously defined. using [*].Page Display Definitions WAYPOINT: (Figure 2-90).70 W117 51. (Figure 2-90) OK? ENTER: The procedure for accepting the waypoint if the coordinates are correct is to depress the ENTER Key.00 944 WPTS AVAIL Figure 2-90 OFFSET WAYPOINT An offset waypoint is a set of coordinates determined by a selected radial and distance from a previously defined or database (parent) waypoint.70 W117 48. or it uses the calculated magnetic variation of the parent waypoint. the FMS calculated position and the defined position may differ. [*1]. etc.0 10. [*A1].

0701 will be displayed as 070.Page Display Definitions When the waypoint has been previously defined the coordinates will be displayed and the radial and distance values will be computed based on the location of the parent waypoint.0 will be displayed. i. 0 Dec/96 2-74 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System . (Figure 2-91) SPECIAL WAYPOINTS #0. i.1. The DIS entry requires a trailing 0 be entered for any DIS value greater than . (Figure 2-91) POS: The computed offset waypoint coordinates based on the pilot entered radial and distance from the parent waypoint. i. (Figure 2-91) If the parent waypoint is a waypoint from an airport continuation record (runway or outer marker associated with a specific airport). #0 After pressing the d key and ENTER key the position after the turn where the airplane intercepts the course to the direct to waypoint.#1 and #OFF are special waypoints defined automatically by the system based on the airplane position. (Figure 2-91) NOTE: The radial can be entered in whole numbers without a trailing 0. (Figure 2-91) RAD: The radial from the parent waypoint in degrees and tenths of degrees. If a parent waypoint has a duplicate identifier in the database.9. DIS: The distance from the parent waypoint to the offset waypoint (1999. (Figure 2-91) OK? ENTER: The procedure for accepting the waypoint if the coordinates are correct is to depress the ENTER Key. enter 070 or 70 and 070.e. along which the offset is established. enter 100 to display 10.e.0. the country code will be displayed immediately below the offset waypoint identifier. To enter a tenth of a radial all 4 digits must be entered. This entry will be annunciated with a T if a true heading input is received or if the parent waypoint is north of N 70° or south of S 60° latitude.e. the airport identifier will be displayed immediately below the offset waypoint identifier. The #0 waypoint is defined as the point from which a DIRECT TO Rev.9 maximum enterable).

Page Display Definitions waypoint leg has begun. #1 can only be defined by the system. Power Off Waypoint The Power Off Waypoint is a set of coordinates retrieved as the last known position when power is lost enroute. This page should be accessed by inserting #OFF in the IDENT field on the POSITION FIX Page after power has been restored and Initialization Enroute has been performed. WAYPOINT #OFF: The Power Off Waypoint designator. Should the DIRECT TO procedure require a turn. #0 can only be defined by the system. #0 will momentarily be displayed on an EFIS map.1 281 251 Figure 2-92 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-75 .00 W074 49. Coordinates are stored in non-volatile memory. (Figure 2-92) LAST TK: Aircraft track at time of power off. (Figure 2-92) MINUTES OFF: The total time elapsed during power off. #1 The position at the point where the POSITION FIX Page was last accessed via the HOLD Key.90 00:13 OFF 01. Rev. (Figure 2-92) LAST GS: Last groundspeed in knots at time of power off. ADDING A WAYPOINT. #0 will be defined as the point at which the aircraft completes the turn and intercepts the direct course to the fix. 0 Dec/96 SPECIAL WPT WAYPOINT POS GMT OFF MINUTES LAST TK LAST GS *OFF N 42 08. (Figure 2-92) OCEANIC REPORTING WAYPOINTS These waypoints are in the database and are used for oceanic position reporting. See Section 3. (Figure 2-92) POS: The last present position coordinates at loss of power. (Figure 2-92) GMT OFF: The actual time (Greenwich Mean Time) of power loss. These waypoints can be added to the FPL by typing special numbers.

The Message Section will consist of as many pages as are required to display current messages. 0 Dec/96 . This may happen when a new data-base is loaded. BACK. System Messages describe the system's operation with all related aircraft systems (Figure 2-93). press the MSG key again to display the sensor messages page. MESSAGES (MSG KEY) System and Sensor messages are displayed on separate pages in the Message Section. An obsolete waypoint can be accessed only by verifying it as an existing waypoint on a flight plan. SYSTEM MESSAGES *ENTRY REQUIRED NAV RDY *-HOLD/ENTER NO NAV NDB-WW EXP 27DEC 1/1 Figure 2-93 SENSOR MESSAGES VLF IRS GPS VPU LCS NO NAV LINK FAIL NAV RDY DR STN BLINK 1/1 In most instances when new Figure 2-94 messages are added. 2-76 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. It will be lost once it is erased from a stored flight plan. They are accessed by depressing the MSG Key.Page Display Definitions OBSOLETE WAYPOINT Obsolete Waypoints are typically created when a multiply defined database waypoint used on a stored flight plan is no longer found in the database. and PRV keys can be used to page forward and backward through the message pages. you will be unable to access this page. NXT. The MSG Key is used to sequence through the System and Sensor Message Pages and to return to the page that was displayed before accessing the Message Section. the Message light will flash and a flashing yellow asterisk will appear adjacent to the new message. If the MSG light illuminates and no new message is displayed when the system message page is accessed. NOTE: If no messages exist on the sensor message page. Sensor Messages describe the operational status of each navigation sensor (Figure 2-94).

aircraft position is north of 70° N latitude or south of 60° S latitude). System Message ENTRY REQUIRED Explanation Information required on the Initialization Page must be verified/entered. HOLD/ENTER MAN HDG REQD MAN TAS REQD VERIFY POSITION VAR WARNING Rev. A manual TAS entry must be made on NAV Page 3. GMT and Position). Magnetic variation cannot be automatically computed. The message will read “NO DATA RECEIVED. There is no TAS input to the system and the RPU is using fewer than three Comm stations for navigation.00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-77 . and MAN VAR REQD. 2 Aug.Page Display Definitions SYSTEM MESSAGES In the event that the NMU fails. Manual procedure for putting the VPU (nonIRS equipped) into the Primary Navigation Mode when groundspeed is less than 50 knots. a message will be dispayed on the CDU. A manual heading entry must be made on NAV Page 3. THE SYSTEM IS INOPERATIVE. Aircraft composite (blended) position is in question and must be manually verified. All will cause the message annunciator to flash. e. There is no heading input to the system and an H-field antenna is installed with the RPU.” ACTION REQUIRED: The following are the action required messages that may appear on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page. (Date. A manual variation entry must be made on NAV Page 3 (i.

CDU nonvolatile memory configuration information will be used. 2-78 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. The message annunciator will not illuminate. DATA BASE INVALID The data base is invalid because the last UPDATE ABORTED attempt to update the data base was aborted. 0 Dec/96 . *APRCH ARMED Approach is ready to be executed. APRCH CANCELED System is in an Approach Mode and the approach is changed or deleted from the Active Flight Plan.Page Display Definitions ADVISORY: The following are the advisory messages that may appear on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page. *APRCH ACTIVE Approach sequence is being executed. Displayed within 30NM radius of the airport. CDI sensitivity changes to 1NM full scale deflection. System Message ALTITUDE FAIL Explanation The altitude input to the system has failed. VNAV Deviation changes to 500 ft. COMPASS FAIL The aircraft's compass heading input to the system is invalid. The aircraft is within 2 NM from the FAF and GPS is in Dead Reckoning (DR) or there is no RAIM available. CDU non-volatile memory has lost its configuration information and the configuration module has failed. APRCH WARN CNFG DATA LOST CNFG MODULE FAIL Configuration module has failed. full scale deflection. The message annunciator will not illuminate. Pressing ENTER TO CANCEL? ENTER will cancel the sequence. All will cause the message annunciator to flash unless otherwise noted with an asterisk *. The message annunciator will not illuminate. CDI senENTER TO CANCEL? sitivity changes from 1NM to . *APRCH NEXT Aircraft is within 3NM of the FAF.3NM full scale deflection. ENTER TO CANCEL? Pressing ENTER will cancel the approach. HSI is flagged.

The message annunciator will not illuminate if the aircraft is Weight On Gear. The message annunciator will not illuminate if the aircraft is Weight On Gear. The system is ready to be placed in the Primary Navigation Mode. Non-volatile memory has failed at least partially. System has been operating enroute in IRS Only Mode for more than 30 minutes. Dual systems are required beofre this message will appear. 2 Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-79 .Page Display Definitions ADVISORY: (continued) System Message DR HDG/TAS DR TK/TAS DR TK/GS DR HDG/GS EXT WPT REJECT Explanation The system is in the Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode and is using one of these four combinations of inputs to compute position. Expiration date of the database has been reached. Message annunciator will not illuminate. (Maximum 99 external waypoints received or 999 waypoints stored). NMU LINK FAIL Data link between the NMUs has failed. System has been operating in the terminal area in IRS Only Mode for more than 10 minutes. During Holding or when system is about to enter a Holding pattern. TAS is high enough to cause the aircraft to stray outside the boundaries of protected airspace. This message is displayed only when GPS is unavailable and another sensor is being used. Database has failed. HIGH HOLDING SPD IRS ONLY>30 MIN IRS ONLY>10 MIN MEM FAIL *NAV RDY NDB FAIL NDB OUTDATED NDB-WW EXP 27OCT Worldwide (WW) or North American/ European (NA) database and expiration date. Rev. Database should be updated. CDU has rejected an external waypoint input from a radar or EFIS.

groundspeed or crosstrack distance. 2-80 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. Based on the signal strength or geometry.8 nm error and may not be suitable for enroute navigation on J/V routes.7 nm error and may not be suitable for navigation in the terminal areas.7 NM POS WARN>2. Invalid Heading and Auto TAS may cause this message if the GPS is invalid. Message annunciator will not illuminate. the VPU sensor quality may be such that the composite position may have more than 1. Message annunciator will not illuminate most of the time. NO NAV POS WARN>1. Based on the signal strength or geometry. Message annunciator will not illuminate. *STRG INVALID The system has stopped computing a roll command steering output due to invalid navigation leg. Based on the signal strength or geometry. Reviewing the #OFF waypoint page removes this message. The system is not navigating.8 NM POWEROFF POS SENSOR MISCOMPARE The difference between the CDU composite (blended) position and a sensor position exceeds a predetermined amount. the VPU or VLF sensor quality may be such that the composite position may have more than 3.8 NM POS WARN>3. 0 Dec/96 . the VPU or VLF sensor quality may be such that the composite position may have more than 2.Page Display Definitions ADVISORY: (continued) System Message NO AUTO LEG CHG Explanation An automatic leg change will not occur upon reaching the TO waypoint. The system has lost power in flight for more than 7 seconds and the #OFF waypoint is available.8 nm error and may not be suitable for enroute navigation on J/V or Random routes.

Aircraft is within 1 minute ETE of #TOD or path intercept point.Page Display Definitions ADVISORY: (continued) TAS FAIL USING MAN HDG *WPT ALERT The True Airspeed input to the system from the Air Data Computer is invalid. The VPU quality factor has exceeded the pilot entered advisory quality factor. Message annunciator will not illuminate. WPT MEM FULL VNAV WPT ALERT VSPD FAIL SENSOR MESSAGES The following are sensor messages that may appear on the SENSOR MESSAGES Page. However the discrete WPT annunciator will flash for 10 seconds then go steady The system vertical speed input has failed. Sensor Message ACCURACY WARN Explanation The integrity monitoring system that monitors the satellite constellation (RAIM) has detected a GPS horizontal position error that is outside the alarm threshold for the phase of flight in progress. 1NM Terminal. The IRS is in the Attitude mode. The aircraft is within 30 seconds ETE of the next leg lateral change. An H-field antenna is installed with the RPU and a manual heading input is being used. All messages will cause the MSG annunciator to flash unless other wise noted with an asterisk*. The sensor is operating on its own internal battery. GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System ALIGN ATTITUDE BATTERY WARN CHECK QUAL Rev. 2NM Enroute) The IRS is in the alignment mode and is not yet NAV RDY. 0 Dec/96 2-81 .3NM Approach. All 999 waypoint locations have been used in flight plans or as FROM or TO waypoints. Message annunciator will not illuminate. (.

but has not been placed in the navigation mode. The rubidium frequency standard in the RPU has failed. Message annunciator will not illuminate. The sensor has been manually deselected and will no longer contribute to the computation of composite (blended) position. GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.Page Display Definitions SENSOR MESSAGES: (continued) Sensor Message CYCLE SLIP Explanation The Loran sensor has detected a cycle slip condition on one of the stations being tracked. or VPU sensor is in the Dead Reckoning (DR) mode of navigation. The sensor has not navigated since power up. At least one Communication or Omega receiver has failed. The message annunciator will not illuminate for VPU. Only displayed when GPS is not available. 2 Aug/00 *DESELECTED DR ENTR SET HDG LINK FAIL *NAV RDY *NO NAV OSC WARN NO RAIM NO RAIM @ DEST NO SYNC RCVR FAIL STD FAIL STN BLINK 2-82 . Omega synchronization has not been completed. Transmitted Loran-C signal is in error and will not be used for navigation. but will not be available at the destination arrival time. The sensor is capable of navigation. Either the VLF (RPU). Inoperable oscillator on Loran-C sensor. Data exchange between the sensor and CDU has failed. RAIM is available at the present time. Message annunciator will not illuminate. The IRS is in the attitude mode and a heading value must be entered. Message annunciator will not illuminate. GPS. RAIM is not available at this time. LCS.

To turn the system off.System Operation SECTION 3 SYSTEM OPERATION PRE-DEPARTURE POWER ON/OFF AND PARALLAX ADJUSTMENT 1. ON Key . NOTE: The display may be changed instantaneously to 75% of full bright from any brightness level by momentarily depressing the ON Key. BRT Key . DEPRESS and hold again to brighten the display. release the BRT Key then depress again and hold while momentarily pressing the d Key. Release the BRT Key.If the Line Select Keys do not align with the line select prompts on the screen. These ALL RIGHTS RESERVED tests verify the inputs and outputs from the Control Figure 3-1 Display Unit (CDU) and Navigation Management Unit (NMU). time the SELF TEST message is displayed. The SELF TEST SELF TEST Page GLOBAL (Figure 3-1) will be displayed for approximately HONEYWELL 30 seconds. the system will turn ON automatically when aircraft power is applied. DEPRESS any key when alignment is complete. DEPRESS and hold the BRT Key to dim the display. Using the U (Up) or D (Down) Key. 3.DEPRESS (momentarily). 2 Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-1 .Adjust as required. Parallax Adjustment . the system is performing COPYRIGHT 2000 internal self tests. If the system was turned OFF last by the removal of aircraft power. To attain 100% brightness depress and hold BRT Key again until the display no longer gets brighter. adjust the display to the desired alignment. 2. 4. During the INTERNATIONAL INC. Rev. The display will initially come on at 75% of full bright. DEPRESS the BRT Key (If the screen begins to dim. then the P Key). depress the ON Key and hold for three seconds.

Continue depressing MSG Key to review SENSOR MESSAGES and to return to INITIALIZATION Page. 1. Enter a leading 0 for months with a numerical value of less than 10. move the cursor to the DATE field to update manually.INSERT. DATE GMT INITIALIZATION 01 JUL 00 18:42 > > IDENT KDAL POS ------------------14141-0624 SM06 > Figure 3-2 The Initialization Page gives the pilot access to the required initialization data (Date.digits only).System Operation INITIALIZATION PAGE It is important that the initialization position and the first waypoint of the Active Flight Plan are the same so that the TO/FROM Leg Distance displays the correct information. If non volatile memory is erased the date and time field will be dashes.DEPRESS to verify display. if required (hours and minutes). if required (day/month/year . When the system is turned on. the page disappears and cannot be retrieved unless the system power is removed and then restored. update manually. 5. GMT and Position).DEPRESS to verify Database Expiration Date and review other System Messages. GMT . MSG Key .INSERT.DEPRESS to verify display. The DIRECT TO function to the first waypoint on the flight plan may also be used to insure distance accuracy. DATE . the DATE and GMT will appear on the Initialization Page. DATE and GMT The DATE and GMT are continuously updated while the system is off. If the GMT is incorrect. Following confirmation or entry of this data. If the DATE is incorrect. ENTER Key . 2 Aug/00 . 3-2 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. 4. 1995 would be entered as 01 03 95. For example: March 1. GMT and Date are available for display in the PLAN section and Position is available in the NAV section. ENTER Key . 2. 3.

2 Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-3 . Airport Reference Point (ARP) coordinates will be displayed with continuation records listed below. ENTER Key .System Operation INITIALIZATION POSITION The Initialization Position for non-IRS equipped systems should be the departure runway threshold. the ramp or alignment LAT/LONG position should be inserted as Initialization Position. To access the airport continuation records. the IDENT field normally prefills with the ICAO ident of the airport closest to the aircraft position at shut-down. Enter letters and numbers of the departure airport if it is a non-ICAO identifier. Enter letters of the departure airport’s ICAO identifier. For IRS equipped systems. provided the aircraft’s real position and system position were the same at system shutdown. The Departure Position may be entered using either: Option 1: Using the IDENT field for non-IRS equipped systems Option 2: Using the POS field Option 1: Using the IDENT field for non-IRS equipped systems (Entering Alpha and Numeric Identifiers on the Initialization Page) 1. and after a brief delay. 2. position the cursor over a departure runway identifier.DEPRESS.DEPRESS to position cursor over the IDENT field (if required). 3. Line Select Key . NOTE: Once the INITIALIZATION Page appears. This will automatically result in the display INITIALIZATION DATE GMT 01 JUL 00 18:42 > > IDENT KDAL POS ------------------14141-0624 SM06 > Figure 3-3 Rev.

The cursor may be placed over the desired FPL number.90 RW19R > Figure 3-4 INITIALIZATION 01 JUL 00> 21:19 > IDENT RW19R POS N 33 40.System Operation of the departure runway threshold in the waypoint field. 2 Aug/00 . 3-4 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. The cursor will be positioned over the first Flight Plan Number that originates with the same airport or runway identifier as entered on the INITIALIZATION Page (Figure 3-6).90 14141-0624 SM06 > Figure 3-5 FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/1 KABQ KDAL KDAL KHPN KHPN KLAX KPRC KSNA KMSY KHPN KSFO KORD KORD KSTL KSNA KHPN 1 6 8 2 9 4 3 7 > > > Figure 3-6 If AFIS/ACARS is installed. If AFIS is not installed.DEPRESS. Stored Flight Plans are referenced according to Departure and Destination pairs and are automatically sequenced in alphabetical order on the FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page. the display will automatically advance to the FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page. the departure airport identifier will replace the ARP field.DEPRESS. and POS coordinates will reflect selected runway threshold. POS Coordinates .VERIFY coordinates highlighted by the cursor on the Initialization Page.89 W117 51. (Figure 3-4) 4. (Figure 3-5) 6. the display will advance to the AFIS FPL Page or the ACARS Initialization Page after the system is initialized. ENTER Key . ENTER Key . 5. To review the FPL press ENTER.89 W117 51. DATE GMT DATABASE WPT WAYPOINT POS OM19R RW01L RW01R < RW19L < 4/8 RW19R KSNA N 33 40.

DEPRESS. ENTER Key . Line Select Key . verify coordinates and depress ENTER again. 2. Latitude . then 6 numbers (degrees. 3. or W Key to access the desired field. Coordinates displayed are the computed position when the system was shutdown. ENTER Key . minutes.INSERT E or W first. then 7 numbers (degrees. a new flight plan may be created. If correct. (See Note) c. these coordinates may be used as the Departure Position. If Incorrect: a. NOTE: If necessary. (See Building Flight Plans) If AFIS/ACARS is installed. 1. Coordinate field will flash if the entered value varies more than 10 arc minutes from the displayed value. it may be updated individually by depressing N. If AFIS/ACARS is not installed in the system. S.INSERT N or S first.System Operation Option 2: Using the POS field For IRS equipped systems. E.DEPRESS. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-5 . use the PRV or NXT Key to cycle through all available FLIGHT PLAN LIST Pages. minutes. NOTE: If coordinate field flashes after entry. A Flight Plan may be selected by bringing the cursor on to the FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page over the desired flight plan number and pressing ENTER. the display will advance to the AFIS FPL Page or the ACARS Initialization Page after the system is initialized. POS Coordinates . the ramp or alignment LAT/LONG position should be inserted as the Initialization Position using POS Coordinates. The FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page will now be displayed. Rev.VERIFY. Longitude .DEPRESS (cursor over POS field). b. and hundredths). and hundredths). If the desired flight plan does not appear. If only one coordinate is in error.

< < < < DEPART ARRIVE < APPROACH XFILL SELECT > ERASE > ENTER Key . 4.VERIFY. (Figure 3-7) If several Flight Plans are displayed. 5. Type the appropriate departure airport or waypoint identifier in the cursor field. ENTER Key . If a specific runway is desired. position cursor anywhere on the page then depress the BACK Key to show NEXT FPL number available. FPL Key .DEPRESS to display FLIGHT Figure 3-8 PLAN Page. press the BACK Key to erase a character. GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. 0 Dec/96 3-6 .DEPRESS to display (Stored) FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page (if required).System Operation BUILDING FLIGHT PLANS (FPL) CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN 1. Any of the stored flight plans may be erased to allow additional entries. If an entry error is made. then enter the correction. NOTE: Identifier may contain from 1 to 6 characters in any combination of letters and numbers. 6. The procedure is described under Modifying A Flight Plan. 3.DEPRESS. 2. FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/1 KABQ KDAL KDAL KHPN NEXT FPL KMSY KHPN KSFO KORD 1 3 2 4 5 > > Figure 3-7 FLIGHT PLAN ****** 5 1/1 NOTE: If all 56 Flight Plans are used. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor on blank line and display the NEXT FPL number. NO FPL AVAIL will appear in the field. (Figure 3-8) NOTE: The XFILL prompt will only be displayed if the airplane is configured for dual systems. Waypoint Coordinates and Data . depress the appropriate Line Select Key to place the cursor over the desired runway.

APPROACHES AND ENROUTE AIRWAYS for more details.DEPRESS to add waypoint to the FPL.DEPRESS. Repeat Steps 4 through 7 for the remaining waypoints. STARS. The destination airport identifier should be the last waypoint on the flight plan. ENTER Key . Pilot entered offsets and waypoints may also be entered. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to position the cursor over the waypoint to be deleted. The MSG light will flash and WPT MEM FULL will be displayed on SYSTEM MESSAGES Page. Line Select Key .DEPRESS. The waypoint will be deleted. To Delete a Waypoint 9. STAR or Approach to a Flight Plan will exceed the Flight Plan capacity. BACK Key . 8. 10. If adding a SID. See CREATING/CHANGING PILOT ENTERED WAYPOINTS for a more in depth discussion. Attempting to enter more than 999 pilot entered waypoints in memory causes MEM FULL to be displayed on the FLIGHT PLAN Page. A maximum of 50 waypoint identifiers can be entered on Stored Flight Plans and 100 on the Active Flight Plan. Attempting to enter more than the maximum allowed will cause FPL FULL to be displayed with the identifier flashing in the cursor. A DELETE? prompt will appear adjacent to the waypoint to be deleted. A NO ROOM ON FPL message will appear on the procedure page being displayed. STARs. 11. NOTE: SID’s.System Operation 7. See SIDs. NOTE: Waypoints are generally obtained from the Navigation Data Base (NDB). 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-7 . Enroute Airways. Rev. and non-precision approach procedures may also be entered on either the stored or active flight plan.

(Figure 3-10) FLIGHT PLAN 6 1/2 KDAL . Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the waypoint identifier. Deleting A Waypoint: 1. 3-8 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.DEPRESS. 3. Access a Stored Flight Plan from the alphabetized FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page. NOTE: A change made to the Active Flight Plan does not affect the Stored Flight Plan.KHPN LIT < BWG DELETE? HNN < JST MXE < > DEPART ARRIVE SELECT > < APPROACH ERASE < Figure 3-9 FLIGHT PLAN 6 1/2 KDAL . DELETE? appears in the waypoint field to inform the pilot of the pending change. or Approach Procedure will invalidate that procedure as indicated by the waypoints of the procedure no longer being indented. To remove a waypoint from non-volatile memory it must be deleted from all Stored Flight Plans.System Operation MODIFYING A FLIGHT PLAN To Access The Desired Flight Plan: This procedure may be used to modify the Active Flight Plan or any Stored Flight Plan. This does not include database waypoints. Any change made to a Stored Flight Plan remains in memory. Access the Active Plan or Stored Flight Plan by depressing the FPL Key. Figure 3-10 NOTE: Deleting a waypoint from either a SID. BACK Key . (Figure 3-9) ENTER Key . STAR. 0 Dec/96 .DEPRESS. The waypoint is deleted and the cursor is displayed over the next waypoint. Use the PRV or NXT Keys to cycle through the available pages.KHPN LIT < HNN JST < MXE KHPN < > DEPART ARRIVE SELECT > < APPROACH ERASE < 2.

such as 3050N. 3 Oct/02 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-9 . 5. Adding Oceanic Waypoints Figure 3-12 FLIGHT PLAN 6 1/2 KDAL .KHPN LIT < HNN JST < MXE KHPN < > DEPART ARRIVE SELECT> < APPROACH ERASE < NOTE: Adding a waypoint to a SID. is entered.DEPRESS. The new waypoint is added to the Flight Plan sequence and the cursor is over the waypoint following the new entry. Positions in the Southern Hemisphere use the letters “S” and Rev. or Approach Procedure will invalidate that procedure as indicated by the waypoints no longer being indented. a five-character coordinate identifier. Waypoint Coordinates VERIFY or INSERT.KHPN LIT < BWG HNN < JST MXE < > DEPART ARRIVE SELECT> < APPROACH ERASE < Oceanic waypoints are entered in the same manner as other waypoints with one Figure 3-13 exception. The following rules are to be applied: 1.KHPN LIT < BWG JST < MXE KHPN < > DEPART ARRIVE SELECT> < APPROACH ERASE < 2. FLIGHT PLAN 6 1/2 KDAL . (Figure 3-12) ENTER Key .System Operation ADDING A WAYPOINT A waypoint may be added anywhere in a Flight Plan sequence. 4. (Figure 3-11) Type Waypoint Identifier INSERT. 1. (Figure 3-13) Figure 3-11 FLIGHT PLAN 6 1/2 KDAL .DEPRESS. STAR. Instead of entering a waypoint identifier. Positions in the Northern Hemisphere use letters “N” and “E”. Line Select Key . 3. except prior to the current TO waypoint if the ACTIVE FPL Page is displayed. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to position the cursor over the waypoint identifier that will follow the new entry.

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. 3. Line Select Key . The letter “W” is used for south latitude and west longitude. Letter Placement . Examples: North latitude/West longitude N50 00/W040 00 = 5040N N07 00/W008 00 = 0708N N75 00/W170 00 = 75N70 N07 00/W120 00 = 07N20 South latitude/East longitude S50 00/E040 00 = 5040S S07 00/E008 00 = 0708S S75 00/E170 00 = 75S70 S07 00/E110 00 = 07S10 ERASING A STORED FLIGHT PLAN 1. 3-10 .DEPRESS to display desired FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page. Line Select Key. ENTER Key . Latitude .Latitude will always precede longitude.The letter designator will be the last character in the five-character string if the longitude is less than 100 degrees and will be the third character in the fivecharacter string if the longitude is 100 degrees or greater. 2. The letter ”S” is used for south latitude and east longitude.DEPRESS.Use only the last two digits of the first.DEPRESS to position the cursor over the number of the FPL to be erased. All waypoints of the stored FPL will be erased. 3 Oct/02 North latitude/East longitude N50 00/E040 00 = 5040E N07 00/E008 00 = 0708E N75 00/E170 00 = 75E70 N07 00/E120 00 = 07E20 South latitude/West longitude S50 00/W040 00 = 5040W S07 00/W008 00 = 0708W S75 00/W170 00 = 75W70 S07 00/W120 00 = 07W20. Longitude . three-digit longitude value. The letter “E” is used for north latitude and east longitude. The letter “N” is used for north latitude and west longitude. 4. FPL Key . c.DEPRESS.System Operation “W”.DEPRESS to position cursor over ERASE? ENTER Key . b. Both will use numerics for latitude and longitude values as follows: a. 5. d. 2.

60 W027 05. If the identifier selected has more than one waypoint associated with it. 3-15) Key desired is dis(Figure DATABASE WPT WAYPOINT POS FREQ VAR ELEV NDB-ENTER 3/4 TRM PORTU N 38 45. Figure 3-15 Rev. etc.60 116.60 116. (Figure 3-14) DATABASE WPT WAYPOINT POS FREQ VAR ELEV NDB-ENTER 2/4 TRM USA N 33 37.. The waypoint nearest the aircraft position will be displayed first.DEPRESS to add the waypoint to the flight plan.. PRV or NXT DEPRESS until country name played on line 4. A fence (..20 W 14 172 3. USING DUPLICATE WAYPOINT IDENTIFIERS 1.70 W116 09. Duplicate Waypoint Identifiers: There are several waypoints around the world with the same identifier.1/2. i. ENTER Key.e. all waypoints except the FR and TO are deleted.System Operation NOTE: If the Active Flight Plan is erased.20 E 13 -110 Figure 3-14 To select an alternate waypoint location: 2.. additional pages will be indicated on line 1. 3 Oct/02 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-11 .-) is displayed indicating no auto leg change beyond the TO waypoint. 1/4.

proceed to Step 4. Line Select Key .DEPRESS to locate the desired Flight Plan on the FLIGHT PLAN LIST Pages.DEPRESS.VERIFY. 8. 2. To access the desired flight plan: 1. NOTE: This procedure may also be used for reviewing waypoint information on the Active Flight Plan Page. 3.DEPRESS to position the cursor over desired Flight Plan Number.System Operation REVIEWING WAYPOINT DATA/COORDINATES (FLIGHT PLAN PAGES ONLY) If the stored flight plan is currently displayed.DEPRESS. Line Select Key . 0 Dec/96 . FPL Key .DEPRESS to position cursor over identifier to be reviewed. 5. 3-12 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. 6. ENTER Key . The Flight Plan is displayed with the cursor over the next waypoint. ENTER Key . Waypoint Coordinates or data. 4. 7.DEPRESS. ENTER Key . Repeat Steps 5 through 7 for remaining waypoints.

System Operation FLIGHT PLAN (FPL) SELECTION This procedure is used to transfer a stored FPL to active FPL status. NOTE: DEPRESS FPL or NXT Key to sequence to an alternate Flight Plan with the same departure destination pair and higher Flight Plan number. position the cursor on the page. to INVERT and transfer the Stored Flight Plan with waypoint sequence < < < < FLIGHT PLAN BDF GSH KDTW ****** 5 3/3 DEPART ARRIVE < APPROACH > SELECT?> ERASE b.DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired Flight Plan Number.DEPRESS (if required) until the desired FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page appears.DEPRESS to position cursor over SELECT? (Figure 316): a. FPL Key . DEPRESS PRV or BACK Key to sequence to a lower Flight Plan number with the same departure-destination pair. 3 Oct/02 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-13 . See AFIS/ACARS section for selecting FPLs to the active status.VERIFY Flight Plan. proceed to Step 5. The DIRECT TO function to the first waypoint on the flight plan may also be used to insure distance accuracy. 1. Line Select Key. NOTE: If the desired Flight Plan is not listed refer to the procedure for Creating a Flight Plan (Page 3-6). enter the number and depress ENTER Key.DEPRESS. FLIGHT PLAN Page . 5. Figure 3-16 Rev. to transfer the Stored Flight Plan to Active Flight Plan status continue with Step 6. The desired Flight Plan will be displayed. NOTE: If desired Flight Plan number is known. If a stored flight plan is currently displayed. 4. Line Select Key . Review routing by depressing PRV or NXT Key to page through multiple Flight Plan pages. ENTER Key . 2. It is recommended that the initialization position and the first waypoint of the Active Flight Plan are the same so that the TO/FROM Leg Distance displays the correct information. 3.

Observe that the Stored Flight Plan transferred to the ACTIVE FPL Page as SELECTED or INVERTED. NAV Key . insert the desired identifier. (Figure 3-17) 6.> BEFORE TAXI (IRS EQUIPPED) Figure 3-19 The Inertial Reference System (IRS) should be aligned and placed in Rev. DIS. 1. TO Waypoint .DEPRESS.DEPRESS.1 -----186 > -------/--. (Figure 3-19) NAVIGATION FR KSNA TO MUSEL < < 3. 1/4 --------- > 5. The first waypoint on the Active Flight Plan will appear in the FR field. 6. the following procedure is used. press the BACK Key to display INVERT?.CHECK for reasonableness. ACTIVE FPL . 4.DEPRESS.VERIFY. 7. DIS ETE DTK GS WIND -AUTO- 13. Figure 3-18 FR Waypoint .System Operation reversed to Active Flight Plan status. To change the TO waypoint. The next waypoint in the Active Flight Plan sequence will appear in the TO field. DTK . From the ACTIVE FPL Page . To change the FR waypoint. ENTER Key .KDTW MUSEL < HEMET TRM < EED* TBC < > DEPART ARRIVE ETE> < APPROACH ERASE < INITIAL LEG SELECTION An initial From/To Leg or Direct To Leg must be established in order for the system to provide guidance along the Flight Plan. insert the desired identifier. (Figure 3-18) FLIGHT PLAN BDF GSH KDTW ****** > < < < < 5 3/3 DEPART ARRIVE < APPROACH INVERT?> ERASE Figure 3-17 ACTIVE FPL 1/3 KSNA . 3 Oct/02 3-14 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System .DEPRESS. ENTER Key . 2.CONFIRM. ENTER Key .VERIFY.

2. The VLF is a position keeping sensor that can navigate with as few as two suitable stations. VPU. All other sensors (VLF. then ENTER.DEPRESS. no further action is required. the end of the departure runway. 1. Loran-C. VLF (RPU). The Loran-C is a position finding sensor that can navigate when it is within range and acquires an adequate number of stations.e. Rev. NAV RDY . The VPU is a position finding sensor that can navigate once airborne or within line of sight of suitable navaids. IRS. MSG Key . Observe that no IRS messages appear on the SENSOR MESSAGES Page. IRS Status . SENSOR MESSAGES Page will show IRS-ALIGN during alignment sequence. GPS AND/OR VPU EQUIPPED On the ground the system will navigate deriving composite position and groundspeed from the GPS or IRS. provided the IRS was aligned and placed into the Navigation Mode prior to taxi.VERIFY. MSG Key .VERIFY NAV. GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3.DEPRESS for IRS Sensor Messages.System Operation the Navigation Mode using the IRS manufacturer’s operating instructions.HOLD/ENTER Message . Momentarily depressing HOLD Key. VLF (RPU). 3 Oct/02 3-15 . Observe NAV RDY/NO NAV messages for appropriate sensor and refer to the Flight Manual Supplement for limitations. MSG Key . RUNWAY LINE-UP (IRS EQUIPPED) Provided an accurate alignment position was entered and the IRS was placed in the Navigation Mode prior to taxi. This message indicates that the system is ready to enter the Primary Navigation Mode. When the IRS is in normal Navigation Mode no IRS messages will be displayed. provided they have sufficient stations to begin navigation. and ENTER again will also put the sensors in the primary NAV mode if sufficient stations are available. and LCS) will enter the Primary Navigation Mode automatically at 50 kts (IRS) groundspeed or weight-off-wheels.DEPRESS to verify status of all sensors. 1. Loran-C AND/OR VPU EQUIPPED ONLY This procedure is used to manually place the system into the Primary Navigation Mode at the designated departure position i. 2.

APPROACHES AND ENROUTE AIRWAYS The GNS-X C129 SID (Standard Instrument Departure). 3 Oct/02 . To properly fly SIDs. Approaches can be flown autopilot/fight director coupled until the Missed Approach Point. the aircraft should be flown manually or in HEADING mode.DEPRESS to verify departure coordinates. Any differences between the chart and the database must be resolved by the flight crew prior to commencing the procedure. The published charts are the governing authority and the chart procedures must be followed. or at a true airspeed of between 50 and 150knots. When flying those portions of a SID or STAR that are not tracks between fixes. access NAV Pg 1. The first leg of the SID that the FMS can fly is usually the first waypoint after the airport identifier or departure runway. etc. 5. the aircraft may be flown in reference to the cross track deviation provided by the GNS-XLS or by coupling the GNS-XLS roll command to the auto pilot. the flight crew must manually fly the procedure to a point where the FMS can fly the procedure properly. The GNS-X C129 is ONLY designed to provide meaningful input to the HSI when on a track between two waypoints or when Pseudo Vortac (selected course) procedures are used. Pseudo Vortac procedures can be used to establish an intercept to a published track. When using the Pseudo Vortac mode. THE SYSTEM IS NOT DESIGNED TO FLY FULL SID. the system and the various sensors will enter the Primary Navigation Mode automatically at weight-off-wheels. The first leg of the SID that the FMS can fly is not the first leg of the procedure. or upon intercepting a published track between two waypoints (fixes). Approach and Airway retrieval feature is designed to relieve flight crew workload. NOTE: If the [HOLD/ENTER/ENTER] procedure had not been initiated prior to takeoff. Missed Approach Procedures must then be flown manually. SIDs and STARs require such procedures as flying headings and altitudes. SIDs. depending on configuration. STAR (Standard Terminal Arrival). ENTER Key . In some cases. as well as intercepting VOR radials and DME arcs. HOLD Key .System Operation 4. STARs. NOTE: The flight crew must review the published procedure and compare it to the procedure contained in the database. STAR OR MISSED APPROACH PROCEDURES. After loading the SID on to the Active FPL. Enter the first waypoint 3-16 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.DEPRESS twice to enter Primary Navigation Mode.

5 SEATTLE-TACOMA INTL 429 227° 250° hdg D5 158° 226° HOQUIAM (ELMAA5. to either a Stored or Active Flight Plan. The flight crew must manually fly the airplane until reaching the first leg of the SID that can be flown by the FMS.8 W124 08.7 HQM N46 56. The CDU display. The SID chart. then via (transition) or (assigned route). STAR. No reference to the GNS-X C129 should be made at this time. Figure 3-20. HQM transition from RW16L. cross Seattle 5 DME fix at or above 3000' then turn RIGHT to 250 heading to intercept and proceed via Seattle R-277 to Elmaa Int. TAKE OFF Rwys 16L/R: intercept and proceed via Seattle R-158. Press ENTER. 3 Oct/02 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-17 .9 Figure 3-20 after the runway or airport identifier in the FR field. is an example of the portion of the procedure that must be flown manually or in the heading mode.System Operation ELMAA 5 DEPARTURE This SID requires a mnimum climb gradiant of: Rwys 16 L/R: 550' per nm to 3000'. DEPARTURE KSEA 1/1 > RUNWAY RW16L SID ELMAA5 > TRANSITION HQM WAYPOINTS OF SID: ELMAA HQM < SELECT? ERASE > Figure 3-21 The following procedures allow the pilot to automatically add waypoints stored in the database. as part of a SID. These procedures provide an abbreviated method of waypoint entry. Press ENTER again to complete the initialization of the first leg of the flight plan.HQM) At or above 3000' D ELMAA N47 08. The TO field will display the next waypoint in sequence fro the FPL. shows the waypoints that would be added to the flight plan through reference to the ELMAA5 SID. elimiRev.HQM): From Elmaa Int to Hoquiam VORTAC(33nm): Via Hoquiam R-046.1 W122 18. Figure 3-21. TRANSITION Hoquiam (ELMAA5.8 SEA NAA7 26.5 RD46° 18000 33 THIS CHART: FOR ILLUSTRATION PUPOSES ONLY D (H) HOQUIAM Heading mode or Manual required 117. D (H) SEATTLE 116.9 W123 24. APPROACH. or Enroute Airway.

NOTE: When a SID. Line Select Key .DEPRESS to display Active FPL Page. 1. ENTER Key . DEPARTURE Airport Identifier . Note any inconsistency then depreww the FPL Key to access the active FPL page where any modifications can be performed. SIDS and STARS. APPROACH or Enroute Airway is added to an existing flight plan. FPL Key . APPROACHes and Airways. STARs.VERIFY or INSERT valid ident. Five character waypoints have the first five characters but add the last character of the ICAO airport identifier as shown in the following example: MA27L at KOAK becomes MA27LK in the database. 3.KLAX TO KLAX < ***** < < < DEPART ? ARRIVE APPROACH ETE ERASE > Figure 3-22 4. However.DEPRESS to display DEPARTURE Page. STAR. one for four character identifiers and one for five character identifiers. some duplicate identifiers exist for more than one waypoint location. the routings and coordinates must be verified by the operator. Due to the way the GNS-X C129 database is structured. Also. To avoid an inconsistent flight plan and resulting map display. These procedures must not be used in lieu of charts. duplicate waypoints may occur. 3 Oct/02 . 3-18 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. waypoints must have unique identifiers.DEPRESS to position cursor over the DEPART? field (Figure 3-22). Two naming conventions are used. These waypoints are primarily located on APPROACHES. Depress the d Key to review the flight plan. In these cases the waypoint identifiers are renamed in the database as a 6 character identifier. it may be necessary to delete any duplicate waypoints.System Operation nating the need to enter individual waypoint identifiers for SIDs. ACTIVE FPL 1/1 FR KSEA . Four character waypoints have the first four characters but add the last two characters of the ICAO airport identifier as shown in the following example: MA11 at KPRC becomes MA11RC in the database. ENTERING A SID ON THE ACTIVE FPL NOTE: These procedures may also be used with a stored flight plan. 2.

DEPRESS to select SID. (Figure 3-24) 8. if required. The TRANSITION field is highlighted in yellow. 7. the cursor moves to the first runway on the RUNWAY identifier list and RUNWAY field is highlighted in yellow.System Operation NOTE: If the first waypoint on the Flight Plan is an airport. If runway is not required. NOTE: Cursor moves to the first TRANSITION identifier on the list. NOTE: If the SID and TRANSITION are runway dependent. ENTER Key . (Figure 3-23) 6. proceed to Step 11. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired TRANSITION. Depress the FPL Key to return to the Active Flight DEPARTURE KSEA 1/1 > Plan. See Figure 3-25. the message “NO SIDS AVAILABLE” appears and the ident field flashes. Line Select Key . 3 Oct/02 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-19 . and a runway has not prefilled. If there are no SIDs associated with the Departure Airport. RUNWAY -----5. If the first waypoint on the Flight Plan is a runway. the Departure ident prefills and the cursor is positioned over the first SID identifier on the list. if required.DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired SID. SID TRANSITION < BANGR1 BLUTI1 ELMAA5? SUMMA5 ----------> Figure 3-23 DEPARTURE KSEA RUNWAY SID TRANSITION CVO < HQM ? UBG 1/1 -----ELMAA5 -----> > < Figure 3-24 DEPARTURE KSEA RUNWAY SID TRANSITION 1/1 > ----ELMAA3 > HQM Figure 3-25 Rev. the RUNWAY field also prefills and the cursor is over the first SID identifier on the list.DEPRESS to select TRANSITION. ENTER Key .

System Operation 9. ENTER Key . ( SID. 3. DEPARTURE KSEA 1/1 > RUNWAY RW16L SID ELMAA3 > TRANSITION HQM WAYPOINTS OF SID: ELMAA HQM 11. Departure SID Waypoints > .DEPRESS to select RUNWAY. ENTER Key . 10. NOTE: If SID is added to a stored flight plan this display will return to the stored flight plan page after SID is selected. The display will automatically return to the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page.DEPRESS to review SID (Figure 327). STAR.DEPRESS to return to Flight Plan Page.REVIEW (Figure 3-26). NOTE: SID waypoints appear indented from other waypoints in a Flight Plan that are not part of a procedure. Line Select DEPRESS to cursor over the field on the PLAN Page. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired runway. SELECT? ERASE then DEPRESS the ENTER Key to select the Figure 3-26 SID and insert it into Active Flight Plan. APPROACH) REVIEWING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 1. 0 Dec/96 . Figure 3-27 NOTE: SELECT will not appear as an option since a SID already exists in the Flight Plan. BACK Key . 3-20 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. Key position DEPART FLIGHT DEPARTURE KSEA 1/1 > RUNWAY RW16L SID ELMAA5 > TRANSITION HQM WAYPOINTS OF SID: ELMAA HQM ERASE > 2.

DEPRESS to position cursor over the DEPART field on the FLIGHT PLAN Page. subsequent lists will be narrowed down to display only those items that are compatible with what has been has selected. Line Select Key 2 Right . Line Select Key adjacent to SID field . Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired TRANSITION. 4. Line Select Key .System Operation EDITING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 1. Runway or Transition is selected from the list. (Figure 330) Figure 3-28 DEPARTURE KSEA RUNWAY SID TRANSITION TOU BLUIT CVO HQM ? UBG BKE 1/1 > RW16L -----. 2.DEPRESS to position cursor over the current TRANSITION waypoint on the list. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-21 . 3.> ------ Figure 3-29 DEPARTURE KSEA RUNWAY SID TRANSITION TOU LKV ? BLUIT CVO HQM UBG BKE 1/1 > RW16L -----. DEPARTURE KSEA RUNWAY SID TRANSITION ELMAA5? 1/1 > RW16L -----.DEPRESS to position cursor over the first SID identifier on the list. Line Select Key 1 Right .Depress twice. Line Select Key adjacent to the TRANSITION field .> HQM NOTE: Once either a SID. ENTER Key .Depress once.DEPRESS. (Figure 3-29) 5.> ------ Figure 3-30 Rev.

< < DEPARTURE KSEA 1/1 > RUNWAY RW16L SID ELMAA3 > TRANSITION HQM WAYPOINTS OF SID: ELMAA HQM ERASE? > Figure 3-32 4. Go to the Active FPL Page by pressing the FPL Key and delete waypoints as necessary. The system will automatically load the compatible SID associated with the selected TRANSITION. ENTER Key . 0 Dec/96 .System Operation 6. DEPARTURE KSEA 1/1 > RUNWAY RW16L SID SUMMA5 > TRANSITION LKV WAYPOINTS OF SID: SUMMA LKV SELECT? ERASE > Figure 3-31 NOTE: The RUNWAY can also be edited without changing the original SID if the SID/TRANSITION are compatible. Look carefully at the flight plan to see if any waypoints are out of sequence. 8. (Figure 331) 7. ENTER Key . Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over DEPART field on the Flight Plan Page. Press ENTER to load the desired RUNWAY on the SID. 2. ENTER Key . ENTER Key . Press the Line Select Key to position the cursor over the desired RUNWAY. 3-22 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over ERASE? (Figure 3-32). This is done by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the RUNWAY field.DEPRESS to select desired TRANSITION.DEPRESS to select a new SID and insert the new SID into the flight plan.DEPRESS to select the edited SID as displayed and insert it into the flight plan. ENTER Key . 3. ERASING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 1.DEPRESS.DEPRESS to erase SID and return to Flight Plan page. NOTE: Depress the d Key to review the waypoints that have been added.

Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the waypoint to be deleted on the Flight Plan page. 3. the sequence of waypoints is no longer identified as a database SID. See Figure 3-33. Waypoint Ident . Rev. < < < < < DEPART ARRIVE APPROACH Figure 3-34 5. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-23 . 2. ENTER Key .KLAX ELMAA HQM LKV KLAX ETE > ERASE NOTE: The previously indented SID waypoints move over one space to the left on the screen and are treated as normal waypoints in the Flight Plan. To Add a Waypoint 1. ENTER Key .DEPRESS. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the SID waypoint identifier that will follow the new entry on the Flight Plan page.System Operation ADDING OR DELETING WAYPOINTS WITHIN A SID NOTE: When a SID is modified by adding or deleting waypoints.INSERT. < < < < ACTIVE FPL RW16L ELMAA LKV KLAX 1/1 DEPART ARRIVE < APPROACH ETE > ERASE Figure 3-33 ACTIVE FPL 1/1 RW16L . The waypoint will be deleted and the waypoints of the SID will be treated as non-procedure waypoints in the flight plan. BACK Key . 6. A DELETE? prompt will appear adjacent to the waypoint to be deleted.DEPRESS twice. (Figure 3-34) To Delete a Waypoint 4.DEPRESS.

0 Dec/96 3-24 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System . (Figure 3-38). Option 2 to enter the known destination waypoint. (Figure 3-36) b.System Operation ENTERING AN AIRWAY FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE Enroute Airways include high altitude and low altitude airways (i.DEPRESS to position cursor directly over or below the starting waypoint of the desired airway on the Flight Plan page. If applicable. Line Select Key . the airway identifier will blink. etc). ENTER Key . (Figure 3-35) 2.e. then enter the airway identifier. The appropriate airway or waypoint identifier must be entered.DE-PRESS. J501. V64. use PRV and NXT Keys to Rev. RED7. (Figure 3-37) < DEPART ARRIVE < APPROACH Figure 3-36 AIRWAY J501 RZS TO ZONAL < BSR PESCA < PYE NIECE < COPPO OED < SELECT ENDING WPT < NOTE: If the waypoint above the cursor is not a waypoint on the selected airway.DEPRESS. Use: Option 1 if the destination waypoint is unknown. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired destination waypoint. # Key . < < < < < < < < ACTIVE FPL 1/1 KSEA .INSERT. Airway ident .KLAX ELMAA HQM KLAX ****** DEPART ARRIVE APPROACH ETA > ERASE Figure 3-35 ACTIVE FPL 1/1 KSEA .KLAX ELMAA HQM #J501 ****** ETA> ERASE Option 1 a. 1. The Flight Plan should always be checked for duplicate waypoints and the appropriate waypoints deleted. 1/2 HQM ? HQM31 TOU FINGS ZESNB CAFTA YZP MOCA1 > > > > > Figure 3-37 c.

After selecting the ending waypoint (TO) on the Airway. 1/2 HQM HQM31 TOU FINGS ZESNB CAFTA YZP MOCA1 > > > > > Figure 3-38 d. Option 2 a. NOTE: Depress the d Key to review the waypoints that have been added. (Figure 3-40) ACTIVE FPL 1/1 KSEA . Figure 3-40 Rev.System Operation access all airway waypoints pages. # Key .DEPRESS and type destination waypoint. AIRWAY J501 TO RZS ? FR ZONAL < BSR PESCA < PYE NIECE < COPPO OED < SELECT ENDING WPT < NOTE: As the cursor is moved up or down.DEPRESS. “TO” will appear next to the cursor and a question mark will follow the ident.DEPRESS then enter the airway identifier. Go to the Active FPL Page by pressing the FPL Key and delete waypoints as necessary. ± Key .KLAX ELMAA HQM #J501+RZS ****** ETA > ERASE < < < < DEPART ARRIVE < APPROACH Figure 3-39 AIRWAY J501 3/3 FR HQM TO RZS ? OED < COPPO NIECE < PYE PESCA < BSR ZONAL SELECT ENDING WPT < > b. the message “FPL FULL” will appear. depress the ENTER Key to merge the Airway waypoints into the flight plan and return to the FPL Page. (Figure 339) ENTER Key . Look carefully at the flight plan to see if any waypoints are out of sequence. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-25 . The waypoints between the TO/FROM waypoints will be displayed in yellow. NOTE: If inserting the airway segment into the Flight Plan results in more than 50 waypoints in the stored Flight Plan or 100 waypoints on the Active Flight Plan. c.

0 Dec/96 .DEPRESS to merge the airway waypoints into the Flight Plan and return to the Flight Plan Page. EDITING AN AIRWAY Once an airway is merged into the flight plan. NOTE: As the cursor is moved up or down.System Operation NOTE: If the waypoint above or in the cursor is not a waypoint on the selected airway. To change ending waypoint. “TO” will appear next to the cursor and a question mark will follow the ident. the message “FPL FULL” will appear. If the destination waypoint is not on the airway. # Key . d. If applicable. perform the following: 1. (Figure 3-41) ACTIVE FPL RYE PESCA < BSR ZONAL < RZS KLAX < DEPART ARRIVE < APPROACH < 2/3 NOTE: If inserting the airway segment into the Flight Plan results in more than 50 waypoints in the stored Flight Plan or 100 waypoints on the Active Flight Plan.DEPRESS to position cursor over an airway waypoint on the Flight Plan page. enter additional airway identifiers to chain several airways together. ENTER Key . To add or delete waypoints from a selected segment of the airway. ETA > ERASE Figure 3-41 If applicable.DEPRESS then enter the appropriate airway identifier. 2. waypoints can be added to or deleted from the flight plan on the Flight Plan Page using normal edit procedures. the system reverts to Option 1. 3. 4. use the Line Select Key to position cursor over a different destination waypoint. Waypoints between the TO/FR waypoints will be displayed in yellow. the airway identifier will blink and the appropriate airway or waypoint identifier must be entered. 3-26 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. use PRV and NXT Keys to access all airway waypoint pages. Line Select Key .

3. < < Figure 3-44 Rev.DEPRESS.KLAX KLAX ****** < < DEPART ARRIVE? APPROACH ETA > ERASE Figure 3-43 ARRIVAL KLAX RUNWAY TRANSITION STAR CIVET? HEL PGS TNP FIM JLI 1/1 > --------. ENTER Key .> ----EHF > LHS PMD > PTV FICKY > GOATZ < < < NOTE: If the last waypoint on the Flight Plan is an airport and an Approach is programmed. ARRIVAL Airport Identifier . 2. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over ARRIVE? field on the Flight Plan page (Figure 3-43).DEPRESS to merge the edited airway segment into the Flight Plan and return to the Flight Plan Page. ENTER Key . < < ACTIVE FPL 1/1 KSEA . use PRV and NXT Keys to access all airway waypoint pages. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-27 . AIRWAY J501 FR HQM OED < NIECE PYE < BSR ZONAL < TO RZS ? < 3/3 > Figure 3-42 5. ENTER Key . ENTERING A STAR OR PROFILE DESCENT ON ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 1.System Operation 3. If applicable. (Figure 3-42) 4.DEPRESS to display ARRIVAL Page (Figure 3-44). If unsure of the transition. Line Select Key DEPRESS to move the cursor to shorten or lengthen the previously selected segment of the airway. the ARRIVAL airport identifier prefills and the cursor is over the first TRANSITION waypoint on the list. use Line Select Key 1 Right or2 Right to select the runway or STAR list.VERIFY or INSERT valid identifier.

DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired RUNWAY on the runway list. See Figure 3-46. 4. ENTER Key . ENTER Key .> ----ELKEY> RZS VTU > > Figure 3-45 NOTE: The STAR field turns yellow and the cursor is over the first identifier on the STAR list. (Figure 3-45) 6.DEPRESS to select RUNWAY. 5. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired TRANSITION waypoint. the RUNWAY field also prefills and the cursor is over the first TRANSITION waypoint on the list. 0 Dec/96 . < < < ARRIVAL KLAX RUNWAY TRANSITION STAR MALIT ROSIN AVE ? DERBB DINTY MUDDE 2/2 > --------. NOTE: If the STAR and TRANSITION are runway dependent. 10. ARRIVAL KLAX RUNWAY TRANSITION STAR MOOR3 ? SADDE4 1/1 ----AVE ----> > 8.System Operation If the last waypoint on the Flight Plan is a runway. 3-28 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. ENTER Key . 7. If a runway is not required. If there are no STARs associated with the Arrival Airport. and a runway Figure 3-46 has not prefilled. proceed to Step 11. the cursor moves to the first RUNWAY identifier on the runway list and the runway field is displayed in yellow. Line Select Key .DEPRESS to select TRANSITION. Depress FPL Key to return to ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN. NXT Key . 9. the message “NO STARS AVAILABLE” appears and the arrival airport ident field flashes.DEPRESS to select STAR. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired STAR.DEPRESS to view waypoints on subsequent pages if desired.

This will erase the current TRANSITION.DEPRESS. EDITING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 1. ARRIVAL KLAX 1/1 > RUNWAY ----TRANSITION AVE > STAR MOOR3 WAYPOINTS OF STAR: AVE FIM DERBB PAULA REYES ILEAN PIRUE WAKER > ERASE 2. or APPROACH) REVIEWING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 1. Rev. ENTER Key .DEPRESS twice to position the cursor over the STAR field.DEPRESS to position cursor over the ARRIVE field on the FLIGHT PLAN Page. ARRIVAL KLAX 1/1 > RUNWAY ----TRANSITION AVE > STAR MOOR3 WAYPOINTS OF STAR: AVE FIM DERBB PAULA REYES ILEAN PIRUE WAKER > SELECT? ERASE NOTE: Look carefully at the flight plan to see if any waypoints are out of sequence. Delete waypoints as necessary.REVIEW (Figure 3-47). STAR.DEPRESS to return to FLIGHT PLAN Page. Figure 3-48 NOTE: SELECT will not appear as an option since a STAR already exists in the Flight Plan. Line Select Key 2R . 3. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the ARRIVE field on the FLIGHT PLAN Page. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-29 . 3. Figure 3-47 STAR waypoints appear indented from the other waypoints on a Flight Plan that are not part of a procedure. (SID. 2. Line Select Key .DEPRESS to review STAR.System Operation 11. Arrival STAR Waypoints . then DEPRESS ENTER Key to insert STAR into Active Flight Plan and return to the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page. ENTER Key . (Figure 3-48) BACK Key .

DEPRESS to select the TRANSITION. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over ARRIVE field on the FLIGHT PLAN Page. 4. 3.DEPRESS to select desired STAR. 2.DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired runway on the RUNWAY list. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to erase STAR and return to FLIGHT PLAN Page.System Operation NOTE: A list will appear with other available STARs. NOTE: The RUNWAY can also be edited without changing the original SID if the SID/TRANSITION are compatible. 0 Dec/96 . ARRIVAL KLAX 1/1 > RUNWAY ----TRANSITION AVE > STAR MOOR3 WAYPOINTS OF STAR: AVE FIM DERBB PAULA REYES ILEAN PIRUE WAKER > ERASE? Figure 3-49 3-30 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. ENTER Key . 8.DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired transition waypoint. NOTE: Cursor moves to the first waypoint of the TRANSITION list and the TRANSITION field is displayed in yellow. then DEPRESS ENTER Key to insert STAR into Active Flight Plan and return to the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page. 5. Line Select Key .DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired STAR. Line Select Key .DEPRESS to select the RUNWAY. 10. Position the cursor over the desired RUNWAY.REVIEW. This is done by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the RUNWAY field. Press ENTER to load the desired RUNWAY on the SID. ENTER Key . ERASING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 1. ENTER Key . ENTER Key . If the STAR is not runway dependent proceed to Step 10.DEPRESS. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over ERASE? (Figure 3-49) 4. 6. 9. 7. Arrival STAR Waypoints . Line Select Key .

ACTIVE FPL REYES PIRUE < FIM PAULA < ILEAN WAKER < DEPART ARRIVE < APPROACH < 2/3 ETA > ERASE Figure 3-50 ACTIVE FPL REYES PIRUE < FIM EHF < PAULA ILEAN < DEPART ARRIVE < APPROACH < NOTE: The previously indented STAR waypoints move over one space to the left on the screen and are treated as normal waypoints in the Flight Plan.INSERT. 1. These waypoints will be treated as non-procedure waypoints in the flight plan. ENTER Key . A DELETE? prompt will appear adjacent to the waypoint to be deleted. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the STAR waypoint identifier that will follow the new entry on the Flight Plan page.DEPRESS. 3. the sequence of waypoints is no longer identified as a database STAR.DEPRESS. BACK Key . 2/3 ETA > ERASE Line Select Key Figure 3-51 DEPRESS to position cursor over the STAR waypoint identifier to be deleted on the Flight Plan page. (Figure 351) DELETING WAYPOINTS OF A STAR 1. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-31 . The waypoint will be erased and the waypoints of the STAR will move left one space. Rev. (Figure 3-50) 2. 3.System Operation ADDING WAYPOINTS WITHIN A STAR NOTE: When a STAR is modified by adding or deleting waypoints.DEPRESS twice. The following may be accomplished from any stored flight plan or the ACTIVE FPL Page. Waypoint Ident . 2. ENTER Key .

(Figure 3-52) ENTER Key . the cursor moves to the first approach TYPE. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over APPROACH? field on the ACTIVE FPL page. If the airport identifier was entered on the FPL page. Figure 3-52 APCH KEWK RUNWAY TYPE TRANSITION RW17 ? RW35 RW06 RW24 1/1 ---------------> > NOTE: If there are no APPROACHes associated with the Approach Airport. (Figure 3-54) < Figure 3-53 APCH KEWK RUNWAY TYPE TRANSITION RW17 RW35 ? RW06 RW24 1/1 ---------------> > NOTE: If a CIRCLING Type Approach is desired. < < < < < ACTIVE FPL 1/1 KORD . Depress FPL Key to return to Active Flight Plan. (Figure 3-53) APPROACH Airport identifier .KEWK PNT CAP KEWK 2. the system will default to the runway list with the cursor over the first runway in the list.VERIFY or INSERT valid ident.DEPRESS to display APPROACH Page. the message “NO APPROACH AVAIL” appears and the airport ident field flashes. Figure 3-54 ENTER Key . if required. 0 Dec/96 3-32 . DEPART ARRIVE APPROACH? ETA > ERASE 3. 6. 5. To access a CIRCLING type GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. Line Select Key.System Operation ENTERING AN APPROACH ON A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 1. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired RUNWAY on the runway list. If a valid runway has been selected. 4. go to step 6.DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired Approach TYPE if required.DEPRESS to select RUNWAY.

MAP . < Figure 3-55 APPROACH KEWK RUNWAY TYPE TRANSITION COBUS ? PNE 1/1 RW35 NDB -----> > 8. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position < cursor over the desired TRANSITION if required. ENTER Key .Indicates the initial approach fix. (Figure 3-56) If there is only one transition for the desired approach the system automatically Figure 3-56 loads the transition and the WPTs of the approach are displayed.DEPRESS to select Approach TYPE. PT HP . Press Line Select 2 right to view the type list. “SEL RWY FROM STAR PG” is displayed at the bottom of the screen. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-33 .DEPRESS to select TRANSITION. ENTER Key .A Procedure Turn will commence at that waypoint. Use Line Select 1 Right to change the runway field to dashes if required. 9.The Missed Approach Point.DME Arc end point. Go to Step 8. Rev. . NOTE: If the runway selected on the Approach Page differs from the runway dictated by the STAR.The Final Approach Fix. ARC .A Holding Pattern is programmed at that waypoint. The system will identify the following waypoints of an approach: IAF . Go to step 10. (Figure 3-55) APPROACH KEWK RUNWAY TYPE TRANSITION NDB ? RNAV 1/1 RW35 ----------> > NOTE: If there is only one type of approach available the system automatically loads the approach TYPE and the cursor moves over the WPT in the transition list.Final Approach Course Alignment Fix FAF . 7. FCF .System Operation approach the runway field must be dashes ----.

DEPRESS to position cursor over the APPROACH field on the FLIGHT PLAN Page. 3-34 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. Line Select Key . APCH KEWK 1/1 > RUNWAY RW35 TYPE NDB > TRANSITION WAIVE WPTS OF APPROACH: < IAF WAIVE MAP RW17 CANB ++++++ PT CANB HP CANB CANB SELECT? ERASE REVIEWING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 1.DEPRESS to review APPROACH (Figure 3-58) BACK Key . ENTER Key . That field will turn from green to yellow and the previous information will turn to dashes. Approach Waypoints REVIEW (Figure 3-57). Figure 3-57 2. 2.DEPRESS to display APPROACH Page. The display will return to the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page. TYPE. Figure 3-58 NOTE: SELECT will not appear as an option since an APPROACH already exists in the Flight Plan. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the APPROACH field on the FLIGHT PLAN Page.DEPRESS to return to FLIGHT PLAN Page. or TRANSITION may be edited by pressing the Line Select Key next to the field to be edited. Alternate options may be available depending on the information in the remaining two fields. EDITING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 1. and TRANSITION fields to dashes (------). The RUNWAY. ENTER Key . 0 Dec/96 . TYPE. The most efficient way to edit an approach procedure is to change the RUNWAY.System Operation 10. APCH KEWK 1/1 > RUNWAY RW35 TYPE NDB > TRANSITION COBUS WPTS OF APPROACH: < IAF WAIVE MAP RW17 CANB ++++++ PT CANB HP CANB CANB SELECT? ERASE 3. then DEPRESS ENTER Key to select the Approach and insert APPROACH into Active Flight Plan.

DEPRESS to position cursor over APPROACH field on the FLIGHT PLAN Page. ENTER Key . Look carefully at the flight plan to see if any waypoints are out of sequence. ENTER Key . When all the fields have been filled.DEPRESS to enter the selected data from each list. When an APPROACH is modified by adding or deleting waypoints the sequence of waypoints is no longer identified as a database APPROACH and the system will not enter the Approach Mode. An APPROACH CANCELED message will be displayed anytime a waypoint is deleted. 1. Line Select Key (1R)(adjacent to RUNWAY field) . Use the appropriate Line Select Keys to select the desired data from each list.. insert it into the flight plan. 4. Line Select Key (2R)(adjacent to TYPE and TRANSITION fields) .DEPRESS to display APPROACH Page. Using the same Line Select Keys. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to change the field to dashes. Go to the Active FPL Page by pressing the FPL Key and delete waypoints as necessary. 2. 3. and return to the Flight Plan Page. Line Select Key . or when a Direct To the MAP is initiated. 3. TYPES. Line Select Key . added to an approach procedure on the Active Flight Plan. ERASING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL NOTE: Erasing an Approach also erases the current destination airport identifier. and TRANSITIONS. This procedure should be used when an approach at a different airport is desired.System Operation 1.DEPRESS to position cursor over ERASE? (Figure 3-59) APCH KEWK 1/1 > RUNWAY RW35 TYPE NDB > TRANSITION COBUS WPTS OF APPROACH: < IAF WAIVE MAP RW17 CANB ++++++ PT CANB HP CANB CANB SELECT? ERASE 2.DEPRESS to change the field to dashes. Figure 3-59 Rev. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-35 .DEPRESS to select the new approach data. obtain a complete list of RUNWAYS. NOTE: Depress the d Key to review the waypoints.

The approach functions will be disabled and the CDI scaling will return to the TERMINAL sensitivity of 1NM full scale deflection. NOTE: When an APPROACH is modified by adding or deleting waypoints (including waypoints between the “fence” and the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint). Display the appropriate FPL Page. ENTER Key . An (APPROACH CANCELED) message will be displayed anytime a waypoint is deleted or added to an APPROACH procedure on the Active Flight Plan.DEPRESS to position cursor over the APPROACH waypoint identifier to be deleted. NOTE: Anytime a Direct To the MAP is performed and an approach is either armed or active. and selecting it. 2. A DELETE? prompt will appear adjacent to the waypoint. automatically erases the STAR procedure. automatically erases the APPROACH procedure. has no effect on the STAR procedure unless the STAR is runway dependent. USING A STAR AND AN APPROACH IN THE SAME FLIGHT PLAN Since both the Arrival (STAR) and Approach procedures allow for entry of AIRPORT and RUNWAY. The pilot must return to the ARRIVAL Page to 3-36 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.DEPRESS. ENTER Key . an APPROACH CANCELED message will appear. the sequence of waypoints is no longer identified as a database APPROACH and the system will not enter the Approach Mode. • Changing the AIRPORT on the ARRIVAL Page. • Changing the RUNWAY on the APPROACH Page. automatically erases the APPROACH procedure. • Changing the RUNWAY on the ARRIVAL Page. 4. and selecting an associated STAR. • Changing the AIRPORT on the APPROACH Page. DELETING AN APPROACH WAYPOINT 1.DEPRESS. BACK Key . If the STAR is runway dependent. the following rules apply.DEPRESS to erase APPROACH and return to the FLIGHT PLAN Page. 3. the message “SEL RWY FROM STAR PG” (Select RUNWAY from STAR Page) appears on the APPROACH Page. Line Select Key .System Operation 4. and selecting it. 0 Dec/96 . and selecting an associated Approach.

VERIFY or INSERT valid ident. ready for entry of the Destination. and type in desired identifier. If DESTINATION -----both AFIS and Company VIA -----. with the cursor over both the Origin and Destination field. proceed to the next step. Display the COMPANY ROUTES Page (automatically after initialization. the COMPANY ROUTES page will display the location entered on the initialization page (if available) in the Origin field.1 . (Figure 3-59b) DESTINATION identifier . Figure 3-59c Rev. or by paging the FPL pages). the first page displayed after system initializaCOMPANY ROUTES 1/1 tion will be the COMPANY ROUTES page in lieu of the ORIGIN KCOF > FLIGHT PLAN LIST page. before changing the RUNWAY on the APPROACH Page. NOTE: Typically. 2. and the Origin is correct. DEPRESS to position cursor over only ORIGIN field on the COMPANY ROUTES page. 2 Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-36. Line Select Key LSR2 .> Routes are present. SELECTING A COMPANY ROUTE AND ADDING IT TO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 1.System Operation change the RUNWAY for the STAR. the COMPANY ROUTES page R#--< is displayed first. (Figure 359b) < Figure 3-59a COMPANY ROUTES ORIGIN DESTINATION VIA R#--1/1 KCOF ----------> > Figure 3-59b COMPANY ROUTES ORIGIN DESTINATION VIA < 1/1 KCOF KEFD -----> > R#--- 3.If you desire to change the Origin entry. (Figure 3-59a) If the cursor is over both fields. NOTE: If the data base contains company routes.

R#019 Figure 3-59g 3-36. (Figure 3-59d) If the route is valid. the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN page is now displayed with the waypoints of the pair added. 5. the first one will be displayed. Figure 3-59f COMPANY ROUTES ORIGIN DESTINATION VIA < 1/1 KCOF KSMY TLH? > > 7.2 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. 2 Aug/00 . and a ROUTE NOT FOUND message will be displayed. The ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN page is now displayed with the waypoints of the pair added. If the selected city pair has more than one VIA. or BACK keys to scroll through the list of VIAs (Figure 3-59g) ENTER Key . (Figure 3-59e) A WPT MEM FULL MESSAGE will be displayed if the waypoint memory is full. an ACTIVE FPL FULL message is displayed. Figure 3-59d COMPANY ROUTES ORIGIN DESTINATION VIA < 1/1 KCOF KEFD LAL > > R#017 ACTIVE FPL FULL Figure 3-59e COMPANY ROUTES ORIGIN DESTINATION VIA < 1/1 KCOF KSMY COVIA? > > R#018 6.DEPRESS. (Figure 3-59c) If the pair is valid and has only one VIA. COMPANY ROUTES ORIGIN DESTINATION VIA < 1/1 KCOF KSMX -----> > R#--ROUTE NOT FOUND NOTE: If the pair is not valid. NOTE: The Company Route can be selected either by the preceding method using an Origin/Destination city pair. NEXT.System Operation 4.DEPRESS. ENTER Key . (Figure 3-59f) Use the PREV. or by selecting LSK L4 and entering the route number. the COMPANY ROUTES page will remain. but the Active FPL is full.

System Operation Note: In order to execute approaches with a specific aircraft installation. the installation must meet the standards set forth by the governing certification agency. Rev.3 . 1 Aug/97 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-36. Consult the Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement for specific limitations.

To set the HSI valid. 1 Aug/97 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-37 . Pilots are responsible for procedural compliance. NOTE: If the MAP is abeam or beyond the threshold. CIRCLING. cancel the Approach on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page by pressing the ENTER Key. the HSI flag will be set invalid. When the Approach is flown. and VOR approaches only. No Auto Leg change (waypoint sequencing) will occur to waypoints beyond the “fence” (++++++) once the airplane passes the MAP. the SXTK field is disabled so that no parallel course can be entered. The system will not display any interim waypoints between the FAF and the MAP. The system is capable of executing GPS. the system will provide guidance along the final approach course to the Missed Approach Point. the last waypoint of the Approach. Pilots are responsible for procedural compliance. The system will remain in the Approach Mode and the discrete APPROACH annunciator will remain illuminated until the HSI is set valid. GPS Overlay NDB. Also. The CDI sensitivity will change from 5. Rev. Anytime the TO waypoint is part of an Approach Procedure. an APPROACH WARN message will appear on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page. the system will go into the Approach Armed mode. The system may not give vertical guidance to the interim waypoint.0NM full scale deflection to 1. When initially executing a missed approach procedure. No LOC. or the approach is a circling approach. Constraints may be entered manually. When the aircraft is within 30NM of the airport. no altitude constraints will be displayed at the MAP from the database. NOTE: A “fence” (++++++) separates the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint from the MAP. RNAV. At this point the aircraft may bank slightly due to increased roll steering gains. If RAIM is not available at 2NM from the FAF. use the FMS Heading Mode or manually fly the procedure to ensure proper track and turn direction.0NM full scale deflection. ILS or MLS capability is available. even though a waypoint may be shown on the approach plate. At this point the appropriate missed approach procedures should be executed.System Operation EXECUTING APPROACHES WARNING: When entering PTs or HP airspace at high speed the FMS may not constrain the airplane from violating maneuvering airspace.

SELECT if required. This will insure proper waypoint sequencing on the Active Flight Plan. erase the current approach procedure before selecting a procedure at the new airport.KPRC EED DRK KPRC 3.DEPRESS. TRANSITION . DEPART ARRIVE APPROACH? ETA > ERASE Figure 3-60 4.DEPRESS until the ACTIVE FPL Page appears. 6. FPL Key .DEPRESS to position cursor over TYPE.DEPRESS. If a circling type approach is desired: Line Select Key .DEPRESS. (Figure 3-60) Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over APPROACH? ENTER Key . to display runway list if not already displayed. If. an approach at a different airport is desired.SELECT if required.DEPRESS. Proceed to Step 10.DEPRESS to display the TYPE list. TYPE . 8. 0 Dec/96 3-38 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System . ENTER Key .DEPRESS twice. 9. ENTER Key . APPROACH page is now displayed. ENTER Key . Figure 3-61 ENTER Key . LOADING A GPS/GPS OVERLAY APPROACH 1.DEPRESS to position cursor over desired runway. ENTER Key . 10. Rev. after the missed approach. (Figure 3-61) Airport Identifier INSERT or VERIFY. if required. 7. APCH KPRC RUNWAY TYPE TRANSITION RW21L? RW11 1/1 ---------------> > < < < < < 2.System Operation At the MAP the pilot must manually or via the HDG Mode maneuver the aircraft to the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint. Line Select Key . 5. ACTIVE FPL 1/1 KEED . 11.

FMS Mode .KPRC EED DRK KPRC DEPART ARRIVE APPROACH? ETA > ERASE Figure 3-62 HEADING VECTOR 1/1 < HDG 155 CANCEL TO DRK ENTER HDG DTK 197 Figure 3-63 7. VERIFY the approach appears as selected. based on assigned route. 14. EXECUTING A GPS/GPS OVERLAY APPROACH NOTE: To fly a full procedure DME ARC or Procedure Turn.DEPRESS to display the HEADING VECTOR Page. USING RADAR VECTORS TO FINAL APPROACH COURSE 1. MSG Key . (Figure 3-63) ACTIVE FPL 1/1 KEED . 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-39 . 6.INSERT as assigned by ATC.DEPRESS to display the ACTIVE FPL Page. HDG Key . 3. if required.REVIEW.VERIFY they appear as selected. 4. (Figure 3-62) < < < < < 2. follow the FMS and EFIS/Instrument displays. Rev. Approach and Waypoint Sequencing .Edit.System Operation 12. 13. Flight Director or Autopilot . Approach Waypoints . Heading . either coupled or using own navigation. Waypoint Sequencing .DEPRESS ACTIVE FPL Page is displayed.SELECT or VERIFY the appropriate mode for guidance if required.VERIFY approach is armed within 30NM of the airport and the HSI scaling output has changed to TRMNL on NAVIGATION Page 2.ENGAGE the appropriate mode if required. ENTER Key . FPL key . 5.

DEPRESS to display INTERCEPT? 12. ENTER Key .System Operation 8. 2 Aug/00 .DEPRESS. ENTER Key . 11. ENTER Key . (Figure 364) HEADING VECTOR 1/1 < < HDG 155 HDG SELECT ? TO DRK OK? ENTER DTK 197 > After receiving the final intercept vector from ATC: 9. BACK Key . CDI Display .If Required. 17. DEPRESS until the FAF waypoint is displayed. After completing step 16. ENTER Key .DEPRESS cursor moves to the TO field.INSERT if a Procedure Turn type approach or VERIFY if any other type approach.DEPRESS cursor moves to the DTK field.VERIFY the HSI course needle slews to the final approach course or manually select the course.DEPRESS to display the HEADING VECTOR Page. < Figure 3-64 HEADING VECTOR 1/1 < < < HDG 155 INTERCEPT ? FAF TO DRK DTK OK? ENTER 125 > Figure 3-65 NOTE: There may be more than one waypoint on the FPL with the same identifier as the FAF. 16. (Figure 3-65) 10. 13.When over the FAF. 18. 14.DEPRESS twice. VERIFY annunciation and the HSI scaling output has changed to APPR on NAVIGATION Page 2.DEPRESS twice to engage Heading Select mode. BACK Key . 3-40 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. insure that the FAF waypoint has been selected with the BACK Key by going to the d Page and noting that the cursor is over the FAF waypoint. 15. Approach Annunciator . ENTER Key . HDG Key . Final Approach Course .

Waypoints and HSI Course .KPRC EED DRK KPRC DEPART ARRIVE APPROACH? ETA > ERASE Figure 3-66 4. NAVIGATION 1/4 DIRECT 13:48 PT DRK ALT ? < NX PT OVERFLY TO 305 DIS 0.System Operation USING OWN NAVIGATION .VERIFY they appear as selected. This message is displayed 30 seconds prior to the event and disappears when the action is initiated.0 DTK 301 GS 150 WIND ---/---AUTO< > > As the aircraft approaches > the PT waypoint.ENGAGE the appropriate mode. FPL Key . 5.DEPRESS to display the ACTIVE FPL Page.SELECT or VERIFY the appropriate mode for guidance. While flying the Procedure Turn. Line four indicates the aircraft will turn to a heading of 305° upon reaching DRK.When over the FAF. 7. the TO DRK will change to TO INTCPT. Figure 3-67 indicates the aircraft is flying DIRECT to DRK where a Procedure Turn (PT) will take place. the TO INTCPT field changes to TO (the FAF).NO DME ARC 1. When the Procedure Turn is completed. a message is displayed on the fourth line of the CDU indicating the Figure 3-67 next action the aircraft will take. and the aircraft is inbound. PROCEDURE TURN The following is a brief description of the screen displays typically seen while executing a Procedure Turn. Approach and Waypoint Sequencing . Flight Director or Autopilot .VERIFY proper sequencing during the approach. (Figure 3-66) 2. 3.2 ETE 00:00. 2 Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-41 . Rev. MSG Key . Approach Annunciator . 6. < < < < < ACTIVE FPL 1/1 KEED . VERIFY annunciation and the HSI scaling output has changed to APPR on NAVIGATION Page 2.VERIFY approach is armed within 30NM of the airport and the HSI scaling output has changed to TRMNL on NAVIGATION Page 2. FMS Mode .

Arc DME PT 10 0 No 900 5757' (IAF) 170° 3-71 350° 3-70 6310' 10 D 9000 ME A No rc PT 3-68 (IAF) 3-72 (IAF) 349° 30 DILLY 10 .System Operation NOTE: When flying the approach on a transition that specifies NoPT and a “PT” waypoint is depicted on the flight plan.3) 14.9 6220 ' 3-42 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.9 INBOUND CRS 125 GS 150 WIND ---/---AUTO- > > > Figure 3-68 See the following diagram and Figures 3-70 through 3-73 as the aircraft sequences through the turn. If the course arrow does not automatically slew to the outbound course. the outbound course is displayed on the NAVIGATION 1 Page. NAVIGATION 1/4 PROCEDURE TURN TO INTCPT ----< NX RIGHT TO 350 DIS (1. 2 Aug/00 .1 DRK 259° 3-73 3-67 12 5° 7640' D3. Figure 3-68 indicates a right turn to 350° is upcoming.7 ETE 00:05. it must be manually set to the outbound course so that the CDI sensing is correct.0 65 00 12 5° D 5° 114. NOTE: When a Procedure Turn is initiated. once established on the inbound course it will be necessary to do a DIRECT TO the FAF waypoint to avoid flying the Procedure Turn.

2 Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-43 .8 ETE 00:03.5 INBOUND CRS 125 GS 150 WIND ---/--- > > > Figure 3-71 NAVIGATION 1/4 PROCEDURE TURN TO DRK ----< NX MA11RC DIS (4) 7.1 DTK (125) 125 GS 150 WIND ---/--- > > > Figure 3-72 NAVIGATION 1/4 FR DRK 11:45 TO MA11RC 5083G < DIS ETE DTK GS WIND 2.7 125 199 ---/--- > > > Figure 3-73 Rev.2) 6.System Operation NAVIGATION 1/4 PROCEDURE TURN TO INTCPT ----< NX LEFT INTCPT 170 DIS (2.5) 12.3 ETE 00:02.8 DTK 350 GS 150 WIND ---/--- > > > Figure 3-70 NAVIGATION 1/4 PROCEDURE TURN TO INTCPT ----< NX LEFT INTRCPT 125 DIS (5.9 ETE 00:04.5 00:00.

The DIS shown in parentheses is the straight-line distance from the aircraft’s present position to the procedure turn fix. 3-44 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. the ETE shown will be from the airplane’s present position to the FAF. MSG Key . FPL Key . FMS Mode .ENGAGE the appropriate mode. After crossing this intercept point the DIS shown will be from the airplane’s present position to the FAF and the DIS in parentheses will be removed. After crossing this intercept point.KPRC EED DRK KPRC DEPART ARRIVE APPROACH? ETA > ERASE Figure 3-74 4. Approach and Waypoint Sequencing . (Figure 3-74) 2.VERIFY they appear as selected.VERIFY approach is armed within 30NM of the airport and the HSI scaling output has changed to TRMNL on NAVIGATION Page 2. 5. < < < < < ACTIVE FPL 1/1 KEED .DEPRESS to display the ACTIVE FPL Page. Estimated Time Enroute (ETE) that is displayed after crossing the IAF on the procedure turn is the time from the aircraft’s present position to where the airplane intercepts the final approach course inbound (INTCPT). TO the FAF will be displayed at this time having changed from TO INTCPT on NAV Page1.SELECT or VERIFY the appropriate mode for guidance. 2 Aug/00 .System Operation NOTE: If aircraft is configured for dual systems no XFILL? prompt will be displayed during a PT even if dissimilar data exists in each system. NOTE: The bearing and distance are with respect to the procedure turn fix. DIS that is displayed after crossing the IAF on the procedure turn is the distance from the aircraft’s present position to where the airplane intercepts the final approach course inbound (INTCPT). Flight Director or Autopilot . 3. USING RADAR VECTORS TO INTERCEPT A DME ARC 1.

(Figure 3-75) 7. HEADING VECTOR 1/1 < HDG 080 CANCEL TO DRK ENTER HDG DTK 080 Figure 3-75 After receiving ARC intercept vector from ATC: 9. 11. Waypoints and HSI Course . VERIFY annunciation and the HSI scaling output has changed to APPR on NAVIGATION Page 2.INSERT. < < < HEADING VECTOR 1/1 HDG 205 INTERCEPT ? ARC TO DILLY DTK 011 > NOTE: If an intermediate waypoint exists on the ARC between the ARC beginning point and the ARC end point. 18. Heading . CDI Display . HDG Key .VERIFY proper sequencing during the approach.When over the FAF. 16. ENTER Key .System Operation 6. BACK Key .DEPRESS Figure 3-76 until the ARC End/Final Approach Course Way-point is displayed.DEPRESS twice (accepts the default DTK). the ARC intercept point should be approximated so it can be determined whether the ARC end or intermediate waypoint should be used as the TO waypoint.DEPRESS to display the HEADING VECTOR Page. HDG Key .DEPRESS to display INTERCEPT? (Figure 3-76) 13.DEPRESS to display the HEADING VECTOR Page. ENTER Key . Rev. 12.DEPRESS twice to engage HDG SELECT mode. ENTER Key . 10. 8.VERIFY course needle is set to the DTK shown on the HEADING VECTOR Page.INSERT as assigned by ATC. 15. 17.DEPRESS. BACK Key . 2 Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-45 . Heading . Approach Annunciator . NO ARC INTERCEPT may be displayed if the wrong waypoint is selected.DEPRESS cursor moves to the TO field. 14. ENTER Key .

In this case the map will only display waypoints up to and including the IAF waypoint at the beginning of the arc. (Figure 3-77) 2.VERIFY approach is armed within 30NM of the airport and the HSI scaling output has changed to TRMNL on NAVIGATION Page 2. < < < < < ACTIVE FPL 1/1 KEED . DIS ETE DTK GS WIND 16. 6. FMS Mode .4 265 201 ---/--- > > -AUTO- Figure 3-78 3-46 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.ENGAGE the appropriate mode.SELECT or VERIFY the appropriate mode for guidance. Although no waypoints will be displayed during the DME Arc NAVIGATION 1/4 Procedure. MSG Key . 3. Waypoints and HSI Course . VERIFY annunciation and the HSI scaling output has changed to APPR on NAVIGATION Page 2. Flight Director or Autopilot . 2 Aug/00 . No waypoints will be displayed while on the arc. NOTE: If aircraft is configured for dual systems no XFILL? prompt will be displayed during a DME ARC procedure even if dissimilar data exists in each system. Once the aircraft has passed the arc end waypoint.DEPRESS to display the ACTIVE FPL Page.VERIFY they appear as selected. the map will display the remaining waypoints of the active flight plan. NOTE: Certain EFIS map displays do not support curved lines to draw DME Arcs.KPRC EED DRK KPRC DEPART ARRIVE APPROACH? ETA > ERASE Figure 3-77 4.When over the FAF. FPL Key . Approach Annunciator .6 00:005. The following is a brief description of the screen displays typically seen flying a DME Arc. 5.System Operation USING OWN NAVIGATION TO FLY DME ARC 1.VERIFY proper sequencing during the approach. Approach and Waypoint Sequencing . 7. the FMS page < DIRECT 11:47 displays will be as depicted AR D259J 11:53 > < in Figures 3-78 through 3-82.

7 DTK (125) 029 GS 150 WIND ---/---AUTO- > > > See Figures 3-78 through 382 as the aircraft sequences through the procedure. (ARC 10.0) in the DIS field indicates the arc center is 10. 259 indicates the radial from the ARC center NAVAID. 2 Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-47 .e. Figure 3-82 Rev.0 ETE 00:00. This message is displayed thirty seconds prior to the event and disappears when the action is initiated. Figure 3-80 shows the aircraft is flying the DME Arc to Figure 3-81 DILLY. Figure 378 indicates the aircraft is flyNAVIGATION 1/4 DMEARC TO DILLY 9000A < DIS ETE DTK GS WIND (ARC 10. A=1nm J=10nm).5 00:03. J indicates the ARC distance (i. > > Figure 3-80 NOTE: The naming convention for ARC waypoints is as follows: D indicates DME. Figure 3-79 shows the aircraft is within thirty seconds of intercepting the DME Arc at D259J. a message is displayed on the fourth line of the CDU indicating the next action the aircraft will take (NX DME ARC).0 NM from the aircraft’s present position.0) 7. NAVIGATION 1/4 FR DILLY 11:59 TO DRK 6500G < DIS ETE DTK GS WIND 9.0 DTK 239 GS 150 WIND ---/---AUTO< > > > Figure 3-79 ing DIRECT to D259J where the aircraft will begin flying a DME Arc (AR). > NOTE: Distance (DIS) displayed is the distance from the present aircraft position to the TO waypoint.8 125 149 ---/--- NAVIGATION 1/4 DMEARC TO DILLY 9000A < NX DRK 12:02 DIS (10) 2.System Operation As the aircraft approaches the AR waypoint.7 ETE 00:001.0 00:03.0 355 150 ---/--NAVIGATION 1/4 DIRECT 11:47 AR D259J 11:53 < NX DMEARC 355 DIS 2.

L150).DEPRESS to position the cursor over the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint. manually turn the airplane toward the missed approach fix then perform the d to procedure. The DIRECT Page will be displayed. ENTER Key . 2.e. OPTION 2. 3. HDG SELECT? MAP TO MA11RC DTK < 125 > Figure 3-84 Rev. if required. (Figure 3-83) ENTER Key . Heading to intercept a course to the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint 1. (Figure 3-84) HEADING VECTOR < < < 1/1 HDG L270 CANCEL MAP TO MA11RC DTK 125 > 2. The cursor moves to the Heading Mode field and HDG SELECT? is in the cursor. The HEADING VECTOR Page appears with the cursor over the HEADING field.DEPRESS to sequence to the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint. d Key .DEPRESS.DEPRESS.System Operation Estimated Time Enroute (ETE) is the time around the arc path to the TO waypoint. Figure 3-83 HEADING VECTOR < < 1/1 HDG L270 NOTE: Prior to step 3 the enter key may be pressed with the cursor over HDG select field so that the airplane can begin the intercept process. Type in the appropriate heading using a preceding R or L to establish the turn direction (i. Use one of the following options to sequence to the missed approach waypoint. HDG Key . 2 Aug/00 3-48 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System . Direct To the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint 1. Line Select Key .DEPRESS. OPTION 1. Repeat the procedure from step1 to complete the HDG intercept procedure. NOTE: If the direction the airplane will turn is in question and the turn direction may not be in accordance with the missed approach procedure.

INTERCEPT MAP TO MA12RC < DTK 197 > 5. The autopilot may now be re-engaged if required to fly to the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint. BACK Key . To change the field from ETA to ALT. Figure 3-87 NOTE: If no altitude constraint is programmed at the current TO waypoint. The cursor moves to the DTK field.DEPRESS. perform the following: 1.2 ETE 00:00. Figure 3-85 HEADING VECTOR < < 6.DEPRESS until the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint is displayed. BACK Key . Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the ETA field.0 DTK 301 GS 150 WIND ---/---AUTO< > 2.DEPRESS. ENTER Key . (Figure 3-87) ENTER Key . Type in the desired track to be intercepted to the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint. NAVIGATION 1/4 DIRECT 13:48 PT DRK ALT ? < NX PT OVERFLY TO 305 DIS 0.DEPRESS. It is recommended that the ETA field on NAVIGATION Page 1 be changed to ALT during approach procedures for a display of the altitude constraints at the current TO waypoint. 2 Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-49 .DEPRESS until INTERCEPT? is displayed. Rev. 1/1 HDG L270 CANCEL MAP TO MA12RC < DTK 260 > 7. ENTER Key . ENTER Key . the ALT field will display dashes. (Figure 3-86) HEADING VECTOR <HDG < 1/1 L270 4. The NAVIGATION Page will be disFigure 3-86 played with the HDG and DTK displayed in yellow.System Operation 3. ALT? will be displayed in the cursor. The cursor moves to the TO field. > > 3.DEPRESS to change the field to altitude. (Figure 3-85) BACK Key .DEPRESS TWICE.

0 Dec/96 .System Operation THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 3-50 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

PWE LMN BURKK BDF GSH KDTW ***** > > > > ENTER Key . DIS. Figure 3-88 NOTE: The system must compute a turn from a wings level position. 4. Display automatically advances to NAVIGATION Page 1. (Figure 3-88) DIRECT KSNA TO MUSEL < HEMET TRM < EED* TBC < FMN PUB < HLC < 2. DTK . 1. an OFFSET WPT Page is displayed. NOTE: If a Direct To the MAP on the active flight plan is initiated. The DIRECT Page is displayed with cursor over the Offset Waypoint. 1/2 NOTE: Active Flight Plans exceeding 18 waypoints will be continued on subsequent pages.System Operation ENROUTE DIRECT TO . 3. A DIRECT TO Page will appear with the cursor over the current TO waypoint. If the aircraft is in a turn when the d Key pressed. the selected Approach Procedure will be canceled as indicated by the waypoints of the approach no longer being indented and a MSG. Verify data and DEPRESS ENTER. d Key . Rev.DEPRESS. If an offset waypoint was selected.ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINT d function enables the pilot to fly direct to any lateral waypoint on the Active Flight Plan without reinserting the waypoint identifier. Press ENTER again to proceed direct to the WPT.CHECK. The aircraft will then continue the turn toward the Direct To waypoint. the aircraft will roll to wings level position momentarily. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-51 . Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired identifier.DEPRESS. NXT or PRV Key to access remaining waypoints. Display automatically advances to NAVIGATION Page 1 when the DIRECT TO function is complete. Press d .

System Operation
DIRECT TO - HP WAYPOINT 1.

d Key - DEPRESS. A DIRECT TO Page appears with the cursor over the current TO waypoint.

2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired HP identifier. (Figure 3-89)

NOTE: Active Flight Plans exceeding 18 waypoints will be continued on subsequent pages. Press d , NXT or PRV Key to access remaining waypoints.
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to display the HOLDING PATTERN Page with both the OK? ENTER and CANCEL option. (Figure 3-90)

< < < < <

DIRECT KSNA MUSEL HEMET TRM EED* TBC FMN PUB HLC

1/2

PWE LMN BURKK HP BDF GSH KDTW *****

> > > >

Figure 3-89
HOLDING PATTERN 1/1 AT BDF DIRECT ENTRY INBOUND CRS 070 MAX HOLDING TAS 261 TURN DIR RIGHT LEG TIME 1.5 LEG DIS (0.0) EXIT MODE MANUAL OK? ENTER CANCEL

NOTE: The holding pattern may be edited if required , at this time. See Page 3-66 for details. To Select and Go Direct To HP Waypoint:
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. Display automatically advances to NAVIGATION Page 1. 5. DIS, DTK - CHECK.

> > > > >

Figure 3-90

To Cancel Holding Pattern:(from the Holding Pattern page)
1. Line Select - DEPRESS to position cursor over desired HP waypoint. 2. Hold Key - DEPRESS 3. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over CANCEL?. 4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. Display automatically advances to NAVIGATION Page 1 and aircraft proceeds Direct To the waypoint with the Holding Pattern canceled.

3-52

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

Rev. 0 Dec/96

System Operation
DIRECT TO - RANDOM WAYPOINT This procedure enables the pilot to add a random waypoint to the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN in the desired sequence and proceed direct to it. 1.

d Key - DEPRESS. The cursor will automatically appear over the current TO waypoint on the DIRECT TO Page.
DIRECT KSNA MUSEL < HEMET TRM < EED* TBC < FMN TO PUB < HLC
<

2. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the identifier that will follow the new entry. (Figure 3-91) 3. Type in the waypoint identifier. 4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS.

1/2

PWE LMN BURKK HP BDF GSH KDTW *****

> > > >

5. Waypoint Page Figure 3-91 Coordinates - VERIFY or INSERT. To insert Waypoint Coordinates (cursor over POS field): a. Latitude - INSERT (N or S first, then degrees, minutes and hundredths (6 characters)). b. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. c. Longitude - INSERT (E or W first, then degrees, minutes and hundredths (7 characters)). 6. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. 7. Waypoint Sequence VERIFY that the waypoint is in the proper location. (Figure 3-92) 8. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. Display automatically advances to NAVIGATION Page 1.
< < < < <

DIRECT KSNA MUSEL HEMET TRM EED* TBC FMN PUB

1/2

HLC PWE LMN BURKK BDF TO ALS KDTW *****

> > > > >

NOTE: If Direct To a pilot entered waypoint is desired, a latitude and longitude entry may be required.
Rev. 0 Dec/96

Figure 3-92

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

3-53

System Operation
A. Latitude - Insert N or S first, then degrees, minutes, and hundredths (6 characters) B. Longitude - Insert E or W first, then degrees, minutes, and hundredths (7 characters) If Direct To an offset waypoint is desired, the radial and distance entry from the parent waypoint may be required. NOTE: If ENTER Key is not depressed prior to leaving DIRECT Page, the waypoint identifier will not appear on the Active Flight Plan, the aircraft will not proceed DIRECT TO this waypoint and will need to be re-entered. The DIRECT TO function has been completed when NAV Page 1 is displayed after the last ENTER Key press.
9. DIS, DTK - CHECK.

NOTE: A Direct To function may also be accomplished from NAVIGATION Page 1, 2, or 3 by placing the cursor over the TO waypoint and typing in the desired waypoint if required. Depress the ENTER Key and the system will proceed Direct To the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint was not on the active FPL a fence will be added to the FPL and no AUTO LEG CHG will occur beyond this waypoint. Anytime the Direct To function is used to go Direct To the MAP the Approach Procedure will be canceled. The SYSTEM MESSAGE page will display APPROACH CANCELED and the CDI sensitivity will return to Terminal scale of 1NM full scale deflection.
DIRECT TO - CLOSEST AIRPORT This procedure allows the pilot to select a desired airport and proceed DIRECT TO it. 1. Key- DEPRESS until DIR CLOSEST ARP Page appears. (Figure 3-93) When initially accessed the cursor will be over the airport closest to the aircraft’s present position at that time. 2.

d

DIR CLOSET ARP 2/2 TO KSNA 034/ 13 KNZJ 057/ 17 < KSLI 360/ 20 KLGB 349/ 23 < KNFG 123/ 32 KCNO 041/ 34 < KLAX 335/ 36 KRAL 055/ 39 < KONT 040/ 39
<

Figure 3-93 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired airport identifiRev. 0 Dec/96

3-54

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

System Operation
er and press ENTER. NAVIGATION Page 1 will be displayed and the airplane will proceed d to the selected airport.

NOTE: The bearing and distance values to the closest airports are based on the aircraft’s present position at the time this page is accessed. The values are not updated while the page is being displayed. To obtain updated information, it is necessary to exit the page then return.
PSEUDO-VORTAC (SELECTED COURSE) 1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION Page 1.

NOTE: The system must be proceeding Direct To a waypoint or DTK will not be an enterable field. If system is proceeding Direct To the desired waypoint, proceed to Step 5. If system is not currently proceeding direct to a waypoint, continue with Step 2.
2. 3. 4. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over TO field. TO Waypoint Identifier - INSERT (if necessary). ENTER Key - DEPRESS.
NAVIGATION 1/4 DIRECT 22:36 PT LNK 22:42 <
<

If Waypoint Page Appears: a. Waypoint Page Coordinates - VERIFY or INSERT. ENTER Key - DEPRESS.

b.

DIS ETE DTK GS WIND

5. Desired Track (DTK) INSERT. (Figure 3-94) 6. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. If the DTK entry positions the aircraft on the FROM, or far, side of the TO waypoint, the Leg Change Mode switches to -MAN-, otherwise it remains in -AUTO-. (Figure 3-95) The pilot must determine if -MANor -AUTO- is appropriate. To reselect AUTO,
Rev. 0 Dec/96

-AUTO-

17.9 00:04.3 070 256 104/ 14

> >

Figure 3-94
NAVIGATION 1/4 PSEUDO VORTAC TO LNK 22:42 <
<

DIS ETE DTK GS WIND

-MAN-

14.1 00:03.3 070 256 104/ 14

> >

Figure 3-95

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

3-55

System Operation
press the BACK Key then ENTER when the cursor is over the LEG CHANGE field.

NOTE: The system will turn the aircraft to intercept the DTK at up to a 45° angle if coupled to the aircraft. NOTE: The d function may also be used to initiate a PseudoVORTAC. Following the Direct To entry using the d Key the display automatically advances to NAVIGATION Page 1. Manually position the cursor over DTK field and continue as described above in Steps 5 and 6. To exit Pseudo-VORTAC Mode make any leg change (e.g. d Key press and enter current TO waypoint). When exiting Pseudo-VORTAC the system may return to the -AUTO- Leg Change Mode unless the system was in -MAN- prior to initiating Pseudo-VORTAC. A manual leg change means the system will not automatically sequence to the next waypoint on the active flight plan. To sequence to the next waypoint in the flight plan, use the Direct To function or place the cursor over -MAN-. Press the BACK Key and AUTO? will be displayed. Press the ENTER Key and the system will return to the automatic leg change mode.

3-56

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

Rev. 0 Dec/96

System Operation
USING HEADING VECTOR
This procedure enables the pilot to program and fly a specific heading vector as well as program an automatic intercept to a specified leg while remaining in FMS (LNAV) mode. PROGRAMMING A HEADING VECTOR 1. HDG Key - DEPRESS to display HEADING VECTOR Page with cursor over the HDG field. 2. Heading - INSERT desired Heading in whole degrees, preceded by R or L, if applicable, to indicate a turn direction. (Figure 3-96)
<

HEADING VECTOR 1/1 HDG 205

CANCEL TO LFK ENTER HDG DTK 197

Figure 3-96
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
< < <

NOTE: R or L should be used for a heading change greater than 180° from the present heading. A T in the HDG and DTK fields indicates the system is operating in the true heading mode.
3. ENTER Key DEPRESS. The cursor advances to Heading Mode field. (Figure 3-97) ENTER Key - DEPRESS to select Heading Select Mode and return to NAVIGATION Page 1.

HDG

205

HDG SELECT ? TO LFK DTK 197
>

Figure 3-97
NAVIGATION 1/4 FR PAXTO 19:07 TO LFK 19:21 < HDG SELECT 205 DIS 21.9 ETE 00:05.3 DTK 197 GS 216 WIND 158/ 10 -AUTO<

4.

NOTE: HDG SELECT and the programmed heading are displayed on NAVIGATION Page 1 indicating the aircraft is in Heading Select Mode. (Figure 3-98)

> >

Figure 3-98

Rev. 2 Aug/00

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

3-57

System Operation
CHANGING HEADING VECTOR WHILE IN HEADING SELECT MODE 1. 2. 3. HDG Key - DEPRESS to display HEADING VECTOR Page with cursor over the HDG field. Heading - INSERT desired Heading. ENTER Key - DEPRESS.

NOTE: Cursor moves to the Heading Mode field, but it is not necessary to depress ENTER Key because the system is already in heading select mode..
4. NAV or ENTER Key - DEPRESS to check heading and return to NAVIGATION Page 1.

CHANGING TO WAYPOINT WHILE IN HEADING SELECT MODE

NOTE: This procedure establishes a leg between the new TO Waypoint and the waypoint preceding it on the Active Flight Plan or a Pseudo-VORTAC. If crosstrack distance exceeds 125nm, the HEADING Mode will be canceled and the STRG INVALID message will be displayed.
1. HDG Key - DEPRESS to display HEADING VECTOR Page. 2. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over TO Waypoint. (Figure 3-99) 3. BACK Key - DEPRESS to cycle through waypoints on the Active Flight Plan or INSERT alternate waypoint. 4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. If Waypoint Page Appears: a. Waypoint Page Coordinates - VERIFY or INSERT. b. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. Cursor moves to DTK field. 5. Desired Track (DTK) - VERIFY or INSERT.
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
< < <

HDG

205

HDG SELECT TO LFK DTK 197
>

Figure 3-99

3-58

GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System

Rev. 2 Aug/00

DEPRESS to cancel Heading Vector and return to NAVIGATION Page 1. which immediately cancels the commanded heading or perform the following: 1. or far-side of the TO waypoint. preceded by R or L. NOTE: The system may turn the aircraft to intercept the current TO/FROM leg at up to a 45° angle.DEPRESS to select TO Waypoint and return to NAVIGATION Page 1. BACK Key . HDG Key . (Figure 3-100) 7. Rev. the Leg Change Mode displayed on NAVIGATION Page 1 switches to -MAN-. 3. NOTE: R or L should be used for a heading change greater than 180° from the present heading. Heading . PROGRAMMING AN INTERCEPT 1. ENTER Key . ENTER Key .DEPRESS until CANCEL? is displayed. HDG Key . 2. CANCELING HEADING SELECT MODE Initiate a DIRECT TO procedure.DEPRESS to display HEADING VECTOR Page with cursor over the HDG field. The cursor may be positioned over the Leg Change Mode field.DEPRESS to position the cursor over HDG SELECT. Line Select Key .is appropriate. 2.or -AUTO.DEPRESS to display HEADING VECTOR Page. 4. If the DTK entry positions the aircraft on the FROM. OK? ENTER message appears. otherwise it remains in -AUTO-. to indicate a turn direction. using the d and ENTER Keys. a Pseudo-VORTAC is programmed. A T indicates the system is operating in the true heading mode. HEADING VECTOR 1/1 <HDG < < 205 HDG SELECT TO IAH OK? ENTER DTK 193 > Figure 3-100 NOTE: If the Desired Track is changed. ENTER Key .INSERT desired Heading in whole degrees. if applicable. The pilot must determine if -MAN. 2 Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-59 .System Operation 6.DEPRESS.

DEPRESS to select INTERCEPT? (Figure 3-101) ENTER Key .VERIFY or INSERT.DEPRESS. ENTER Key . BACK Key . The cursor advances to Heading Mode field. Figure 3-101 HEADING VECTOR 1/1 < HDG < < 205 HDG SELECT TO IAH DTK 193 > 7. a default DTK will be displayed based on the point at which the ARC will be intercepted and DTK is not selectable. Cursor moves to the TO Waypoint field.DEPRESS.VERIFY or INSERT. NOTE: If the Desired Track is changed.or -AUTO.System Operation 3. 3-60 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. 8. NOTE: If a DME Arc endpoint is selected as the TO waypoint. Cursor moves to DTK field. to cycle through waypoints on the Active Flight Plan or INSERT an alternate waypoint. the Leg Change Mode on NAV page 1 switches to -MAN-. if required. side of the TO waypoint. ENTER Key . (Figure 3102) ENTER Key .DEPRESS. Figure 3-102 b. If the DTK entry positions the aircraft on the FROM.is appropriate. Desired Track (DTK) .DEPRESS. < < INTERCEPT ? TO LFK DTK 197 > 5. The pilot must determine if -MAN. If Waypoint Page Appears: a. 2 Aug/00 . < HEADING VECTOR 1/1 HDG 205 4. or far. a Pseudo-VORTAC is programmed. otherwise it remains in -AUTO-. BACK Key .DEPRESS. 6. Waypoint Page Coordinates .

or INTERCEPT BEYOND FIX (Figure 3-103). use the Line Select Key to remove the cursor from the page. 2 Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-61 . An Intercept Message may appear (NO COURSE INTERCEPT. Once the selected heading has been established. The cursor is positioned over the Leg Change Mode if the DTK has been entered manually on the Heading Page. If no message appears the intercept will occur on the TO side of the selected TO waypoint. If NO COURSE INTERCEPT or NO ARC INTERCEPT occurs. In order to view one of these messages on the HDG Page after the initial entries have been made. DRK DTK 125 > OK? ENTER Figure 3-104 Rev.DEPRESS to accept data and return to NAV page 1. Type in the assigned heading. NO ARC INTERCEPT.System Operation 9. the message light will illuminate and these messages will be displayed on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page. HEADING VECTOR 1/1 < HDG <\ < TO 205 2. NOTE: BUSY . ENTER Key . 10. PROGRAMMING A HEADING INTERCEPT TO THE FINAL APPROACH COURSE This procedure non-precision approach may be accomplished using the following steps: 1. The cursor moves to the heading mode field.STANDBY may be displayed in yellow momentarily while the intercept is calculated. HEADING VECTOR 1/1 < HDG < < 205 INTERCEPT\ TO IAH DTK 193 INTERCEPT BEYOND FIX OK? ENTER > The intercept messages are Figure 3-103 based on the current aircraft heading and track. the HEADING VECTOR Page may be viewed to determine the intercept status. 3.DEPRESS. ENTER Key .DEPRESS.DEPRESS to display the HEADING VECTOR Page. (Figure 3-104) ENTER Key . HDG .

DEPRESS.DEPRESS. INTERCEPT ? FAF TO DRK DTK 125 < OK? ENTER > 6. the FAF. BACK Key .System Operation 4.DEPRESS Twice to return to Navigation Page 1. The cursor moves to the TO field. NAVIGATION Page 1 will be displayed with the TO waypoint. and waypoint previous to the FAF in the FR field if no manual DTK was entered. ENTER Key . 8. The system will now intercept the Final Approach course and sequence to the MAP. go to the DIRECT TO Page after completing the entries and the cursor will be over the FAF waypoint if the correct identifier has been selected. HEADING VECTOR 1/1 < HDG < 205 5.DEPRESS to display the INTERCEPT? prompt. 7. (Figure 3-105) ENTER Key . 2 Aug/00 . ENTER Key . This will cause PSEUDO VORTAC to be displayed on NAV Page 1. NOTE: If an intercept is programmed to a FAF that is part of a Procedure Turn the DTK must be manually entered.DEPRESS until the FAF waypoint is displayed. 9. BACK Key . 3-62 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. Figure 3-105 NOTE: If more than one identifier exists on the FPL that is the same identifier as the FAF. Enter the inbound final approach course in the DTK field if required.

1. NOTE: No HP can be programmed at an ARC end point on the final Approach course manually. or d Key .DEPRESS to display HOLDING PATTERN Page with cursor over the INBOUND CRS field. NOTE: If WPT is a duplicate WPT the country code will be displayed in this field in parenthesis (in green) (Figure 3-106) 3. Line Select Key .DEPRESS to position the cursor over desired waypoint. An HP is automatically programmed from the database when it is part of an Arrival or Approach procedure. NOTE: On NAVIGATION Pages.System Operation PROGRAMMING A HOLDING PATTERN WARNING: When entering PTs or HP airspace at high speeds the FMS may not constrain the airplane from violating maneuvering airspace. (Figure 3-106) 4. When an inserted Inbound Course value is beyond the DIRECT ENTRY parameters. This procedure enables the pilot to program a Holding Pattern (HP) at a specific waypoint. NAV.2) MANUAL > > > > NOTE: A verified Inbound Course programs a DIRECT ENTRY procedure. and on the Active Flight Plan Page. a Holding Pattern cannot be programmed at the FR or TO Waypoint. HOLD Key . 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-63 .0 (3.VERIFY or INSERT. INBOUND CRS . FPL. only the TO Waypoint can be selected. If a Direct TO Leg is displayed on the NAV pages the inbound course defaults to the leg between the aircraft’s present position and the current TO waypoint. Pilots are responsible for procedural compliance. then a TEARDROP or PARALLEL pattern is programmed. Rev. 2. The sysFigure 3-106 tem Defaults to the inbound course between the previous WPT on the FPL and the waypoint at which the hold is desired. HOLDING PATTERN AT CAP (USA) INBOUND CRS MAX HOLDING TAS TURN DIR LEG TIME LEG DIS EXIT MODE 1/1 013 259 RIGHT 1.DEPRESS to display applicable page.

5. Figure 3-107 Optional Entry: Turn Direction 8.0 LEG DIS (3. ENTER Key . ENTER Key . the inbound course is displayed on NAVIGATION Page 1. Line Select Key . HOLDING PATTERN 1/1 AT TRM (USA) DIRECT ENTRY INBOUND CRS 013 MAX HOLDING TAS 259 TURN DIR RIGHT LEG TIME (1.2 EXIT MODE AUTO > > > > b. ENTER Key . If Holding Pattern is complete proceed to Step 11.DEPRESS to change direction.VERIFY or INSERT (valid range 1. continue with Steps 8. the leg time will be computed as indicated by parentheses and viceversa.9 min). Line Select Key . manually set the CDI needle to the inbound course so that the course needle sensing is correct. 7. or 10. b.0 to 9. If the CDI needle does not automatically slew to the inbound course. a. The type of entry is displayed.DEPRESS to position the cursor over LEG DIST. Cursor moves to the LEG TIME field. A T adjacent to the value displayed in the INBOUND CRS field indicates the course is referenced to true north.0nm to 50nm).DEPRESS to position the cursor over TURN DIR.2) EXIT MODE MANUAL > > > > 6. 0 Dec/96 .System Operation When a Holding Procedure is initiated.DEPRESS. NOTE: When the leg distance is entered. BACK Key . 9. Optional Entry: Leg Distance 9.DEPRESS.DEPRESS. (Figure 3-108) Figure 3-108 3-64 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. (Figure 3-107) LEG TIME . a. Leg Distance INSERT or VERIFY (valid range 1. HOLDING PATTERN 1/1 AT TRM (USA) DIRECT ENTRY INBOUND CRS 013 MAX HOLDING TAS 259 TURN DIR RIGHT LEG TIME 1.0) LEG DIS 3. If Optional Entries are required.

EDITING. DIRECT TO. The aircraft must be proceeding to the waypoint in order for the system to enter the Hold. and on the Active Flight Plan. Line Select Key . or cancel a Holding Pattern at a specific waypoint. ENTER Key . FPL. OR CANCELING A HOLDING PATTERN This procedure enables the pilot to review. the system will not enter the Hold at the waypoint. or FPL Page. Selecting MANUAL will initiate a continuous hold.2) EXIT MODE MANUAL OK? ENTER > > > > Figure 3-109 NOTE: Once in the Holding Pattern. the exit mode is displayed on NAV Page 1. NOTE: If a Selected Cross Track (SXTK) has been entered.DEPRESS to display applicable page. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-65 . 12.System Operation Selecting Exit Mode: 10. REVIEWING.DEPRESS. It can be changed on NAV Page 1 as well as on the Holding Page.DEPRESS to position the cursor over desired HP waypoint. NOTE: On NAVIGATION Pages. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to position the cursor over MANUAL or AUTO. Press the BACK key to change exit mode option. OK? ENTER prompt will appear.DEPRESS to load the Holding Pattern at the selected waypoint and return to the NAVIGATION. edit. 11. REVIEWING 1. the TO Waypoint can only be reviewed. NAV. 2. only the TO Waypoint can be selected. or d Key . Rev.0 LEG DIS (3. Verify inputs. Selecting AUTO will exit the hold the next time the HP fix is crossed or after the entry procedure is completed. (Figure 3-109) HOLDING PATTERN 1/1 AT TRM (USA) DIRECT ENTRY INBOUND CRS 013 MAX HOLDING TAS 259 TURN DIR RIGHT LEG TIME 1. Line Select Key .

Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over desired field. BACK Key .System Operation 3.DEPRESS to display HOLDING PATTERN Page. 3-66 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.DEPRESS. HOLDING PATTERN 1/1 AT TRM (USA) DIRECT ENTRY INBOUND CRS 013 MAX HOLDING TAS TURN DIR RIGHT LEG TIME 1. EDITING Figure 3-110 5. or LEG DIST or b.0 LEG DIS (3. 0 Dec/96 . DIRECT TO. The OK? ENTER prompt will appear. Figure 3-111 NOTE: If canceling holding pattern at the current TO Waypoint.2) EXIT MODE MANUAL OK? ENTER CANCEL > > > > 4.DEPRESS. (Figure 3-111) ENTER Key .2) EXIT MODE MANUAL CANCEL ? > > > > 2. The HP annunciation is erased from NAVIGATION. 6. or FPL Page. DIRECT TO. ENTER Key . INSERT value for INBOUND CRS. a.REVIEW. HP or AT is replaced by “TO”. (Figure 3-110) Holding Pattern .DEPRESS to change TURN DIR or EXIT MODE.DEPRESS to return to the NAVIGATION. No XFILL capability is available to the other system in a dual system installation from one or both systems when a holding pattern is in progress. CANCELING 1.0 LEG DIS (3. 7. LEG TIME. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the CANCEL? prompt. and FPL Pages. HOLD Key . ENTER Key . HOLDING PATTERN 1/1 AT CAP (USA) DIRECT ENTRY INBOUND CRS 013 MAX HOLDING TAS 259 TURN DIR RIGHT LEG TIME 1. NOTE: A re-entry to the Holding Pattern must be flown if the Inbound Course or Turn Direction are changed while holding at the HP Waypoint.

(Figure 3-113) ENTER Key . EXITING HOLDING PATTERN NEXT TIME OVER HOLDING FIX 1.4 DIS 1.4 INBOUND CRS 299 GS 119 WIND 327/ 13 -AUTO< 4. (Figure 3-114) NAVIGATION 1/4 HOLD RIGHT MANUAL AT ORD 01:01 < EXIT HOLD 00:00.4 ETE 00:00. (Figure 3-112) BACK Key . 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-67 . > > NOTE: The next (NX) waypoint information may also appear if the exit is made during Waypoint Alert. 3.DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION Page 1. NAV Key .System Operation EXITING A HOLDING PATTERN This procedure gives the pilot three options to exit a Holding Pattern: exiting the next time over a holding fix. The NAVIGATION Page indicates that the aircraft will EXIT HOLD the next time over the holding fix (aircraft will complete the loop around the holding pattern).4 INBOUND CRS 299 GS 119 WIND 327/ 13 < > > Figure 3-114 Rev.4 DIS 1.4 INBOUND CRS 299 GS 119 WIND 327/ 13 < > > 2. 2 or 3.DEPRESS to display AUTO?.DEPRESS.4 DIS 1.4 ETE 00:00. Figure 3-112 NAVIGATION 1/4 HOLD RIGHT AUTO? AT ORD 01:01 < EXIT HOLD 00:00. Figure 3-113 NAVIGATION 1/4 HOLD RIGHT AUTO AT ORD 01:01 < EXIT HOLD 00:00. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over MANUAL.4 ETE 00:00. or performing a Leg Change. going Direct To the holding fix.

DIRECT KABE PSB < HP FNT HASTE < PMM KUBBS < OBK DBQ < FOD < 1/2 ONL CYS DBL DVC PGS HEC KVNY ***** > > > > > Figure 3-115 HOLDING PATTERN 1/1 AT FNT EXIT HOLD 00:00. (Figure 3115) 2. NAVIGATION 1/4 FR ----------AT FNT 15:22 < EXIT HOLD 00:02 DIS 7.5) EXIT MODE MANUAL CANCEL ? > > > > Figure 3-116 2.4 INBOUND CRS 299 GS 175 WIND 375/ 13 < > > Figure 3-117 3-68 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. ENTER Key .3 ETE 00:02.DEPRESS to display the NAVIGATION Page 1.DEPRESS to display HOLDING PATTERN Page with cursor over CANCEL?.0 LEG DIS (3.DEPRESS to display Direct To Page with cursor over current HP Waypoint.System Operation EXITING HOLDING PATTERN BY GOING DIRECT TO HOLDING FIX 1.4 INBOUND CRS 299 MAX HOLDING TAS 305 TURN DIR RIGHT LEG TIME 1. (Figure 3-116) 3. NAV Key . (Figure 3-117) FR Waypoint . Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over FROM field (HOLD RIGHT/ LEFT). EXITING HOLDING PATTERN BY PERFORMING A LEG CHANGE 1. 3. ENTER Key . 0 Dec/96 . d Key .INSERT desired waypoint.DEPRESS to go Direct To current TO Waypoint (Holding Fix) and cancel Holding Pattern.

insert the desired identifier.VERIFY.3 ETE 00:02.System Operation 4.4 INBOUND CRS 299 GS 175 WIND 375/ 13 < > > 5. Figure 3-118 Rev. To change the TO Waypoint. ENTER Key . (Figure 3118) TO Waypoint .DEPRESS to activate the new leg and cancel the Holding Pattern. ENTER Key . The next waypoint in the Active Flight Plan sequence will appear in the TO field. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-69 . NAVIGATION 1/4 FR HASTE -----TO PMM 15:22 < EXIT HOLD 00:02 DIS 7. 6.DEPRESS.

System Operation THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 3-70 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. 0 Dec/96 .

INSERT. Entering 210 will display FL210. is converted and displayed as flight level (FL). enter 80 and 8000 is displayed. 2. enter 120 and 12000 is displayed. (Figure 3-120) Only two or three digits are required to input an altitude.PREDEPARTURE SETTING CRUISE ALTITUDE. VNAV Key .DEPRESS to display VNAV Page 1. Rev. AND DEFAULT FLIGHT PATH ANGLE This procedure allows the pilot to define a Cruise Altitude and change the default values for Transition Level and Flight Path Angle. VNAV 1/4 DESCENT TO KSFO EST CROSSING REQUIRED FPM ACTUAL FPM DATA? 875 11 875 ---0 > > > Figure 3-119 VNAV DATA 1/1 CRUISE ALT TRANS LEVEL DEFAULT FPA PRESEL RANGE ETE ALT (NM) FL210 FL180 3. (Figure 3-119) 3.System Operation VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNAV) OPERATION .. ENTER Key . Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over DATA?. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-71 . i. enter 052 and 52 is displayed. TRANSITION LEVEL.e. An altitude less than 1000 feet must be entered with a preceding zero.0 FL210 --------> > > Any altitude value entered greater than the TRANS LEVEL. i. 4. Cruise Altitude . After Initial Leg Selection: 1. altitude value which normally Figure 3-120 defaults to FL180.DEPRESS to display VNAV DATA Page with cursor over the CRUISE ALT field.e.

DEPRESS.INSERT or VERIFY. If configured. (Figure 3-119) 9. 6. (Figure 3-121) VNAV DATA 1/1 CRUISE ALT FL210 TRANS LEVEL FL180 DEFAULT FPA 3.0 if pilot does not enter a value. 7. and though all Active Flight Plan waypoints are displayed on VNAV Pages. 5. Transition Level .System Operation NOTE: CRUISE ALT may also be inserted on VNAV Page 1.5 00:15. new waypoints must be added to the Active Flight Plan before they appear on the VNAV Flight Plan waypoint pages.INSERT or VERIFY (in degrees and tenths. 0 Dec/96 . Anytime a default FPA is entered. Default Flight Path Angle (DEFAULT FPA) .DEPRESS to return to VNAV Page 1. 3-72 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.0 range). Figure 3-121 8. the value will remain in non-volatile memory even after the system is shut down. ENTER Key . NOTE: Field defaults to 3. line 3 (adjacent to the TO waypoint field) when #TOC or #TOD are the TO waypoint. the value will remain in non-volatile memory even after the system is shut down. 0. A (at or above) or B (at or below) constraint entries are not applicable on this page. altitude preselector information will be displayed at the bottom of the screen. The cruise ALT may automatically be entered by the preselector if the preselector has the capability and the system is configured for digital preselector. Setting a cruise altitude will establish a #TOD (Top of Descent) waypoint or a #TOC (Top of Climb) waypoint if VNAV is valid. If the aircraft is in a climb or descent.6 > > > NOTE: Field defaults to FL180 if pilot does not enter a value. CREATING/CHANGING VNAV WAYPOINTS Vertical navigation constraints can only be programmed for waypoints on the Active Flight Plan. Anytime a TRANS ALT is entered.DEPRESS.1 to 6.0 PRESEL RANGE ETE ALT (NM) FL210 150. ENTER Key . A #TOC will be established only if there are no altitude constraints between the aircraft and #TOC and the aircraft is climbing. distance and ETA information to the preselected altitude will be displayed. ENTER Key .

enter 30A Figure 3-122 and 3000A is displayed. Any altitude entered greater than the transition level is converted and displayed as flight level (FL). or d Key . a. i. Altitudes less 1000 feet enter a preceding zero. ENTER Key .System Operation After initial leg selection on NAV page 1: 1. appropriate altitude constraints will prefill from the database. Cursor moves to OFFSET field. INSERT value in nautical miles (-99 to +99 range). If the offset is prior to the waypoint. (Figure 3-122) VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1 WAYPOINT MENLO ALT ----EST CROSSING ----OFFSET --REQ FPM ----FPA --- > > 4.INSERT altitude constraint followed by A (at or above) or B (at or DIRECT FPA ----below). STAR or Approach procedure. NOTE: If the waypoint is part of a SID.If applicable. ( Figure 3-123) 3. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-73 .DEPRESS to display applicable page. enter 054 and 54 feet is displayed. if applicable. OFFSET .e. FPL. ALT . Full digit entry may be used to enter an altitude.0 > > > Figure 3-123 Rev. Direct FPA information pages will be displayed on the last line of the screen. NOTE: On NAVIGATION Pages. only the TO Waypoint can be selected. enter the range value and a (-) prefills as a default or VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1 WAYPOINT MENLO ALT 3000A EST CROSSING 3000 OFFSET --REQ FPM ----FPA (DEF) DN --DIRECT FPA UP 0. or Direct pages.DEPRESS to display VNAV WAYPOINT Page for selected waypoint. 2.e. i. If the waypoint is selected from either the NAV. Only two or three digits are required to input an altitude.DEPRESS to position cursor over desired waypoint. 5.DEPRESS. Line Select Key . NAV. VNAV Key . (Figure 3-123) 6.

If Figure 3-124 accessed from the NAV or d Page. INSERT 0 and press ENTER Key. If an FPA is manually entered.System Operation b. c. The field changes to dashes. NOTE: A climb FPA cannot be programmed but the direct FPA field will display the up angle between the aircraft’s present altitude and the altitude constraint that was entered. (Figure 3-124) VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1 WAYPOINT MENLO ALT 3000 EST CROSSING 2900 OFFSET --REQ FPM ----FPA (DEF) DN 3.0). indicating no offset is programmed. ENTER Key . the vertical deviation output is invalid and no vertical deviation information will be displayed on the CDU or the ADI/HSI. 7.0 that was programmed on the VNAV DATA Page. Flight Path Angle (FPA) INSERT or VERIFY (valid range is 0. Enter a (+). indicating no FPA is programmed. To program a Path Descent 8.0 > > NOTE: If this waypoint was > accessed from the FPL Page the FPA value field prefills with the default (DEF) value DIRECT FPA DN 0. the FPA type field changes to (MAN). The field changes to dashes. the FPA field prefills with the (DIR) value. If an FPA is programmed to a direct FPA up waypoint it will be a DN (descent) FPA and an ambiguity will be displayed on the VNAV waypoint page. To erase the offset value. 0 Dec/96 . Depressing the BACK Key will cycle through all or some of the following: • (DEF) • (DB) • (AUTO) • (DIR) • (MAN) To cancel the FPA.DEPRESS. The cursor moves to the FPA field only if the entered constraint is below the aircraft’s present altitude. then the range value to indicate the offset is beyond the waypoint. INSERT 0 and press ENTER Key. 3-74 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.1 to 6. With the cursor over the FPA value.

Line Select Key .System Operation 9. ALT .REVIEW. No altitudes are loaded from the database when an approach procedure contains a Procedure Turn. 3 Oct/02 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-75 .0 DIRECT FPA DN 1.DEPRESS. REVIEWING VNAV WAYPOINTS When SIDs.DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired waypoint.DEPRESS to display the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page. No altitude will be loaded at the MAP if the approach is a circling approach. ENTER Key . ENTER Key .DEPRESS until display returns to ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page or depress the FPL Key. a G appears next to the altitude constraint indicating a Glide Path and vertical deviation guidance and information will be available. Using Active Flight Plan Page 1. as part of ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN or VNAV Pages. VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1 WAYPOINT JOICE ALT 3000 EST CROSSING 3000 OFFSET --REQ FPM DN 1250 FPA (AUTO) DN 3. VNAV Key .DEPRESS to load or verify the FPA value. 3. or the MAP is abeam or beyond the runway threshold. The system will not load any “expect to cross” altitudes from the database on to the SIDS or STARS. STARs or Approaches have altitude constraints at waypoints on the procedure. the system has automatically programmed a waypoint-to-waypoint FPA for the procedure. 2. The VNAV WAYPOINT Page appears with the cursor over the ALT field. FPL Key . (Figure 3-125) 4. NOTE: If (AUTO) FPA is displayed. NOTE: The system will not fly a full SID or STAR procedure.3 > > > Figure 3-125 5. Rev. NOTE: When a descent FPA is programmed at a waypoint. the system automatically loads the altitude constraints from the database on to the Active Flight Plan.

The VNAV WAYPOINT Page appears with the cursor over the ALT field. ENTER Key . or sequencing to the next waypoint on the active flight plan. Using VNAV Flight Plan Waypoints Page 1.DEPRESS to display the VNAV FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINTS Pages. the appropriate value of vertical deviation will again be displayed. 3.1 DIRECT FPA DN 0. non-continuous data from an air data computer. vertical speed change of more than 40ft/sec.REVIEW or INSERT new value. ALT .DEPRESS to return to the VNAV FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINTS Page. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 to review VNAV waypoint data at remaining waypoints. 0 Dec/96 . (Figure 3-126) 5. When vertical deviation returns to a valid state. 3-76 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. Line Select Key . 6. ENTER Key .ENROUTE PROGRAMMING VERTICAL PATH DESCENTS The pilot can use various methods to load a Flight Path Angle (FPA) and determine the aircraft’s descent path.DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired waypoint. NOTE: When the system detects a rapid change of baro altitude setting. the vertical deviation output is momentarily set Invalid. (Figure 3-126) 4.System Operation 6. VNAV Key . (DB) appears in the FPA type field. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 to review or change altitude constraints at remaining waypoints. NOTE: If the FPA was retrieved from the database.DEPRESS. VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1 WAYPOINT RW30L ALT 633 EST CROSSING 633 OFFSET --REQ FPM DN 1450 FPA (DB) DN 3. 2.9 > > > Figure 3-126 VERTICAL NAVIGATION .

When the ENTER Key is depressed the FPA is loaded. The FPA field on the VNAV WAYPOINT Page displays (DB).0 DIRECT FPA DN 1. (Figure 3-127) VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1 WAYPOINT CIVET ALT 14000A FL180B EST CROSSING FL230 OFFSET --REQ FPM DN 450 FPA (DEF) DN 3. The FPA field displays (DEF) and Vertical Deviation is provided at the programmed angle when the waypoint becomes the Vertical TO Waypoint. which indicates an FPA from the database is loaded and Vertical Deviation is provided at the programmed angle when the waypoint becomes the Vertical TO Waypoint.System Operation Using Database (DB) FPA The GNS-X C129 database contains Flight Path Angles associated with waypoints on SIDs. except if the FPA comes from the database or the VNAV WAYPOINT Page was accessed using a Direct To function. the FPA field indicates (MAN) and Vertical Deviation is provided at the programmed angle when the waypoint becomes the Vertical TO Waypoint. The pilot can load the Default FPA (set on the VNAV DATA Page) by pressing the ENTER Key when the cursor is on the FPA field of the VNAV WAYPOINT Page. If the FPA at the (DB) VNAV waypoint is changed in any way.0 degrees. 0. Rev. that prefill when these procedures are programmed into the Active Flight Plan.1 to 6. and Approaches. the (DB) FPA will no longer be available. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-77 . Using Default ( DEF) FPA The default FPA value will automatically be displayed if an altitude is programmed on the VNAV WAYPOINT Page. STARs.3 > > > Figure 3-127 Using Manual (MAN) FPA The pilot can type in a desired Flight Path Angle on the VNAV WAYPOINT Page within the valid range.

If the waypoint prior to the selected (AUTO) FPA waypoint has a Cross-AT-or-ABOVE. 3-78 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. 0 Dec/96 .System Operation Using Automatic (AUTO) FPA The (AUTO) mode is provided to link together descent waypoints that have Cross-At type constraints and provide a computed Flight Path Angle between them. All Cross-AT waypoints that are a part of a STAR or APPROACH are automatically put into (AUTO) mode when the procedure is retrieved from the database and loaded onto the Active Flight Plan. An altitude constraint and FPA must be loaded on the VNAV Waypoint Page using the ENTER Key to establish a Path Descent and activate Vertical Deviation to any waypoint except a (DB) WPT. the system uses the (DEF) FPA to the first waypoint on the flight plan with an altitude constraint to establish a #TOD point. To help establish #TOD. Vertical Deviation is provided at the programmed angle when the waypoint becomes the Descent Reference Waypoint. an automatic angle is assigned and will be the same angle as the programmed Default Angle on VNAV DATA Page. (Figure 3128) WPT1 10000 DESCENT PATH WPT2 5000 (AUTO) AUTOMATIC ANGLE The (AUTO) mode may be selected ONLY if the choFigure 3-128 sen waypoint has a CrossAT type constraint programmed. the (AUTO) FPA is the same as the (DEF) FPA. Unless an FPA is programmed at a waypoint. NOTE: If no ALT constraints are programmed before the selected (AUTO) FPA waypoint. provided the flight plan was not obtained from AFIS. Cross-AT-or-BELOW. the system will automatically load the destination airport elevation on the flight plan. or Cross-BETWEEN constraint programmed.

or OFFSET. A.2 . G. Using the VNAV FPL WAYPOINT Pages.e. All parameters associated Figure 3-129 with the former constraint will remain unchanged. VNAV page. OPTION 2. VNAV Key .4 straint may be changed ETE 01:13.DEPRESS.3 8754 10000A 13000A 15000A ------------ERASE > > > > Figure 3-130 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-79 . One of the three following options may be used: OPTION 1: Using the VNAV Page. (Figure 3-129) 2. ENTER Key . VNAV 2/2 < > NOTE: More VNAV Pages will be available if the active flight plan has several pages of waypoints. Option 1: Using VNAV Page 1.DEPRESS VNAV 1/2 to display VNAV 1/2 CLIMB 5566 Page. B. > > > Option 2: Using VNAV FPL WAYPOINT Pages 1. i. 2. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired waypoint and key in the desired altitude. OPTION 3: Using the VNAV WAYPOINT Page.. referred to as VNAV FPL Waypoint Pages. VNAV Key .5 on this page if the current TO waypoint has a ACTUAL FPM UP 400 constraint programmed. Type the new altitude in CLIMB GRAD 97 /NM the altitude field adjacent DATA to the TO WPT.DEPRESS to display the VNAV 2/2 Page (or greater) to find the appropriate waypoint. FPA.System Operation EDITING ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS The following pages allow the pilot to edit altitude constraints for waypoints on the VNAV WAYPOINT Page. The altitude conTO CIVET FL350 RANGE (NM) 300. 0 Dec/96 CLIMB LAX KEGGS COOP < DAG CLARR < LAS RENTT < < -10 . (Figure 3-130) Rev.

e. NOTE: If the waypoint is part of a SID. “Cross-Between two Altitudes” type constraints.3 > > > 4.INSERT new altitude constraint followed. Option 3: Using the VNAV WAYPOINT Page 1.3 1.DEPRESS to display VNAV WAYPOINT Page for selected waypoint. 4. An altitude less than 1000 feet must be entered with a preceding zero. 3-80 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.DEPRESS to position cursor over desired waypoint. ENTER Key . The cursor moves to the FPA field. entering an altitude in this manner will not provide vertical deviation or vertical guidance on the HSI. the altitude constraint prefills from database. Altitude Constraint . 5. VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1 WAYPOINT CIVET ALT 14000A EST CROSSING OFFSET REQ FPM FPA (DEF) DIRECT FPA FL180B FL230 0 --DN 450 DN 3. FPL. An altitude less than 1000 feet must be entered with a preceding zero. NOTE: On NAVIGATION Pages. cannot be programmed manually. i. ENTER Key . rounded off to the nearest hundred feet). by A (at or above) or B (at or below). if applicable. enter 30A and 3000A is displayed. 2. 3. only the TO Waypoint can be selected. Line Select Key . NAV. STAR or Approach procedure.0 3. Any altitude value entered greater than the Transition Level value on the data page is converted and displayed as FL (flight level. by A (at or above) or B (at or below). ENTER Key . as shown in Figure 3-130.DEPRESS. 3. VNAV Key . 0 Dec/96 . Cursor moves to OFFSET field.System Operation NOTE: Unless an FPA was previously programmed at an altitude in this field.DEPRESS. (Figure 3-131) ALT .DEPRESS. 6. if applicable.DEPRESS to display applicable page. Only two or three digits are required to input an altitude. Figure 3-131 Any altitude value entered greater than the Transition Level value on the data page is converted and displayed as flight level (FL).INSERT new altitude constraint followed. or d Key .0 DN UP 1.

CDU screen automatically advances to NAVIGATION Page 1.DEPRESS. The DIRECT Page will again be displayed with the cursor over the Offset Waypoint. 2.System Operation 7. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to return to the page where the VNAV waypoint was accessed. Verify data and DEPRESS ENTER. or NXT Key.DEPRESS to position the cursor over the TO waypoint field. go to Step 4. both vertically and laterally by means of a Vertical Path Descent. Press ENTER. the system first displays the OFFSET WPT Page. See DIRECT TO Random Waypoint. NOTE: If an offset waypoint was selected. NOTE: If the desired waypoint is not on the active FPL a fence (------) will be inserted after the waypoint that was entered. A DIRECT TO Page appears with the cursor over the current TO waypoint. DIRECT KSNA MUSEL HEMET TRM EED* TBC FMN PUB HLC 1/2 PWE LMN BURKK TO BDF GSH KDTW ***** > > > Figure 3-132 A Random Waypoint may also be used. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over desired waypoint. ENTER Key . If the current To waypoint is the desired VNAV Direct To waypoint. The display automatically advances to NAVIGATION Page 1. d Key . Review the FPL by pressing the d key. (Figure 3-132) < < < < < NOTE: Active Flight Plans containing more than 18 waypoints will display the remaining waypoints on subsequent pages. DIRECT TO .VNAV WAYPOINT AS LATERAL WAYPOINT This procedure enables the pilot to proceed Direct To a waypoint.DEPRESS. Press d key again. 3. to access remaining pages. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-81 . Line Select Key (on NAVIGATION Page 1) . Type in the desired waypoint and press ENTER or. 1. Rev.

3 049 228 230/ 8 > > 6.DEPRESS. 0 Dec/96 . the ALT constraint field prefills from the database. enter the range value and a (-) prefills as a default or VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1 WAYPOINT BDF ALT 12000 PLAN CROSSING FL290 OFFSET --REQ FPM DN 1200 FPA DN --DIRECT FPA DN 0. If an altitude constraint has already been programmed. ENTER Key . STAR or Approach procedure. 7. (Figure 3-135) NOTE: If the waypoint is part of a SID. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over TO Waypoint on NAVIGATION Page 1. enter a (+). Cursor moves to the FPA field. then the range value to indicate the offset is beyond the waypoint. (Figure 3-134) OFFSET . 9. NAVIGATION 1/4 DIRECT 23:03 TO BDF 05:22 < < > 5.2 > > > 8. Cursor moves to OFFSET field. INSERT 0 and press ENTER Key.INSERT or VERIFigure 3-133 FY. INSERT value in nautical miles (-99 to +99 range) a. ENTER Key DEPRESS.If applicable. NOTE: Cursor only moves to the FPA field if altitude constraint is below current baro altitude. (Figure 3-133) VNAV Key . ALT . DIS ETE DTK GS WIND -AUTO- 1328. You may proceed to Step 10.5 05:46. Flight Path Angle . The field changes to dashes.VERIFY Direct Flight Path Angle is desirable to fly. 10.System Operation 4. NOTE: To erase the offset value. the cursor will be displayed over the FPA (DIR) field value. indicating no offset is programmed. If the offset is prior to the waypoint. 3-82 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.DEPRESS to display the VNAV WAYPOINT Page for TO Waypoint. Figure 3-134 b.

VNAV Page 1 is displayed. Key . The VNAV Direct To function automatically deletes any intermediate altitude constraints DIRECT 1/2 and sets up a Path Descent > < KSNA PWE to the Vertical TO Waypoint MUSEL LMN > < using the Direct Flight Path HEMET BURKK Angle.0). VNAV Key .VNAV WAYPOINT This procedure allows the pilot to program a Direct To on the Vertical Flight Plan.DEPRESS.DEPRESS to accept waypoint entries. a Vertical DIRECT FPA DN Path Descent has been established. while still flying the lateral waypoints on the Active Flight Plan. the cursor will Figure 3-136 VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1 WAYPOINT BDF ALT PLAN CROSSING OFFSET REQ FPM DIRECT FPA ----14000 --DN 1100 ----> > > Figure 3-137 Rev. (Figure 3-135) VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1 WAYPOINT BDF ALT 12000 PLAN CROSSING FL290 OFFSET --REQ FPM DN 1200 FPA (DIR) DN 0. A DIRECT TO Page will appear with the cursor over the current TO waypoint.2 > > > 11. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over desired waypoint. and Vertical Deviation information Figure 3-135 and guidance is enabled if a descent has been programmed. DIRECT TO . If an altitude constraint has already been programmed. position cursor over ALT field (Figure 3-137). If necessary.DEPRESS. d EED* TBC FMN PUB HLC GSH KDTW ***** > 2. ENTER Key . TRM TO BDF < < < 1.System Operation NOTE: Direct Flight Path Angle prefills if it is within the valid range (0.2 0. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-83 .1 to 6. (Figure 3-136) 3. VNAV WAYPOINT Page appears.

(Figure 3-138) 9. Figure 3-138 a. ALT .System Operation appear over the FPA value field (Figure 3138). the system will automatically set cruise altitude to the pre-selected altitude which will then provide a #TOD prediction.0 range). 0 Dec/96 . enter the range value and a (-) prefills as a default or b. and #PRESL) are used to provide a prediction of the position of the aircraft on the vertical flight path.DEPRESS to accept waypoint entries and return to VNAV Page 1. OFFSET . #TOC will automatically appear as the Vertical To Waypoint when the aircraft laterally passes within 1 mile of the last vertical waypoint on the active flight plan that has a climb constraint. VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1 WAYPOINT BDF ALT 14000 PLAN CROSSING 14000 OFFSET --REQ FPM DN 1100 FPA (DIR) DN 2. INSERT value in nautical miles (-99 to +99 range). #TOD. These are non-enterable waypoints computed by the system based on current ground speed and vertical speed.INSERT or VERIFY. NOTE: Direct Flight Path Angle prefills if it is within the valid range and an ALT is programmed. 4. When the aircraft arrives at the preselected altitude. 6. then the range value to indicate the offset is beyond the waypoint 7. ENTER Key . Once the aircraft has crossed the final climb 3-84 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. Go to Step 8.VERIFY or INSERT (in degrees and tenths. ENTER Key .5 > > > 5.DEPRESS. 0. 8.If applicable. if available.5 DIRECT FPA DN 2. ENTER Key . If vertical climb constraints are programmed. Cursor moves to OFFSET field. Cursor moves to FPA field. enter a (+). Top of Climb (#TOC) Top of Climb Altitude is obtained from either the CRUISE ALT entered by the pilot on the VNAV DATA Page.1 to 6. CREATING VNAV PROFILE WAYPOINTS VNAV profile waypoints (#TOC.DEPRESS. If the offset is prior to the waypoint. Flight Path Angle . or from the Altitude Preselector setting.

The default FPA maybe used in this calculation.System Operation constraint waypoint. If there are no vertical constraints programmed for climb. 1775 12000 125. VNAV Key . This value may be above or below the altitude pre-select value.6 500 118/NM > > ACTUAL FPM UP 5. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the #TOC altitude field. #TOC will be displayed as the first vertical waypoint as long as the aircraft is in a climb. When the programmed cruise altitude is reached. (Figure 3-140) Repeat steps 2 thru 4 to return to previous #TOC altitude setting.DEPRESS to display VNAV Page 1.6 500 118/NM > > ACTUAL < CLIMB FPM UP GRAD > 3. but must be above the current baro altitude.DEPRESS and observe the change in RANGE and ETE. and #TOD becomes the Vertical To Waypoint. > CLIMB GRAD < DATA? Figure 3-140 Top of Descent (#TOD) The Top of Descent waypoint is the position where the aircraft intercepts the descent path at the cruise altitude. (Figure 3-139) Alternate Altitude INSERT. ENTER Key . 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-85 . if available. When #TOC is the TO Waypoint: The pilot may obtain range and ETE to any altitude above the aircraft during a climb.5 00:19. 1. 2. #TOC will then become the Vertical To Waypoint.5 00:19. then uses either the CRUISE ALT entered by the pilot on the VNAV DATA Page. #TOC is removed from the VNAV Flight Plan. DATA? Figure 3-139 VNAV 1/3 CLIMB TO #TOC < RANGE (NM) ETE < 4. or the Altitude Preselector setting. The system calculates the #TOD by establishing a valid Descent Reference Waypoint. VNAV 1/3 CLIMB TO #TOC < RANGE (NM) ETE < 1775 12000 80. Rev.

NOTE: The default FPA may be used to establish #TOD.e. i. If a programmed FPA violates a prior vertical constraint. Pre-Selected Altitude Intercept Point (#PRESL) When the system has an input from an Altitude Pre-selector and the aircraft is flying toward this altitude. the system issues the VNAV WPT ALERT message and the discrete waypoint light will flash for 10 seconds. Cross-At type altitude constraint. 0 Dec/96 . NOTE: With certain types of Pre-Selectors installed (analog). ETE and RANGE to #PRESL can be found on the VNAV DATA Page. never becomes the Vertical To Waypoint. using the Default FPA from the VNAV DATA Page. 3-86 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.System Operation If no Descent Reference Waypoint with FPA and crossing altitude is programmed. or #TOD at the current cruise altitude will be lost. but no Vertical Deviation Valid will occur until the FPA is actually loaded from the VNAV WPT Page. NOTE: Changing CRUISE ALT on the CDU to a lower altitude should only be done after the aircraft has departed cruise altitude. One minute prior to arriving at #TOD. however. it may be necessary to manually enter a CRUISE ALT when the PRESEL ALT is set higher than the cruise altitude. as illustrated in Figure 3-141. the pilot can program a Flight Path Angle or a Cross-At altitude constraint. Descent Reference Waypoints Descent Reference Waypoints have a fixed altitude crossing. the system will use the arrival airport and elevation (ARP Reference Point. To create a Descent Reference Waypoint. #PRESL. then go steady. not a runway) and the default FPA to fix Top of Descent as long as the active flight plan is not an AFIS flight plan. When the Pre-selector input is valid. a profile waypoint (#PRESL) appears on the VNAV Page. the system reassigns the Descent Reference Waypoint. The system does not read analog Pre-selector output until the aircraft’s baro is within approximately 1000ft of the pre-selected value.

FUELR remains the Descent Reference Waypoint.0 14000 PLAN CROSSING CIVET Descent Reference Wpt 14000A Programmed FPA 1.System Operation Cruise Altitude FL210 #TOD Vertical Constraint FL180B CIVET 16500 PLAN CROSSING 14000A Vertical Constraint Programmed FPA As shown.0 8000 FUELR Descent Reference Wpt 126 KLAX In this case. Because the programmed FPA allows for a vertical descent that meets the vertical constraints at CIVET. 3. the system reassigns CIVET at the Descent Reference Waypoint. since the programmed FPA at FUELR is too shallow to meet the vertical constraints at CIVET.0 8000 FUELR Descent Reference Wpt 126 KLAX Cruise Altitude FL210 #TOD FL180B Default FPA 3. FUELR is the Descent Reference Waypoint that establishes #TOD. using the default FPA to compute #TOD. Top of Descent and Descent Reference Waypoint Figure 3-141 Rev. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-87 .

System Operation THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 3-88 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. 0 Dec/96 .

80 > 3.DEPRESS.System Operation REMOTE TUNING TUNING COMMS This procedure enables the pilot to keyboard tune the aircraft radios via the CDU. ENTER Key . NOTE: (MAN) adjacent to Active Comm frequency indicates that the frequency has been entered using the COMM control head. No prompts are displayed when Active Comm frequency has been keyboard entered. The new frequency also displays as the ACTIVE frequency on the appropriate Comm control head. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-89 . The Comm Radio TUNE Page will be displayed.55 > 2.INSERT. Figure 3-142 NOTE: Trailing zeroes are not required. The entered PRESET frequency transfers to ACTIVE. -----118. Some control heads may require placement in the Remote Mode in order to accept tuning data from the CDU keyboard. Rev. Frequency . TUNE 1/3 COMM 1 ACTIVE (MAN) PRESET TRANSFER? COMM 2 ACTIVE PRESET -----132. TRANSFER? will automatically appear.DEPRESS.55 > 5. -----118. Line Select Key DEPRESS (if necessary) to position cursor over appropriate PRESET field. (Figure 3-143) ENTER Key . NOTE: If system is configured for 3 Comms the tune section will consist of 4 pages. 1. (Figure 3-142) TUNE 1/3 COMM 1 ACTIVE (MAN) PRESET COMM 2 ACTIVE PRESET -----132. TUNE Key .80 > Figure 3-143 NOTE: Keyboard tuned frequencies may display for a few seconds then go to dashes if the frequency read back from the radio or the control head is not available.DEPRESS. 4.

The new frequency is displayed immediately and is annunciated with (KEY) adjacent to the frequency field.20 35.20 35.0 035 > > Figure 3-145 TUNE 2/3 NAV 1 (KEY) FREQ RANGE BRG NAV 2 FREQ (MAN) PRESET BRG BLH 117.7 141 TNP 114.0 302 TNP 114. Station Identifier . Once located.20 35.INSERT or VERIFY entry. Each may be entered independently. If the identifier is not found immediately. (Figure 3144) 2. Depending on the system configuration the cursor can appear over the PRESET field for either COMM 1 or COMM 2.0 302 TNP 114.0 035 > Keyboard Method If Station Identifier Is Used: 1.System Operation The PRESET frequency displayed on the control head is not necessarily the PRESET frequency displayed on the CDU. 3.50 10. 0 Dec/96 3-90 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System .0 035 > > Figure 3-146 Rev.40 61. TUNING NAVs TUNE 2/3 NAV 1 FREQ (MAN) RANGE BRG NAV 2 FREQ (MAN) PRESET BRG PSP 115. TUNE Key -DEPRESS until NAV TUNE Page is displayed. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor opposite the desired radio: NAV 1 or NAV 2. ENTER Key . the identifier will be displayed and the (KEY) annunciation will shift to the identifier line. (Figure 3-146) > Figure 3-144 TUNE 2/3 NAV 1 FREQ (MAN) RANGE BRG NAV 2 FREQ (MAN) PRESET BRG BLH 115. the IDENT field will go to dashes until the station is located in the database.DEPRESS. (Figure 3-145) 4.50 10.

If the navaid is unusable. or a frequency conflict exists. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-91 . 5.50 10. 3. dashes will be displayed in the IDENT field and the new frequency will be displayed. The VPU will only use VOR/DME or DME only navaids (includes TACAN and ILS) therefore.VERIFY that the ACTIVE frequency on the control head and CDU displays agree. Frequency . Frequency .DEPRESS. entering the VOR identifier will result in the database replacing the VOR identifier with the “usable” DME identifier. only VOR/DME or DME only navaids will be displayed.DEPRESS to position cursor over desired FREQ field. out of range. 2.VERIFY that control head display is tuned to the desired frequency. In areas where a VOR only and a DME only are on the same frequency and within line of sight of the aircraft. Line Select Key . If found it is paired with the nearest usable Navaid identifier associated with that frequency.20 35. When the CDU keyboard is used to tune a navaid. that is.0 035 > NOTE: Trailing zeroes are not required.INSERT or VERIFY.0 302 TNP 114. 5. 4. the local VPU database is searched for the tuned frequency.System Operation NOTE: NAV tuning is designed to enhance the VPU (VORTAC Position Unit). If the station identifier tuning method is used to tune the radio. If Station Frequency is Used: 1. ENTER Key . TUNE Key -DEPRESS until NAV TUNE Page is displayed. (Figure 3-147) TUNE 2/3 NAV 1 FREQ (MAN) RANGE BRG NAV 2 FREQ (MAN) PRESET BRG BLH 115. This ambiguity will occur when the frequency rather than the identifier is entered. > Figure 3-147 Rev. Frequency . the RANGE and BRG displays remain associated with the VOR even though it is no longer displayed. the identifier ultimately paired with the tuned frequency may differ from the identifier originally entered. When this occurs.

20 35. (Figure 3-148) 6.0 035 > > Figure 3-148 NOTE: (MAN) adjacent to the FREQ field indicates that the frequency has been entered manually from the NAV control head.DEPRESS.50 10. TUNE 2/3 NAV 1 (KEY) FREQ RANGE BRG NAV 2 FREQ (MAN) PRESET BRG PSP 115.DEPRESS to display the NAV TUNE Page. Manual Control Head Tuning.50 10. > Figure 3-150 Rev.20 35.0 302 TNP 114. 0 Dec/96 3-92 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System . Line Select Key DEPRESS to place cursor over IDENT or FREQ field of NAV 1 or 2. RANGE and BRG CHECK. AUTO? is displayed in place of (KEY) or (MAN). Auto Tune Method Certain control heads will require placement in the Remote Mode at the control head in order to recognize the tuning data from the GNSX C129.50 10. (Figure 3-150) TUNE 2/3 NAV 1 (KEY) FREQ RANGE BRG NAV 2 FREQ (MAN) PRESET BRG PSP 115. DME HOLD.System Operation When the station is located in the VPU database the identifier will be displayed and the (KEY) annunciation will shift to the identifier line. 1. Figure 3-149 TUNE 2/3 NAV 1 AUTO? FREQ RANGE BRG NAV 2 FREQ (MAN) PRESET BRG PSP 115.20 35.0 035 > 3.0 302 TNP 114.0 035 > > 2. Only NAV/DME radios may be placed in the AUTO TUNE mode. Keyboard Tuning or use of the AUTO/MAN Switch will take the GNS-X C129 out of the Auto/Tune Mode.0 302 TNP 114. TUNE Key . (Figure 3-149) BACK Key .

0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-93 .20 35.80 74.DEPRESS to display the page with XPDR and ADF. 5. (Figure 3-152) Code or Frequency INSERT and verify new value. TUNE Key . Figure 3-152 TUNE 3/3 XPDR (MAN) ----> > ADF (MAN) 300. RANGE and BRG . (Figure 3-151) TUNE 2/3 NAV 1 FREQ RANGE BRG NAV 2 FREQ (MAN) PRESET BRG MZB 117.0 > Figure 3-153 Rev. TRANSPONDER AND ADF KEYBOARD TUNE 1. ENTER Key DEPRESS to place system in AUTO TUNE Mode. ADF (MAN) ----- > 3. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired code or frequency field. After a brief pause the CDU and control head information will change to reflect the Identifier chosen by the system.CHECK that the FREQ of the control head and CDU display agree and that range and bearing are reasonable.(Figure 3-153) TUNE 3/3 XPDR (MAN) ----> > 2. Figure 3-151 FREQ.System Operation 4.0 035 > > NOTE: No prompt is displayed adjacent to the IDENT field when system is in AUTO TUNE mode.9 204 TNP 114.

0 Dec/96 . NOTE: (MAN) adjacent to ADF or XPDR indicates that the frequency or code has been entered manually from the control head.System Operation 4. ENTER Key .DEPRESS. (MAN) field disappears indicating radios have been keyboard tuned. 3-94 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. Verify the code or frequency changes on CDU and control head displays.

(Figure 3-154) 3. ENTER Key . Fuel Flow . FUEL PLANNING 1. RESERVE.DEPRESS. and FLOW values will flash. NOTE: REMAINING and RESERVE quantities are stored in nonvolatile memory after system shutdown. AUTO? is displayed. Upon system turn-on. in order for HOURS field to display information. VERIFY INPUTS is displayed and REMAINING. 6. and FLOW fields blink indicating verification or update is required. 2. 8. When the LAST INPUT field exceeds 15 minutes.INSERT or VERIFY. 4. Rev. 7. These examples show the maximum number of pages available. All flashing fields must be verified or values inserted using the ENTER Key. RESERVE. PLAN 1/8 FUEL STATUS REMAINING RESERVE FLOW HOURS RANGE NM/LB LB 5000 1000 0 ------------> > > Figure 3-154 NOTE: No fuel flow entry is required in the Automatic Fuel Flow mode. (MAN) will be displayed adjacent to the FLOW field.VERIFY or INSERT.System Operation PLANNING PROCEDURES NOTE: The number of PLAN pages (which can vary from 6 to 8) is dynamically allocated deprending on system configuration and whether FDE has been calculated. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-95 .DEPRESS.DEPRESS. REMAINING. Fuel Quantity Remaining . If a manual fuel flow is entered the VERIFY INPUTS message changes to LAST INPUT: and sets the time at :00 minutes.VERIFY or INSERT. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over REMAINING field. NOTE: Auto fuel flow can be reselected by positioning the cursor over the manual fuel flow and depressing the BACK Key. RESERVE and FLOW must be manually verified. the REMAINING. The current auto fuel flow is displayed in the cursor. Fuel Reserve . ENTER Key . ENTER Key . RANGE and NM/LB fields will display information when a valid ground speed is recognized. PLAN Key . 5.DEPRESS to display FUEL STATUS Page.

Verifying inputs is required. ENTER Key RANGE 1341 DEPRESS. To change the unit of measurement (LB or KG): a. All fuel figures are recalculated to reflect the new units of measurement. The units NM/LB 0. DIRECT TO legs. the new TO waypoint will not be displayed here unless you exit then return to this page.335 field on the title line and specific range line Figure 3-155 will change. LB? 5000 1000 1200 00:05 03+19 > > > c.DEPRESS to position the cursor over the REMAINING field. When going from Manual to Automatic Fuel Flow Mode the REMAINING. RESERVE and FLOW fields will blink. Line Select Key . 0 Dec/96 . Repeat Steps 2 through 7.DEPRESS to display TRIP PLAN Page.) 1. When the TRIP PLAN Page displayed during a leg change on the active FPL. TRIP PLANNING The TRIP PLAN Page provides the capability to calculate information for Active or Stored Flight Plans. unless the RESERVE fuel is “0”. The field will display LB? or KG? to notify the pilot of the pending change. DEPRESS the Line Select Key above to position the cursor over the unit field (LB or KG). not “0” fuel. BACK Key DEPRESS. (The TO field on the TRIP PLAN Page is not dynamic. PLAN Key . (Figure 3155) PLAN 1/8 FUEL STATUS REMAINING RESERVE FLOW LAST INPUT: HOURS b. 3-96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. NOTE: HOURS of fuel and RANGE are calculated to the RESERVE fuel. or Random legs without affecting any of the system’s navigation functions.System Operation Depressing ENTER Key will select the auto fuel flow.

2 FPL 1242/03+03 ETA @KHPN 04:00 RAIM @KHPN AVAIL < Figure 3-156 PLAN 2/8 TRIP PLAN 6 DIRECT KDAL < TO LIT KHPN GS 407 DIS/DTK -----/--ETE -----FPL -----/----> > NOTE: If a Flight Plan number is left in the TRIP PLAN field and not returned to “A”. PLAN 2/8 TRIP PLAN A DIRECT KDAL < TO LIT KHPN GS 407 DIS/DTK 258. Figure 3-157 PLAN 2/8 TRIP PLAN A DIRECT KDAL < TO LIT KHPN GS 407 DIS/DTK -----/--ETE -----FPL -----/----> > Figure 3-158 Rev. ENTER Key . Desired Flight Plan INSERT Flight Plan Number (Figure 3-157) or “A” for Active Flight Plan. Figures 3-156 and 3157 show how the screen appears when an Active FPL has been selected and the airplane is airborne. (Figure 3-156) 2. 3. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-97 . no updated Active Flight Plan information will be displayed.System Operation NOTE: Initially the TRIP PLAN Page will display the Active Flight Plan (if present). Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the TRIP PLAN field. 4.DEPRESS.1/060 ETE 00:38. (Figure 3-158). The initial leg displayed will be DIRECT TO the current TO waypoint on the active flight plan or the first TO waypoint on the flight plan selected.

(Figure 3-159) ENTER Key .1/060 ETE 00:38. the TRIP PLAN leg will automatically advance to display DIRECT TO the current NAVIGATION Page TO Waypoint each time the TRIP PLAN Page is accessed. Information between the remaining legs of the Flight Plan can be reviewed by pressing the ENTER Key for each subsequent leg.INSERT. Figure 3-159 PLAN 2/8 TRIP PLAN A DIRECT KDAL < TO LIT KHPN GS 407 DIS/DTK -----/--ETE -----FPL ------/------ > > Figure 3-160 PLAN 2/8 TRIP PLAN 6 FR KDAL KDAL < TO LIT KHPN GS 407 DIS/DTK 258. 0 Dec/96 .2 FPL 1242/03+03 > 9. ENTER Key . > Figure 3-161 To Enter Manual Groundspeed: a.VERIFY or INSERT as required.VERIFY. 7. Current aircraft groundspeed is displayed unless a manual entry is made. PLAN 2/8 TRIP PLAN 6 FR KDAL KDAL < TO ---KHPN GS 407 DIS/DTK -----/--ETE -----FPL ------/------ > 6. FR Waypoint . Groundspeed .System Operation 5.VERIFY or INSERT as required. Selected leg information and time distance for the remainder of the Flight Plan are displayed. 3-98 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.DEPRESS (Figure 3-161). TO Waypoint . Line Select Key . (Figure 3-160) 8.DEPRESS to position cursor over GS value field. Groundspeed . > NOTE: With TRIP PLAN A selected. b.DEPRESS.

c. (Ground-speed should be updated if necessary. (Figure 3-163) If the TRIP PLAN Page is being displayed during a leg change on the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN the new TO Waypoint is not displayed. d.CHECK. DEPRESS ENTER Key ONCE for each subsequent leg. To Return to Automatic Groundspeed: a. Leg or GS change is made on FUEL PLAN Page.DEPRESS.) Rev. c. ETE and FPL time are recalculated whenever the groundspeed changes.DEPRESS to position cursor over GS value field. 0 Dec/96 PLAN 2/8 TRIP PLAN -FR KLAX ---< TO KPIA ---GS 406 DIS/DTK 1425.3 FPL 1425/03+03 > > Figure 3-162 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-99 . b. Data . When leg change information or other data is not continuously updated. b. DEPRESS ENTER Key TWICE to call up next leg. A TRIP PLAN is entered. Line Select Key . ENTER Key .3/051 ETE 03:30. it will be recalculated each time: a.DEPRESS. The TRIP PLAN Page is selected.DEPRESS.System Operation c. NOTE: ETA @ the destination and RAIM @ the destination are displayed only when DIRECT legs are being viewed. ENTER Key . AUTO? appears in the GS field to inform pilot of the pending change and current GS is displayed in the cursor. To review the remainder of the Flight Plan: Position cursor over TO field. A leg change is made on the TRIP PLAN Page. When DIRECT is displayed all data except DTK is updated continuously. BACK Key . (MAN) will appear adjacent to the GS field. Exit and return to the TRIP PLAN Page to view the updated TO Waypoint. 10. 11.

FLIGHT PLAN FUEL PLANNING The FUEL PLAN Page provides the capability to calculate fuel consumption information for Active or Stored Flight Plans. 3-100 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. ENTER Key . Selecting another display page (other than MSG and FUEL PLAN) and returning to the TRIP PLAN Page will also update the leg with DIRECT TO the current NAVIGATION Page TO waypoint. ENTER the letter [A] in the cursor.5/075 ETE 001:5.DEPRESS twice to display information in the data fields. Line Select Key . the Flight Plan number and origin/destination fields will display dashes. b. DIRECT TO Legs or Random Legs without affecting any of the system’s navigation functions.System Operation NOTE: Information between any desired waypoints can be reviewed by selecting the TRIP PLAN Page and entering a FROM and TO waypoint (Figure 3-162) or performing the present position direct procedures (Figure 3163). The TRIP PLAN leg will display DIRECT TO the current NAVIGATION Page TO waypoint. PLAN 2/8 TRIP PLAN -DIRECT ---< TO COS ---GS 404 DIS/DTK 441. Changing GS or the current leg on the FUEL PLAN Page also affects the TRIP PLAN Page.DEPRESS to position cursor over TRIP PLAN field.6 FPL 4410/01+05 ETA @KLIT 01:00 RAIM @KLIT AVAIL > > Figure 3-163 To update the TRIP PLAN leg to the current TO waypoint with an Active Flight Plan selected: a. The ENTER Key must be depressed again. 0 Dec/96 . c. Pilot initiated changes made to the FLOW field on the FUEL STATUS Page are reflected on the FUEL PLAN Page. TO/FROM leg and groundspeed value on this page will be identical to the TRIP PLAN Page. If the TO waypoint is not on the selected Flight Plan. NOTE: If an offset waypoint is in the TO field the OFFSET WPT Page will appear. The Fuel Plan Number and Origin and Destination identifiers.

A KDAL KHPN 434 1200 271 2938 1264 > > Figure 3-164 PLAN 3/8 FUEL PLAN DIRECT < TO LIT GS FLOW LEG FUEL FPL FUEL 3 KDAL KHPN 450 1200 ----------- > > NOTE: If a flight plan number is left in the Fuel Plan field and not returned to “A”.VERIFY (Figure 3-166) or INSERT as required. no updated Active Flight Plan information will appear. FR Waypoint .DEPRESS to display FUEL PLAN Page. 6. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-101 . TO Waypoint . 3. (Figure 3-164) 2. ENTER Key . 7. PLAN 3/8 FUEL PLAN DIRECT < TO LIT GS FLOW LEG FUEL FPL FUEL REM @ KHPN NOTE: Initially the FUEL PLAN will display the Active Flight Plan (if selected). Rev. 4. Figure 3-165 PLAN 3/8 FUEL PLAN < FR KLAX TO ----GS FLOW (MAN) LEG FUEL FPL FUEL 3 KLAX KMDW 434 1200 ----------- > > NOTE: With FUEL PLAN A Figure 3-166 selected the FUEL PLAN leg automatically advances to display DIRECT TO the NAVIGATION Page TO waypoint each time the FUEL PLAN or TRIP PLAN Page is accessed. PLAN Key .System Operation 1.DEPRESS.VERIFY or INSERT as required. 5.DEPRESS. The initial leg displayed will be DIRECT TO the current TO waypoint from NAV page 1. ENTER Key . Desired Flight Plan INSERT Flight Plan Number (Figure 3-165) or “A” for Active Flight Plan. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the FUEL PLAN field.

Current aircraft total fuel flow is displayed unless a manual entry is made. b. ENTER Key . AUTO? appears in the GS field to inform pilot of the pending change and current GS is displayed under the cursor. To Return To Automatic Groundspeed: a. ENTER Key . b. 3-102 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. Line Select Key .DEPRESS to position cursor over FLOW value field. Groundspeed . 9. c. Line Select Key . The current aircraft GS is displayed unless a manual entry is made. ENTER Key . (Figure 3-167).DEPRESS. Line Select Key -DEPRESS to position cursor over FLOW field.DEPRESS to position cursor over GS value field. 0 Dec/96 . 10.VERIFY.DEPRESS to position cursor over GS value field.DEPRESS twice to display LEG and FPL FUEL information. To Enter A Manual Fuel Flow: a. To Return to Automatic Fuel Flow: a. Groundspeed . Fuel Flow .INSERT.VERIFY. PLAN 3/8 FUEL PLAN FR KLAX < TO DAG GS FLOW (MAN) LEG FUEL FPL FUEL 3 KLAX KMDW 425 1200 324 4504 > > To Enter Manual Groundspeed: Figure 3-167 a.DEPRESS. ENTER Key . (MAN) appears adjacent to GS field.System Operation 8.INSERT.DEPRESS. c. c. (MAN) will appear adjacent to the FLOW field. Line Select Key . b.DEPRESS. Fuel Flow . BACK Key .

Figure 3-168 PLAN 3/8 FUEL PLAN DIRECT ---< TO COS ---GS FLOW LEG FUEL FPL FUEL REM @ COS > -457 1300 1679 1679 5761 > Figure 3-169 Rev. (Figure 3-169) The REM @ Field will be displayed in yellow anytime the REM @ value falls below the reserve fuel programmed on Plan Page 1.DEPRESS. The TRIP PLAN Page has changes in FR/TO leg or GS. Leg or GS change is made on the FUEL PLAN Page. the Flight Plan number and origin/destination fields will display dashes. BACK Key . NOTE: The REM @ field only appears when a DIRECT TO leg is displayed. it will be recalculated each time: a. LEG FUEL and FPL FUEL are recalculated whenever the FLOW changes. The FUEL PLAN Page is selected. 11. b. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-103 . c.CHECK. d. If data is not continuously updated. To review the remainder of the Flight Plan: position cursor over TO field. (Groundspeed and/or Fuel Flow should be updated if necessary). If the TO waypoint is not on the selected Flight Plan. ENTER Key. c.DEPRESS. PLAN 3/8 FUEL PLAN FR KLAX KLAX < TO DAG KMDW GS FLOW (MAN) LEG FUEL FPL FUEL > 425 1200 324 324 > NOTE: Information between any desired waypoints can be reviewed by selecting the FUEL PLAN Page and entering a FROM . AUTO? appears adjacent to the FLOW field to inform pilot of the pending change and current flow is displayed under cursor. DEPRESS ENTER Key TWICE to call up next leg.System Operation b. (Figure 3-168) or by executing the present position direct procedures (Figure 3-169). Data .TO leg from the Flight Plan. When DIRECT is displayed all data is continuously updated. FUEL FLOW is changed on FUEL STATUS Page. 12.

The FUEL PLAN leg displays DIRECT TO the current NAVIGATION Page TO waypoint. ENTER the letter [A] in the cursor. Line Select Key -DEPRESS to position cursor over FUEL PLAN field. (Figure 3-170) LAND: PLAN DATE GMT TAKEOFF LAND FLIGHT TIME 5/8 18 FEB 95 14:13 20:43 22:45 02+02 > Figure 3-170 The GMT at weight-on-wheels. b. ENTER Key . 0 Dec/96 3-104 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System . This field is not displayed until 10 seconds after weight-on-wheels occurs. GMT: VERIFY or INSERT Position cursor with Line Select Key and follow procedure in INITIALIZATION PAGE section.System Operation To update the Fuel Plan leg to the current TO leg of the Active Flight Plan: a. NOTE: If GPS time is available. c. (Figure 3-170) Rev. Selecting another display page (other than MSG and TRIP PLAN) and returning to FUEL PLAN Page also updates the leg with DIRECT TO the current NAVIGATION Page TO waypoint.DEPRESS TWICE to display information in data fields. GMT is automatically updated to GPS time. (Figure 3-170) TAKEOFF: The GMT at weight-offwheels plus 10 seconds. VERIFYING OR CHANGING DATE AND TIME DEPRESS the Plan Key until the DATE/GMT Page appears DATE: VERIFY or INSERT Position cursor with Line Select Key and follow procedure in INITIALIZATION PAGE section.

PLAN 6/8 PLAN 6/8 AIRCRAFT WEIGHT BASIC OP WT PAYLOAD FUEL ON BOARD VERIFY INPUTS FUEL USED GROSS WT 7400 400 1600 ---------> > > Figure 3-171 AIRCRAFT WEIGHT BASIC OP WT PAYLOAD FUEL ON BOARD FUEL USED GROSS WT 7400 400 1600 ------9400 > > > NOTE: VERIFY INPUTS field disappears and a GROSS WT value replaces dashes. ENTER Key . 2. or fuel to current on board data. (Figure 3-170) NOTE: TAKEOFF and Flight times will be altered if the GMT is changed during flight. 2 Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-105 . 6.DEPRESS to display AIRCRAFT WEIGHT Page NOTE: BASIC OP WT. FUEL ON BOARD VERIFY or INSERT.System Operation NOTE: TAKEOFF and LAND data may be based on groundspeed and/or TAS valids depending upon system configuration. (Figure 3-172) Figure 3-172 Rev.DEPRESS.VERIFY or INSERT. PLAN Key . and weight fields no longer blink. BASIC OP WT . 4. and FUEL ON BOARD fields will be blinking if update has not been entered after system power up. payload. 5. 7.VERIFY or INSERT. PAYLOAD .DEPRESS. ENTER Key . VERIFYING OR CHANGING AIRCRAFT WEIGHT PARAMETERS This procedure allows the pilot to confirm or adjust basic operating weight.DEPRESS. Line Select Key DEPRESS to place the cursor over flashing weight field. (Figure 3-171) 3. FUEL USED will remain dashes until auto fuel flow is detected. FLIGHT TIME: The elapsed flight time is displayed in hours and minutes. 1. PAYLOAD. ENTER Key . 8.

All blinking weight fields must be verified or values inserted using the ENTER Key. Line Select Key . depress the line select key when the field displays ZERO?.DEPRESS to reset fuel used to zero. 3. for GROSS WT field to display information.DEPRESS to place cursor over FUEL USED. The field will display ZERO?. ENTER Key . 2 Aug/00 .System Operation VERIFY FUEL message replaces VERIFY INPUTS message when MAN fuel flow is being used and FUEL ON BOARD has not been verified or updated on PLAN Page 1 or 6.DEPRESS to display aircraft weight page. (Figure 3-172a) NOTE: To leave the FUEL USED field without changing the value. PLAN 6/8 AIRCRAFT WEIGHT BASIC OP WT PAYLOAD FUEL ON BOARD FUEL USED GROSS WT 7400 400 1600 ZERO? 9400 > > > Figure 3-172a 3-106 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. RESETTING FUEL USED 1. 2. PLAN Key . The cursor will be removed from the page.

3. 6. PILOT ENTERED LEG CHANGE 1. If VERIFYING current FR Waypoint . TO Waypoint Identifier INSERT or VERIFY. minutes. b. To Insert Waypoint Coordinates (cursor over POS Field): (1) Latitude . (Figure 3-173) ENTER Key .DEPRESS. Waypoint Page Coordinates .4 069 119 327/ 13 > Figure 3-173 7.INSERT or VERIFY.DEPRESS. 5.System Operation SPECIAL PROCEDURES The following are various procedures that can be performed during navigation.DEPRESS to position the cursor over the FR field.INSERT (N or S first. or an offset waypoint. DIS ETE DTK GS WIND -AUTO- 120.DEPRESS to select NAVIGATION Page 1. NAV Key . then degrees. Rev.DEPRESS.DEPRESS ENTER and cursor box expands to enclose both FR and TO Waypoint Identifiers. and hundredths). then degrees. The following procedure should be performed: If Waypoint Page Appears: a. (3) Longitude . Line Select Key . FR Waypoint Identifier . However. If inserting a Waypoint Identifier not found in the Active Flight Plan. minutes. ENTER Key . which activates the TO field. when applicable. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-107 .4 00:17. (2) ENTER Key . a Waypoint Page appears.INSERT (E or W first. 4. NAVIGATION Page 1 is recommended to simplify a reasonability check of DIS and DTK. A pilot entered leg change may be accomplished on any NAVIGATION Page with a FR/TO field. ENTER Key .VERIFY Database Waypoint or INSERT Waypoint Data.DEPRESS. and hundredths). NAVIGATION 1/4 FR HEMET 00:43 TO CORLA 01:01 < < 2.

DIS. DTK .30 W116 16. then degrees. minutes. To jump the fence and continue with the flight plan use the d Key then the Line Select Keys to position the cursor over a way point beyond the fence then press ENTER Key 3-108 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.DEPRESS.INSERT (E or W first. Waypoint Page Coordinates .VERIFY Database Waypoint or INSERT Waypoint Data. and hundredths). tenths and hundredths). b.System Operation If Waypoint Page Appears: a. 8.DEPRESS. (3) Longitude .CHECK. then de-grees. if DEPART the TO waypoint was not on ARRIVE ETA > < the original Active Flight Plan APPROACH ERASE (Figure 3-175) The MSG light illuminates and the Figure 3-175 SYSTEM MESSAGE Page displays NO AUTO LEG CHG. (Figure 3-174) To Insert Waypoint Coordinates (cursor over POS Field): (1) Latitude .70 NDB-ENTER Figure 3-174 (2) ENTER Key . ENTER Key . DATABASE WPT WAYPOINT POS 1/1 CORLA N 33 38. however the AUTO field on NAVIGATION Page 1 continues to display AUTO. minutes. NOTE: The Pilot Entered ACTIVE FPL 1/2 Leg Change procedure FR HEMET 7 inserts a “fence” indicated by TO CORLA 00:20 8 < (----) on the DIRECT TO -----KSNA -KDTW and ACTIVE FPL pages pre< MUSEL venting Auto Leg Change HEMET > < beyond the TO waypoint.INSERT (N or S first. 0 Dec/96 .

DEPRESS to position cursor over -MAN-. however the MSG light does not illuminate. The cursor disappears and -MAN> MAN? remains in the field confirming that leg changes must be made manually.4 00:17. BACK Key . Returning to Automatic Leg Change Mode 1. ENTER Key . 3.DEPRESS. Cursor field displays MAN? to inform the pilot of the pending change. BACK Key .DEPRESS. Line Select Key . 2. NAV Key . (Figure 3-176) NAVIGATION 1/4 FR HEMET 00:43 TO CORLA 01:01 < < 4.4 069 119 327/ 13 NOTE: Certain HDG Intercept and Pseudo VORTAC Procedures automatically put the leg change mode into -MAN-.System Operation PREVENTING AUTOMATIC LEG CHANGES The Auto Leg change function allows the system to automatically sequence from waypoint to waypoint on the Active Flight Plan.or -AUTO. 1. NAV Key . 3. Line Select Key . 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-109 .DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION Page 1. 4. The pilot must determine if -MAN.DEPRESS. Rev. Figure 3-176 NO AUTO LEG CHG message appears on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page.is appropriate then select the desired leg change mode. The cursor disappears and -AUTOremains in the field confirming return to the Automatic Leg Change Mode. 2. ENTER Key DEPRESS. DIS ETE DTK GS WIND 120.DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION Page 1. Cursor field displays AUTO? to inform the pilot of the pending change. The following procedure inhibits automatic leg changes. NO AUTO LEG CHG message on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page disappears unless the current TO waypoint is the last waypoint on the Active Flight Plan.DEPRESS to position cursor over -AUTO-. When the system is initialized it is in the Automatic Leg Change Mode unless changed by the pilot.

The position of each sensor will appear sequentially along with the DIF to the composite position. 3-110 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. 2. POSITION FIX POS N 40 W096 59. BACK Key . minutes. NAV Page 1 will be displayed.00 > > IDENT FIX ? N 40 < W096 DIF S E Figure 3-177 POSITION FIX POS N 40 W096 59.20 > > IDENT GPS ? N 40 < W096 DIF N E Figure 3-178 5. 2 Aug/00 .DEPRESS.80 17.80 17.80 17.10 0. ENTER Key .VERIFY POSITION message only appears on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page following a system DR. To verify position use Position Check and Update Procedure. HOLD Key -DEPRESS. The field will display FIX? (Figure 3-177) 3. The following procedure describes this action: 1.70 17. NAV RDY .00 ---59.00 0.DEPRESS to update composite position to the selected sensor.System Operation DEAD RECKONING (DR) TO PRIMARY NAVIGATION MODE VLF (RPU) ONLY EQUIPPED NOTE: System automatically reverts to the Primary Navigation Mode 30 seconds after the NAV RDY-VERIFY POSITION message appears. The cursor will advance to the DIF field displaying the direction and distance in degrees.20 0. Line Select Key DEPRESS ONCE to place the cursor over the FIX field.00 ---59. and hundredths of minutes from the sensor position to the composite position. VERIFY POSITION message and the MSG light remains on.00 0. (Figure 3-178) 4. ENTER Key . POSITION CHECK AND UPDATE PROCEDURES Using a Sensor A position update may also be performed using any one of the navigating interfaced position sensors as a reference.DEPRESS until the desired sensor (preferably the GPS sensor) to be used as the update reference appears in the cursor.

Known Point . ENTER Key DEPRESS if position update is desired. Line Select Key (cursor over FIX coordinates).50 0. Option 1: IDENT a.System Operation Over Known Point This procedure is used to cross check or update the system by overflying a known reference point such as a radio navaid or visual check point. ENTER Key . Option 2: Coordinates a.10 2.40 44. minutes and hundredths of minutes from the FIX position to the composite position. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-111 . 2.30 ---55. b. POSITION FIX POS N 40 W096 55. NAVIGATION Page 1 is displayed. IDENT . (Figure 3-180) IDENT FIX N 40 < W096 DIF S W Figure 3-179 POSITION FIX POS N 40 W096 55.DEPRESS over known point.80 > > d.30 LNK 55.50 --------> > FIX < IDENT N 40 W096 DIF ------- Figure 3-180 Rev.30 47. Waypoint Page Coordinates . ENTER Key DEPRESS.30 47. 1.VERIFY. c. The DIF display shows the direction and distance in degrees.DEPRESS.ENTER using either: Option 1: IDENT or Option 2: Coordinates for check points not in memory. (Figure 3179) e.INSERT.40 44. HOLD Key .

LCS.DEPRESS if position update is desired.DEPRESS. NAVIGATION Page 1 is displayed NOTE: If coordinate field flashes after entry. Offset Waypoint IDENT . HOLD Key . ENTER Key .DEPRESS. NAV. 1. e. 3-112 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. FPL. PLAN. GPS.INSERT. ENTER Key . VNAV. and IRS sensors are not updated. refer to the procedure for Creating An Offset Waypoint. Only IRS velocities are required to contribute to the composite position. The DIF display shows the direction and distance in degrees. 0 Dec/96 . NOTE: Overflying a predetermined radial and distance is not necessary. TUNE.INSERT (E or W first. If Update Not Desired: 3. or to cancel the position fix.DEPRESS. minutes. HDG. 2. and hundredths). then degrees. Longitude . c. If System Updated: The VLF (RPU) sensor. ENTER Key . d. d Key . minutes. f.System Operation b.INSERT (N or S first. then degrees. Latitude .DEPRESS Using An Offset This procedure is used to cross-check or update the system using an offset from a known point such as VORTAC Radial and Distance. Record Radial and Distance at the same time as performing Step 1. and hundredths). verify coordinates and depress ENTER again. and the VPU interfaced to the updated CDU are updated as well as the composite position. NOTE: If necessary. minutes and hundredths of minutes from the FIX position to the composite position.

GPS. minutes. PLAN.0 47. if position update desired. or to cancel the position fix. Recorded Radial .DEPRESS Rev.System Operation 3. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-113 . d Key . ENTER Key . Recorded Distance . HDG. 7. TUNE. The DIF display shows the direction and distance in degrees. (Figure 3-181) 9.DEPRESS.DEPRESS. and the VPU interfaced to the updated CDU are updated as well as the composite position. 8. ENTER Key .INSERT (NM and tenths).INSERT.DEPRESS.20 > POS N 40 W097 ENTER < OK? Figure 3-181 POSITION FIX POS N 40 W097 49. LCS.70 > > The VLF (RPU) sensor. 5. VNAV. ENTER Key .20 LNK* 47. and IRS sensors are not updated. If System Updated : OFFSET WPT WAYPOINT RAD DIS 1/1 LNK* 230. 4.60 1.0 15. If Update Not Desired: IDENT FIX N 40 < W097 DIF N W Figure 3-182 11. NAV.30 03. FPL. ENTER Key DEPRESS.50 1. Waypoint Coordinates VERIFY for reasonability. ENTER Key . and hundredths of minutes from the FIX position to the composite position.DEPRESS.70 01. Only IRS velocities are required to contribute to the composite position. 6. (Figure 3-182) 10.30 01.

However the HSI will display a centered needle when the SXTK has been captured. If XTK is greater than 12. 2.INSERT (NM and tenths). 3.DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION 2/4 Page with SXTK. The steering reference will be to the original desired track.KDTW . NAV Key . Offset Distance . This field is inactive when in APPROACH ARMED mode (within 30 nm of the destination airport). NAV Key .KDTW ENRTE 8 & 18:59 1377 R 008 L 5. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over SXTK field . 5. NOTE: If the system is coupled to the autopilot. The maximum value that can be entered is 99. ENTER Key . XTK deviation remains referenced to the original track. the roll command will turn the aircraft to intercept the parallel course at the selected SXTK distance.DEPRESS to display page with SXTK. DIS. WIND ETE FUEL TKE XTK SXTK % 11 . Line Select Key . 0 Dec/96 . (Figure 3-183). The cursor field will display CANCEL? to inform the pilot of the pending change. NAVIGATION 2/4 FR TBC 15:41 TO FMN 16:00 < < 3.DEPRESS.DEPRESS.System Operation PARALLEL COURSE This procedure is used to establish an offset course (steering reference) parallel to the current leg.DEPRESS to position cursor over SXTK field. 4.DEPRESS.5NM. 2.9 NM. BRG. Canceling Parallel Course 1. ETE remain referenced to the current TO waypoint. VNAV will become INVALID and no vertical deviation information will be displayed.00 > CANCEL? Figure 3-183 4. 1. BACK Key .DEPRESS. 3-114 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. ENTER Key . L or R Key .

Line Select Key .System Operation NOTE: Any Leg Change (manual or automatic) including DIRECT TO will also cancel selected crosstrack (SXTK) and provide “on course” guidance to the TO waypoint. NAV Key .DEPRESS to position cursor over VAR field. ETA. AUTO? will appear in the VAR field to inform the pilot of pending change. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-115 .DEPRESS to position cursor over VAR field. SELECTING ETE. FPL Key .DEPRESS. 1. ENTER Key . DIS. 2. ENTER Key . Local Variation .DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION 3/4 Page with VAR. The automatic variation value will appear in the cursor. the distance.DEPRESS. the TO waypoint will be bypassed and no hold will occur unless the SXTK is cancelled prior to reaching the TO waypoint. NAV Key . Line Select Key .DEPRESS to display page with VAR.DEPRESS. 2.DEPRESS to display ACTIVE FPL Page. or altitude constraints of waypoints on the Active Flight Plan. 1. BACK Key . RETURNING TO AUTOMATIC VARIATION This checklist must be accomplished to return to Automatic Variation following a Manual Variation entry. 3. 4. OR ALT DISPLAY OPTION (Active Flight Plan Page) The pilot can view the estimated time enroute. 4.INSERT (E or W first). 3. Rev. 1. If a holding pattern is programmed at the TO waypoint during parallel course guidance. (MAN) will be annunciated adjacent to the VAR field. MANUAL MAGNETIC VARIATION ENTRY A manual magnetic variation entry is required north of 70° N latitude and south of 60°S latitude. the estimated time of arrival.

DEPRESS to display the NAVIGATION Page. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over ETE. To display waypoint numbers when the ETE or ETA option is selected. or 3) The pilot can view the estimated time of arrival or altitude constraint of TO waypoint on the NAV Pages.etc. a Flight Plan must be selected and a leg defined. ETE ERASE > Figure 3-185 SELECTING NAV PAGE ETA OR ALT DISPLAY OPTION (NAV Page 1.4. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the ETA field. or ALT field. 0 Dec/96 .DEPRESS to display desired option.System Operation 2.) when the DIS option is selected. 2. (Figure 3-184) BACK Key . (Figure 3-186) 3. 2. NAV Key . Selecting ALT Display: 1. (Figure 3-185) ACTIVE FPL 1/1 FR RW19R 1 TO ORD ----2 < AZO ----3 KDTW ----4 < ###### DEPART ARRIVE < APPROACH < > 3.2. ETA.3. 4.5 18:59 049 228 230/ 8 > > Figure 3-186 3-116 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. NAVIGATION 1/4 DIRECT 23:03 TO BDF 05:22 < < > DIS ETE DTK GS WIND -AUTO- 1328.DEPRESS. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to select option. ETE? ERASE > Figure 3-184 ACTIVE FPL 1/1 FR RW19R 1 TO ORD 00:42 2 < AZO 00:16 3 KDTW 01:11 4 < ###### DEPART ARRIVE < APPROACH < > NOTE: To display waypoint numbers (1. BACK Key . a valid ground speed is required. ALT? appears in cursor. Altitude constraints and waypoint offsets are only displayed if programmed. DIS.

VERIFY displayed.ADJUST as required. 6. STAR. DIS 1328. 6.DEPRESS to place the cursor over POS field. Loss of Power In-Flight.DEPRESS to display Altitude Constraint. Rev.DEPRESS. POS Coordinates . DATE and GMT .DEPRESS to display ETA. BACK Key .DEPRESS. or Approach procedures. The altitude cannot be changed on these pages. 2. ENTER Key . If the aircraft has lost power for more than 7 seconds refer to Special Procedure. POWER ON: (Five minutes minimum prior to reaching known point.DEPRESS. 3. Figure 3-187 The ALT display should always be selected during SID. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-117 .5 > > Line Select Key . NOTE: POS coordinate accuracy is not critical on this step as an update will follow. 4. ENTER Key . ETA? appears in cursor. (Figure 3187) NAVIGATION 1/4 DIRECT 23:03 TO BDF 12000G < < > NOTE: Altitude constraint ETE 05:46. ON Key . ENTER Key . To Return to ETA: 5.System Operation 4. ENTER Key . BRT Key .3 and waypoint offset are only DTK 049 displayed if a VNAV GS 228 WIND 230/ 8 Waypoint is programmed at -AUTOthe TO Waypoint and VNAV is valid. 7. 5. INITIALIZATION ENROUTE VLF (RPU) ONLY This procedure allows the pilot to initialize the system in flight when only VLF is available.DEPRESS to position the cursor over the altitude constraint field.) 1. for initialization procedure.VERIFY. If DATE or GMT is incorrect it may be updated as described in the INITIALIZATION Page procedures.

12. VERIFY POSITION is displayed on the SYSTEM MESSAGE Page. 14.DEPRESS. but is used to check for reasonability or manual entry errors. ENTER Key. Since the system was initialized in-flight using an approximate position. ENTER Key . ENTER Key . If necessary.DEPRESS TWICE Position Update: A position update must be performed to give the system an accurate starting position.System Operation 7.VERIFY. NAV RDY MSG . b.CHECK. 10. IDENT or Known Point Coordinates . and Step 9 and 10 are not required. 11.DEPRESS. 13.VERIFY or INSERT. HOLD Key .DEPRESS. 0 Dec/96 .DEPRESS over known point. 8. If the system enters the Primary Navigation Mode automatically. the DIF check is not used to determine the suitability of an update. An update may be accomplished over a known point or by using an offset. Manual TAS . Enter the following information as required: • Active Flight Plan • Initial Leg • Manual Magnetic Variation (only for latitudes north of 70N and south of 60S) 3-118 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. refer to the procedure for Position Check and Update. DIF . HOLD Key . Enter Primary Navigation Mode: (Prior to reaching known point) NOTE: This step is automatic with weight-off-wheels or at 150 knots Auto-TAS. If Waypoint Page appears: a.ENTER. If necessary refer to the procedure for Manual TAS Entry under Special Procedures. Waypoint Page Coordinates .INSERT (if required). 9.

Line Select Key DEPRESS to place the cursor over TAS field. If the system is using an unaided VLF/OMEGA sensor (no heading. If the auto-TAS input returns. TAS . 3. it will override the manual entry. TAS must be manually entered if the aircraft does not have an autoTAS system or the auto-TAS input has failed. MAN TAS REQD message appears on the SYSTEM MESSAGE Page. NAV Key . Rev. If the manual heading is required a “MAN HDG REQD” message will appear on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page. (MAN) will appear adjacent to the TAS field. no wind will be displayed. MANUAL HEADING ENTRY only if IRS or VLF is available A manual heading entry will be possible only if the system is using a VLF/OMEGA sensor with H-field antenna and the automatic heading input has failed. (Figure 3188) NAVIGATION 3/4 FR ABQ 01:09 TO PGS 01:57 < < DRIFT VAR TAS HDG BRG TK (MAN) R E 002 12 420 269 219 267 > > Figure 3-188 NOTE: Maximum manual TAS value that can be entered is 850 knots. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-119 . If TAS is entered manually. 2.INSERT in knots. 4. If the automatic heading input returns it will override the manual entry without operator action. TAS or IRS velocities available) manual TAS entry is required when fewer than three stations are received.System Operation MANUAL TAS ENTRY only VLF is available NOTE: Manual TAS cannot be entered if a valid TAS is present from the Airdata Computer. To Enter Manual TAS: 1. ENTER Key DEPRESS.DEPRESS to display page with TAS.

INSERT. (Figure 3-191) < < NAVIGATION 4/4 IDENT POS -----> > N 33 43. HDG . NOTE: Stations may not be automatically deselected by the computer if unsuitable for navigation. 4.DEPRESS.1 0. NAV Key .System Operation To Enter A Manual Heading: 1. Line Select Key DEPRESS to place the cursor over HDG field. ENTER Key . + TOO FAR + UNSTABLE SPARE + + Figure 3-191 3-120 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. Figure 3-190 VLF WSH AUS ANT < MNE HAW < JPN PTR‘ < ANN SUBSECTION 99 --99 73 76 35 99 3/4 3. 0 Dec/96 . NAV or NXT Key DEPRESS to sequence through VLF SUBSECTION.DEPRESS to display page with HDG. VLF/OMEGA STATION DESELECTION The following procedure allows a VLF Communication or Omega station to be removed from an RPU’s navigation solution.DEPRESS. 4.0 0.2 GPS 0.33 W116 54. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over VLF sensor field. (Figure 3-189) NAVIGATION 3/4 FR ABQ 01:09 TO PGS 01:57 < < DRIFT VAR TAS HDG BRG TK R E (MAN) 002 12 420 269 219 267 > > Figure 3-189 NOTE: SYSTEM MESSAGES Page will display USING MAN HDG message. 1. 2. (MAN) will appear adjacent to the HDG field. NAV Key .DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION Page 4. 3. (Figure 3-190) ENTER Key .37 VLF ? 0. Select either VLF Comm or Omega Station List Page.1 VPU LCS IRS 0.1 > > 2.

System Operation 5. (Figure 3-192) DESELECT? will appear to inform the pilot of the pending change. Entering Enroute Mode MANUAL NAVIGATION 4/4 IDENT POS < < 1. (Figure 3-191) BACK Key . Figure 3-192 To restore a deselected station: a. BACK Key . LORAN-C MANUAL OPERATIONS At “Power On” the Loran-C sensor is in the automatic (AUTO) tracking mode. + TOO FAR + DESELECT? SPARE + + 7. VLF WSH AUS ANT < MNE HAW < JPN PTR‘ < ANN < SUBSECTION 99 --99 73 76 35 99 3/4 6. Line Select Key . c. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-121 .DEPRESS to position the cursor over the station identifier to be restored. 2.DEPRESS. b.1 VPU1 GPS 0. RESTORE? will appear to inform the pilot of the pending change. manual selection may cause sensor to DR. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Loran-C sensor. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over station identifier to be deselected.37 0.1 > > LCS1? 0. The following procedure places the Loran-C in the Manual Enroute Mode to allow specific Loran-C chain to be selected.1 IRS 0. NAV or NXT Key DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION Page 4.0 0. ENTER Key . Use caution when using this procedure enroute. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to restore the station.2 Figure 3-193 Rev. (Figure 3-193) VLF ------ > > N 33 43.33 W116 54. This procedure may be used to evaluate station reliability by observing Signal to Noise Ratios (SNR) and Envelope Cycle Discrepancies (ECD). When navigating on dual chains.DEPRESS.DEPRESS to DESELECT station.

Figure 3-195 LCS1 < < < < 7. NAV or NXT Key DEPRESS twice to display Loran-C Sensor Status Page 3. 3-122 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.TOO FAR 4.DEPRESS to access Loran-C Sensor Status Pages.5 TRACK W X Y Z 30 70 -45 5.1 TRACK 6. (Figure 3-196) SUBSECTION 3/3 > MANUAL 9960 NE USA M 85 4. (Figure 3-195) LCS1 Figure 3-194 SUBSECTION 3/3 NE USA GT LKE 6.DEPRESS to select desired GRI and to enter MANUAL Enroute Mode. < AUTO 9960 MXYZ 8970 MWX NOTE: A GRI number can also be entered directly. BACK Key . Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over GRI. (Figure 3-194) LCS1 < SUBSECTION 3/3 NE USA GT LKE AUTO 9960 MXYZ 8970 MWX 5.0 SPARE --. 4. ENTER Key .0 TRACK Figure 3-196 Loran-C Station Deselection NOTE: This procedure should be used with caution since stations are automatically deselected by the computer if unsuitable for navigation. 0 Dec/96 .System Operation 3. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to display usable GRIs.

1 VPU1 GPS 0.1 TRACK 6. (Figure 3-197) 9. DESELECT? will appear to inform the pilot of the impending change. 2.1 < IRS 0.TOO FAR 4.TOO FAR 4.1 DESELECT? 6. Returning to AUTO Enroute Mode 1.2 Figure 3-199 Rev. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION Page 4.1 > > LCS1? 0.Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the station identifier to be restored. NAVIGATION 4/4 IDENT POS < ------ > > VLF N 33 43. ENTER Key DEPRESS to DESELECT station. RESTORE? will appear to inform t h e pilot of the pending change.0 SPARE --. BACK Key . NAV Key . b. LCS1 < < < < SUBSECTION 3/3 > MANUAL 9960 NE USA M 85 4.5 TRACK W X Y Z 30 70 -45 5.System Operation 8. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Loran-C sensor. BACK Key DEPRESS.0 TRACK Figure 3-198 c. (Figure 3-199) 3.0 0. ENTER Key .33 W116 54. SUBSECTION 3/3 > MANUAL 9960 NE USA M 85 4.5 TRACK W X Y Z 30 70 -45 5. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over station identifier to be deselected. (Figure 3-198).DEPRESS to access Loran-C Subsection Pages. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-123 .DEPRESS. 10.0 SPARE --.DEPRESS to restore the station.37 0.0 TRACK Figure 3-197 LCS1 < < < < To restore a deselected station: a.

5 TRACK W X Y Z 30 70 -45 5. 3-124 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.TOO FAR 4.System Operation 4. The Loran-C sensor will be restored automatically when the aircraft re-enters the bounded area.0 SPARE --. BACK Key . (Figure 3-200) LCS1 < < SUBSECTION 3/3 > MANUAL 9960 NE USA M 85 4.0 SPARE --. The sensor can be manually reselected outside the boundary by using the restore procedure below.1 TRACK 6.1 TRACK 6.0 TRACK 5. < < Figure 3-201 SENSOR DESELECTION When a sensor is contributing to the composite position (as indicated by the radial error value displayed in green).TOO FAR 4. the deselection of a position sensor on NAVIGATION Page 4 completely eliminates the sensor’s contribution to the composite (blended) position. See Section 4 for the Loran-C Automatic Deselection Boundary Map.DEPRESS to enter AUTO Enroute Mode. NOTE: The Loran-C sensor (LCS) will be deselected automatically when the aircraft is flown or powered up outside the continental USA. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over MANUAL. 0 Dec/96 .0 TRACK 7. ENTER Key . This is only recommended if the pilot can determine which position keeping sensor is inaccurate or by flying over a known location and then comparing the sensor position against the known position. (Figure 3-201) LCS1 < < SUBSECTION 3/3 > AUTO? 9960 NE USA M 85 4. NAV or NXT Key DEPRESS twice to display Loran-C Sensor Status Page 3.5 TRACK W X Y Z 30 70 -45 5. (Figure 3200) < < Figure 3-200 6. MANUAL field will change to display [AUTO?] prompt.DEPRESS.

NAV Key . b. It will always be displayed in green.0 0. OUT? will appear to inform the pilot of the pending change.System Operation To Deselect a Sensor: 1. Line Select Key .1 0.DEPRESS. 3.DEPRESS until NAVIGATION Page 4 is displayed.DEPRESS. the GPS is the sole contributor to the composite position. ENTER Key . The IRS contributes to GPS accuracy by providing GPS with velocity aiding.33 W116 54.DEPRESS to restore the sensor. “OUT” will remain in the sensor field and “DESELECTED” appears beside the corresponding sensor on the SENSOR MESSAGES Page. ENTER Key . IN? appears to inform the pilot of the pending change. d. NAV Key . To Restore a Sensor: a. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over sensor to be deselected. NOTE: If GPS is deselected. Rev.DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION Page 4.1 > > Figure 3-202 4. BACK Key . the remaining sensor radial error fields will turn from yellow to green. Under normal circumstances.DEPRESS. c.2 GPS 0. 2. indicating that those sensors are now contributing to the composite position.37 VLF ? OUT? VPU LCS IRS 0. BACK Key .DEPRESS to position cursor over sensor to be restored. (Figure 3-202) NAVIGATION 4/4 IDENT POS -----> > < N 33 43. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-125 .

The display will show Direct To the EX# waypoint with the waypoints of the Active Flight Plan listed below. The generated waypoint will be designated EX#01 to EX#99.3 070 -----/--- > > Figure 3-203 DIRECT TO EX#03 ----< KSNA MUSEL < HEMET TRM < EED* TBC < FMN < 1/2 d Key . 4. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the waypoint to follow the EX# waypoint.9 00:04. 3-126 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.DEPRESS. (Figure 3204). 3. “NO AUTO LEG CHG” message will appear on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page. (Figure 3-203) As the External Waypoint (EX#) is off the Flight Plan it will be separated from the Active Flight Plan waypoint sequence by a fence .System Operation EXTERNAL WAYPOINT ACCEPTANCE Up to 99 external waypoints may be accepted from an interfaced radar or EFIS system. PUB HLC PWE TO LMN BURKK BDF GSH KDTW ***** > > > Figure 3-205 NOTE: The EX# waypoint identifier will flash if an unassigned number is entered. PUB HLC PWE LMN BURKK BDF GSH KDTW ***** > > > Figure 3-204 DIRECT EX#03 ----KSNA MUSEL HEMET TRM EED* TBC FMN 1/2 < < < < < 2. EX# waypoint coordinates can ONLY be assigned by an external source (radar or EFIS)...DEPRESS. NAVIGATION 1/4 DIRECT 22:36 TO EX#03 22:42 < < DIS ETE DTK GS WIND -AUTO- 17. When a waypoint is generated from this equipment. (Figure 3-205) EX# Waypoint Identifier INSERT. ENTER Key . The following procedure may be used to link the EX# waypoint into the Flight Plan sequence. 1.. a DIRECT TO leg change is made to that waypoint. 0 Dec/96 .-.

NOTE: Since waypoint #1 is frequently redefined. However. Rev. An example of the application of waypoint #1 is to store the coordinates of a point overflown to which you may wish to return. < < < DIRECT EX#03 ----KSNA MUSEL HEMET TRM EED* TBC FMN 1/2 PUB HLC PWE TO EX#03 BURKK BDF GSH KDTW ***** > > > Figure 3-206 PRESENT POSITION AS A WAYPOINT A special waypoint location is reserved for storing present position coordinates as a waypoint.DEPRESS.VERIFY. or the system is shut down. it is not retained in non-volatile memory and the identifier #1 cannot be entered on a stored flight plan. This is accomplished by depressing the HOLD Key directly over that desired point. < 7. It does. Waypoint Sequence VERIFY. < 6. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-127 . use up one of the 999 available waypoints. “NO AUTO LEG CHG” message will be removed from the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page. The identifier for this waypoint is inserted as “#1. Waypoint #1 is redefined each time the HOLD Key is depressed. CDU display will automatically advance to NAVIGATION Page 1. See page 3-131 for creating pilot entered waypoints.DEPRESS. the coordinates of WPT #1 can be stored on a Flight Plan by making them part of a pilot entered waypoint. ENTER Key . however.System Operation 5. In this case these coordinates would be stored under identifier “#1” until either the HOLD Key is depressed again. #0 and EX (external) Waypoints.” As well. updating #1. ENTER Key . (Figure 3-206) 8. the identifier may be used as a parent identifier for an offset waypoint by adding an asterisk (“*”). Waypoint Page Coordinates . as do #OFF.

3. 4. ENTER Key . 0 Dec/96 . Local Variation . 3. NAV Key . ENTER Key . Returning To Automatic Variation 1. NOTE: Insertion of E or W followed by ENTER will also revert the system to Auto Variation. 4.DEPRESS. 2. NOTE: Once the TRUE/MAG Switch is placed in the TRUE position T is displayed adjacent to BRG. Line Select Key .DEPRESS to display until NAVIGATION Page 3 is displayed. Line Select Key .DEPRESS to place cursor over the VAR value field.DEPRESS.DEPRESS to place cursor over the VAR value field. AUTO? will be displayed to advise the pilot of the impending change. TRUE/MAG Switch . 2.DEPRESS until NAVIGATION Page 3 is displayed.DEPRESS. IN ALL CASES THE FLIGHT CREW OF ANY AIRCRAFT OPERATING AT THESE LATITUDES MUST CONSULT THE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT IN ORDER TO OBTAIN SATISFACTORY PERFORMANCE AND ACCURACY. HDG and TK since they are now referenced to true north. 3-128 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. TRUE HEADING Aircraft Equipped With TRUE/MAG Switch 1. BACK Key .Place in TRUE position.INSERT (E or W first). NAV Key . Manual Magnetic Variation Entry 1. (MAN) will be annunciated adjacent to the VAR field.System Operation NAVIGATION AT EXTREME LATITUDES (North of 70° N or South of 60° S) CAUTION: THE PROCEDURES LISTED IN THIS SECTION CONTAIN INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATION OF THE GNS-X C129 AT SPECIFIED LATITUDES BEYOND THE AUTO-COMPUTED MAGNETIC VARIATION MODEL.

SET HEADING ENTRY When an IRS is placed in the Attitude Mode the message ENTR SET HDG appears on the SENSOR MESSAGES Page. ENTER Key .DEPRESS NAVIGATION 3/4 FR ABQ 01:09 TO‘ PGS 01:57 < < DRIFT VAR TAS HDG BRG TK R E 002 12 420 --219 267 > > Figure 3-207 2. ENTER Key . NAV Key . 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-129 .DEPRESS until NAVIGATION Page 3 is displayed. HDG and TK. NOTE: The Variation is now E0 and the system will be referenced to TRUE north. Figure 3-208 Rev. 4. INSERT E0. The last valid heading value appears. NAVIGATION 3/4 FR ABQ 01:09 TO‘ PGS 01:57 < < DRIFT VAR TAS HDG BRG TK R E 002 12 420 269 219 267 > > 3.DEPRESS to place cursor over the VAR field. 4. The heading field may appear as dashes. LINE SELECT Key .VERIFY or INSERT. There will be no T annunciation adjacent to BRG. NAV Key . 2. 1.System Operation Aircraft Not Equipped With A TRUE/MAG Switch NOTE: This procedure must be accompanied by the input of TRUE heading into the system. 3.DEPRESS. (Figure 3-207) Line Select Key DEPRESS to place the cursor over HDG field. (Figure 3-208) HDG . It is necessary to enter a set heading in order to allow the IRS to output valid magnetic heading data.DEPRESS until NAVIGATION Page 3 appears. To Enter A Set Heading: 1.

00 GMT OFF 21:50 MINUTES OFF 00.DEPRESS. system performs Self Test and displays the INITIALIZATION Page. POSITION FIX POS N 40 55. POS N 38 37. HOLD Key . 4.30 W095 47.VERIFY or ENTER current DATE and GMT if required. LAST GS .System Operation NOTE: In some cases. 0 Dec/96 3-130 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System . LOSS OF POWER IN FLIGHT THIS PROCEDURE SHOULD ONLY BE USED IN A REMOTE AREA WHERE NAVAIDS ARE UNAVAILABLE AND THERE IS REASON TO BELIEVE THE SENSORS CONTRIBUTING TO THE COMPOSITE POSITION MAY BE IN ERROR. provides a snapshot of system data at the moment power was lost. NOTE: The coordinates are a rolling display of the real time blended position of the sensors being updated. 5. The Power Off Waypoint.20 W105 37. Power Off Waypoint IDENT .6 LAST TK 060 LAST GS 407 Figure 3-210 Rev. DATE and GMT . ENTER Key .INSERT “#OFF”. IDENT #OFF FIX --------< --------DIF ----------------- Figure 3-209 SPECIAL WAYPOINT WPT #OFF 6.30 > > 2. ENTER Key . 1. (Figure 3-209). The procedure allows the pilot to initialize enroute when the aircraft has sustained a loss of power for more than 7 seconds.DEPRESS. To Initialize when power is restored: NOTE: When power returns. if required. 3. LAST TK.DEPRESS to place the cursor over the POS field. (MAN) will appear in the HDG field and the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page will display USING MAN HDG message. ENTER Key . “#OFF”. (Figure 3-210).VERIFY and RECORD for future use. MINUTES OFF. 7.DEPRESS to accept real time position.

DEPRESS. CREATING/CHANGING PILOT ENTERED (PERSONALIZED) WAYPOINTS A personalized waypoint may be created by entering a non-NDB (Nav Data Base) waypoint identifier and inserting the desired position coordinates on the Waypoint Page.INSERT calculated distance in NM and tenths.0 ----> POS --------------- 818 WPTS AVAIL Figure 3-211 17.DEPRESS. NOTE: An Offset Waypoint (#OFF*) can be input with a radial based on the LAST TK value and distance calculated from the LAST GS value as well as the time elapsed from power off. TUNE. VNAV. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-131 . ENTER Key . DIF .DEPRESS. 11. d Key . or to cancel the HOLD. 16. Offset Waypoint IDENT . 9. PLAN. FPL.DEPRESS Rev. ENTER Key .System Operation 8. (Figure 3-211) 12. If the aircraft has turned or if the speed has changed. Distance . The VLF (RPU) sensor and the VPU interfaced to the updated CDU are updated as well as the composite position. Waypoint Coordinates VERIFY for reasonability. 13.CHECK If Update Desired: #OFF* 060. BACK Key .INSERT.INSERT LAST TK value or averaged value. 15. ENTER Key .DEPRESS. OFFSET WPT WAYPOINT RAD DIS 1/1 10. ENTER Key . provided significant changes to aircraft track or groundspeed have not been made. the pilot should estimate the track and distance traveled since the loss of power. 14. NAV.DEPRESS to return to HOLD Page. If Update Not Desired: 18. HDG. Recorded or Estimated Radial .

3. The ICAO identifiers stored in the database can not be used for personalized waypoints. The display will change to the appropriate FLIGHT PLAN or DIRECT Page. the RAD and DIS can be changed. (Figure 3-212) Latitude. Line Select Key . and hundredths). PILOT ENTERED WPT Page will appear. 3-132 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.INSERT. Figure 3-212 6. Creating Pilot Entered (Personalized) Waypoints: 1. 0 Dec/96 . NOTE: If an offset waypoint from a pilot entered waypoint is programmed. Attempting to enter more than 999 pilot entered waypoints in memory causes MEM FULL to be displayed on the FLIGHT PLAN Page. Personalized IDENT.INSERT (E or W first. 4. Longitude. refer to the procedure for Creating a Flight Plan or Modifying a Flight Plan.DEPRESS. Select the desired Flight Plan and position the cursor over the desired field. If necessary.DEPRESS. but the coordinates cannot be manually inserted. ENTER Key. then degrees. Repeat Steps 4 .DEPRESS. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to position the cursor over POS field.DEPRESS. Changing Pilot Entered (Personalized) Waypoints: 1. Personalized IDENT. ENTER Key. 2.INSERT.6 above. degrees. minutes. The message light will flash and WPT MEM FULL will be displayed on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page. 944 WPTS AVAIL PILOT ENTERED WPT WAYPOINT POS GLOBAL --------------> 4. 2.System Operation The CDU has non-volatile storage for up to 999 waypoints which are retained in memory ONLY if the waypoints are entered on a Stored Flight Plan. ENTER Key. and hundredths). 5. then minutes.INSERT (N or S first. 3.

Desired Distance-INSERT (NM and tenths. 4. Rev.CMK CHAD* < KHART 19DFW < ELD MEI < DEPART XFILL ARRIVE SELECT < APPROACH ERASE < NOTE: More than one offset waypoint is allowed from one parent. Parent Waypoint does not exist in CDU memory or in database and must be defined on a Flight Plan Page. 1.0 will be displayed.0 will be loaded automatically. 6. (Figure 3213) FLIGHT PLAN 6 1/2 KDAL . *A1.9 NM maximum). 2. Desired Radial. If a of a degree is desired. > > Figure 3-213 NOTE: If field blinks. The known point (parent waypoint) may be any stored personalized or database waypoint. all 4 digits must be entered. 0775 will be displayed as 077. i. 077. ENTER Key-DEPRESS. ENTER Key-DEPRESS. or it uses the calculated magnetic variation of the parent waypoint. ENTER Key-DEPRESS.System Operation CREATING AN OFFSET WAYPOINT This procedure enables the system to create a waypoint at a given radial and distance from a known point. An offset waypoint may be inserted in any Waypoint IDENT field.5.e. Parent Waypoint IDENTINSERT with an * following the entry. etc. 3001 will be displayed as 300. Since the magnetic variation and station declination may not be the same at a given Navaid. Position the cursor over the desired waypoint IDENT field. The degrees can be entered as whole numbers and the . All waypoints defined by a VHF Navaid in the National/International Airspace System are based on the VHF Navaid station declination. if available. type 77. using *.. 5. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-133 . 1999. as identifying notation. *1. the calculated position and the defined FMS position may differ. 3.1 etc. NOTE: The offset waypoint uses station declination. The offset waypoint is retained in memory after system shutdown ONLY if entered on a Stored Flight Plan.INSERT.

3-134 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. Enter the desired route spacing in nautical miles.DEPRESS. 60NM is normal.20 W105 37.00 818 WPTS AVAIL Figure 3-214 PERFORMING FDE PREDICTION FOR OCEANIC/REMOTE OPERATION This procedure must be performed prior to departure for a flight plan involving Oceanic/Remote operation where GPS is to be the sole source of navigation.3 > 8.System Operation 7. 6. NOTE: An Offset Waypoint is used in the same manner as any other waypoint. 5. 1. POS N 38 37. 4. PLAN 7/8 FDE DEPART DT 20 DEC 95 DEPART GMT --:-ROUTE SPACING -EXPECTED GS --START FDE WPT ----END FDE WPT ----EXCLUDE SATS (QTY 0) PREDICTION UNAVAIL < < < < Figure 3-215 NOTE: The date entered may be up to six months either side of the current date.VERIFY for reasonability. POS Coordinates. 3.DEPRESS.0 12. Enter the departure time for which FDE prediction desired. ENTER Key . The maximum segment length for which FDE prediction can be calculated is 25 hours at a ground speed of 100 Kts. (Figure 3-214) ENTER Key-DEPRESS. OFFSET WPT WAYPOINT RAD DIS 1/1 CHAD* 030. 0 Dec/96 . PLAN Key . Enter the departure date for which FDE prediction is desired. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to display PLAN 7/8 FDE Page. Line Select Key DEPRESS if necessary to place the cursor over the DEPART DT field. See Figure 3-215 2.

DEPRESS. 10. 12. Pressing the BACK Key will cycle through the waypoints on the active flight plan. 14. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor in the SAT # field. go to EXCLUDED SATS LIST Step 15. ENTER Key DEPRESS to display the FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1/1 Page. ENTER Key . 13.DEPRESS. Dashes are displayed prior to the last waypoint on the flight plan. The satellite number is now displayed in the EXCLUDED SATS LIST field. 15. The BACK and dashes operate the same here as in the previous step. 18. SAT #-< < OK? ENTER Figure 3-216 17. See Figure 3216 16. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-135 . ENTER Key . Pressing ENTER while the dashes are displayed will clear the start and end waypoints. resulting in an undefined Oceanic/Remote segment. Rev. 8. Enter the ending waypoint of the active flight plan leg for which FDE prediction is being calculated.System Operation 7. ENTER Key .DEPRESS. DEPRESS the lower right Line Select Key and proceed to Step 20. ENTER Key . Enter the satellite number to be excluded. If no satellites are to be excluded from the FDE prediction. If specific satellites are to be excluded from FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1/1 the FDE prediction. 9. 11. Enter the starting waypoint of the active flight plan leg for which FDE prediction is being calculated. ENTER Key . Enter the expected ground speed in knots. A value of 100 to 999 Kts may be entered.DEPRESS.DEPRESS.

System Operation NOTE: Entering a number already listed and pressing ENTER will remove the number from the list. ENTER Key DEPRESS when all desired satellites are entered. 0 Dec/96 . START CALC? ENTER is displayed at the bottom of the screen. 19. PLAN 7/8 FDE Page will again be displayed. 20. Pressing the Line Select Key next to CLEAR ALL and pressing ENTER will remove all satellites from the exclusion list. See Figure 3218 FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1/1 EXCLUDED SATS LIST 12 14 02 16 19 22 07 SAT #02 CLEAR ALL OK? ENTER < < Figure 3-217 PLAN 7/8 FDE DEPART DT 25 DEC 95 DEPART GMT 13:00 ROUTE SPACING 35 EXPECTED GS 300 START FDE WPT JFK END FDE WPT EBBR EXCLUDE SATS (QTY 0) START CALC? ENTER < < < < Figure 3-218 3-136 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

COMPUTING .System Operation 21.STANDBY will flash while FDE prediction is being calculated and the percentage completed will be shown.STANDBY 51" COMPLETE CANCEL COMPUTE < Figure 3-219 PLAN 8/8 FDE COMPUTATION FDE AVAILABLE NAV AVAILABLE GPS PRIMARY MEANS NAV OK Figure 3-220 PLAN 8/8 FDE COMPUTATION FDE UNAVAILABLE NAV UNAVAILABLE GPS PRIMARY MEANS NAV NOT ALLOWED Figure 3-221 Rev. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-137 . PLAN 8/8 FDE COMPUTATION Page is now displayed. an FDE and NAV AVAILABLE or UNAVAILABLE message will be displayed as shown in Figures 3-220 and 3-221. PLAN 8/8 FDE COMPUTATION COMPUTING . When the prediction calculation is complete. ENTER Key DEPRESS.

System Operation THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 3-138 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. 0 Dec/96 .

The Loran-C chains are defined as follows: GRI 9990 9980 9970 9960 9940 9610 8990 8970 8940 8290 7990 7980 7970 7960 7930 5990 5970 5930 4990 Rev. 0 Dec/96 STATIONS MXYZ MWX MWXYZ MWXYZ MWXY MVWXYZ MVWXYZ MWXY MW MWXY MXYZ MWXYZ MWXYZ MXYZ MWX MXYZ MWXY MXYZ MXY MNEMONIC N PAC ICELND NW PAC NE USA WC USA SOCUS N SAUD GT LKE FRANCE NOCUS MED SE USA NORWAY GLF AK N ATLN WC CAN KOREA EC CAN C PAC LORAN-C CHAIN NORTH PACIFIC ICELANDIC NORTH WEST PACIFIC NORTHEAST USA WEST COAST USA SOUTH CENTRAL USA NORTH SAUDI ARABIA GREAT LAKES FRANCE NORTH CENTRAL USA MEDITERRANEAN SEA SOUTH EAST USA NORWEGIAN SEA GULF OF ALASKA NORTH ATLANTIC (LABRADOR SEA) WEST COAST CANADA KOREAN SEA OF JAPAN EAST COAST CANADA CENTRAL PACIFIC GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 4-1 . The Loran-C sensor will display DR when the signal conditions and geometry position the aircraft outside the LOA. The Loran-C chains used by the LCS are listed on the Loran Sensor Status Page by their four-digit GRI (Group Repetition Interval) and a mnemonic for the chain. if the aircraft flies from inside an LOA boundary to outside. navigation is possible beyond LOAs. on the proper cycle). However.e.LOA Maps and VLF/OMEGA Transmitter Sites SECTION 4 LORAN-C OPERATING AREAS (LOA) AND VLF/OMEGA TRANSMITTER SITES LORAN-C OPERATING AREAS (LOA) Loran-C Operating Areas are areas where the sensor can acquire the Loran-C signals with the high degree of confidence needed for navigation (i. and continuous signal reception is maintained.

Figure 4-17 displays the Loran-C Automatic Deselection Boundary map. Figure 4-2 displays expected coverage for various chains. IFR operation relying on Loran-C is limited to those specific areas defined in the aircraft Flight Manual Supplement. It is the operator’s responsibility to determine when the Loran-C sensor should be excluded from the composite position solution by manually deselecting the sensor.LOA Maps and VLF/OMEGA Transmitter Sites The following maps depict areas where Loran-C coverage is expected. 0 Dec/96 . 4-2 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. Figure 4-1 displays the approved IFR coverage for North America. Figure 4-3 displays the approved IFR coverage for the North Atlantic area. However. Figures 4-4 through 4-16 display single chain LOA coverage useful for navigation in the manual mode.

0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 4-3 .LOA Maps and VLF/OMEGA Transmitter Sites Figure 4-1 IFR North American Coverage (Dual Chain–AUTO Mode) Rev.

0 Dec/96 .LOA Maps and VLF/OMEGA Transmitter Sites Figure 4-2 Expected North American Coverage (Dual Chain–AUTO Mode) 4-4 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

North Atlantic (7930).LOA Maps and VLF/OMEGA Transmitter Sites Figure 4-3 Icelandic (9980). and France (8940) Chains (Dual Chain–AUTO Mode) Rev. Norwegian Sea (7970). 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 4-5 .

0 Dec/96 .LOA Maps and VLF/OMEGA Transmitter Sites M ST PAUL ISLAND X ATTU Y PORT CLARENCE Z NARROW CAPE Figure 4-4 North Pacific Chain 9990 and other West Coast Chains (Dual Chain–AUTO Mode) 4-6 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 4-7 .LOA Maps and VLF/OMEGA Transmitter Sites M WILLIAMS LAKE X SHOAL COVE Y GEORGE Z PORT HARDY Figure 4-5 Canadian West Coast Chain GRI 5990 (Single Chain–MANUAL Mode) Rev.

0 Dec/96 .LOA Maps and VLF/OMEGA Transmitter Sites M FALLON W GEORGE X MIDDLETOWN Y SEARCHLIGHT Figure 4-6 U.S. West Coast Chain GRI 9940 (Single Chain–MANUAL Mode) 4-8 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

Chain GRI 8290 (Single Chain–MANUAL Mode) Rev.S.LOA Maps and VLF/OMEGA Transmitter Sites M HAVRE W BAUDETTE X GILLETTE Y WILLIAMS LAKE Figure 4-7 North Central U. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 4-9 .

Chain GRI 9610 (Single Chain–MANUAL Mode) 4-10 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.S.LOA Maps and VLF/OMEGA Transmitter Sites M BOISE CITY X LAS CRUCES V GILLETTE Y RAYMONDVILLE W SEARCHLIGHT Z GRANGEVILLE Figure 4-8 South Central U. 0 Dec/96 .

Chain GRI 7980 (Single Chain–MANUAL Mode) Rev.LOA Maps and VLF/OMEGA Transmitter Sites M MALONE X RAYMONDVILLE W GRANGEVILLE Y JUPITER Z CAROLINA BEACH Figure 4-9 Southeast U.S. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 4-11 .

LOA Maps and VLF/OMEGA Transmitter Sites M SENECA X NANTUCKET W CARIBOU Y CAROLINA BEACH Z DANA Figure 4-10 Northeast U. 0 Dec/96 .S. Chain GRI 9960 (Single Chain–MANUAL Mode) 4-12 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 4-13 .LOA Maps and VLF/OMEGA Transmitter Sites M DANA W MALONE X SENECA Y BAUDETTE Figure 4-11 Great Lakes Chain GRI 8970 (Single Chain–MANUAL Mode) Rev.

0 Dec/96 .LOA Maps and VLF/OMEGA Transmitter Sites M CARIBOU X NANTUCKET Y CAPE RACE Z FOX HARBOUR Figure 4-12 Canadian East Coast Chain GRI 5930 (Single Chain–MANUAL Mode) 4-14 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

LOA Maps and VLF/OMEGA Transmitter Sites M JOHNSON ISLAND X UPOLU PT Y KURE ISLAND Figure 4-13 Central Pacific Chain GRI 4990 (AUTO or MANUAL Mode) Rev. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 4-15 .

0 Dec/96 .LOA Maps and VLF/OMEGA Transmitter Sites Figure 4-14 Northwest Pacific Chain GRI 9970 and Korean Sea of Japan Chain GRI 5970 (Dual Chain–AUTO Mode) 4-16 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 4-17 .LOA Maps and VLF/OMEGA Transmitter Sites Figure 4-15 North Saudi Arabia GRI 8990 (AUTO or MANUAL Mode) Rev.

0 Dec/96 .LOA Maps and VLF/OMEGA Transmitter Sites M SELLIA MARINA X LAMPEDUSA Y KARGABARUN Z ESTARTIT Figure 4-16 Mediterranean Sea Chain GRI 7990 (AUTO or MANUAL Mode) 4-18 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 4-19 .LOA Maps and VLF/OMEGA Transmitter Sites Figure 4-17 Loran-C Automatic Deselection Boundary Rev.

Japan Rev. Argentina Darriman. North Dakota USA Reunion Island. England Cutler. Indian Ocean Gulfo Nuevo. Hawaii USA LaMoure. Africa Haiku. Hawaii USA Rugby. 0 Dec/96 4-20 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System . Norway Liberia. Maine USA Lualualei. Australia Tsushima. England OMEGA NAVIGATIONAL NETWORK LETTER DESIGNATION NORWAY LIBERIA HAWAII NORTH DAKOTA LA REUNION ARGENTINA AUSTRALIA JAPAN (NOR) (LIB) (HAW) (DAK) (REN) (ARG) (AUS) (JPN) Aldra.LOA Maps and VLF/OMEGA Transmitter Sites VLF/OMEGA TRANSMITTER SITES VLF COMMUNICATIONS STATIONS LETTER DESIGNATION WASHINGTON USA AUSTRALIA ANTHORNE MAINE HAWAII GREAT BRITAIN (WSH) (AUS) (ANT) (MNE) (HAW) (GBR) or PUERTO RICO ANNAPOLIS (PTR) (ANN) Puerto Rico Annapolis. Maryland USA Jim Creek. Washington Northwest Cape. Australia Anthorne.

DO NOT TURN OFF POWER TO STOP THE UPDATE. < DATA BASE UPDATE TYPE:WW DISK:1/3 REVISION: 3-95 EXPIRES: 13 MAR 95 ENTER CHOICE: 1 BEGIN UPDATE 2 RESTART NAV (REMOVE DISK) 4. With cursor over option 1. ON Key . TO UPDATE < Figure 5-1 CAUTION: IF AN INTERRUPTION OF THE UPDATE PROCESS IS DESIRED. Figure 5-1 appears after SELF TEST. then “COMPLETED X. The Update . Line Select or 1 Key . the message “INITIALIZING” appears for about 1 minute. 3. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 5-1 . depress the Line Select or 2 Key to select restart NAV. 2.DEPRESS to select BEGIN UPDATE.X%” appears indicating the update is in progress.8% Figure 5-2 Rev. ENTER Key DEPRESS. Insert current Data Base Disk #1 into the DTU or PDTU. (Figure 5-2) UPDATING DATA BASE TYPE:WW DISK:1/3 REVISION: 3-95 EXPIRES: 13 MAR 95 < < COMPLETED 2. 6. Apply aircraft power. 5.Data Base Page and. REMOVE THE UPDATE DISK. if required. If applicable.Database Update SECTION 5 DATABASE UPDATE DATA BASE UPDATE PROCEDURES 1. connect DTU or PDTU. If update is not desired.DEPRESS to turn on system.

8. The “CONTINUE LOADING” option will be displayed (Figure 54). NOTE: The number of Data Base Disks will vary depending on the Data Base type and date. ENTER keyDEPRESS to continue. 10. After Data Base Disk #1 is loaded. Following the Data Base update. Figure 5-2 reappears and the update continues. the message “INSERT DISK #2” is displayed (Figure 5-3). Remove Data Base Disk #1 from the DTU or PDTU. 11. With cursor over option 1. 9. Repeat steps 8 and 9 for all Data Base Disks. 0 Dec/96 . Line Select or 1 keyDEPRESS to select “CONTINUE LOADING”. the message “TESTING” appears and a test of the Data Base update is performed (Figure 5-5).Database Update 7. Insert Data Base Disk #2 into the DTU or PDTU. INSERT DISK 2 PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE LOADING Figure 5-3 UPDATING DATA BASE TYPE:WW DISK:2/3 REVISION: 3-95 EXPIRES: 13 MAR 95 ENTER CHOICE: 1 CONTINUE LOADING 2 RESTART NAV (REMOVE DISK) < < Figure 5-4 UPDATING DATA BASE TYPE:WW DISK:3/3 REVISION: 3-95 EXPIRES: 13 MAR 95 < < TESTING Figure 5-5 5-2 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

Update Disk . Be sure Data Base Disk #1 is in DTU or PDTU. 1. IF UPDATE FAILS If the database update fails. Figure 5-7 is displayed.REMOVE. Depress the 1 Key then ENTER Key to retry the update or use the following procedure. Figure 5-6 is displayed. 12. Turn system OFF. Turn system ON and retry Update using UPDATE PROCEDURE. Sometimes when a retry is initiated. a display such as that shown in Figure 5-8 may be seen. 2. ENTER CHOICE: 1 RETRY UPDATE < (INSERT DISK 1) 2 RESTART NAV < (REMOVE DISK) Figure 5-8 Rev. Turn system OFF or DEPRESS ENTER Key to restart navigation. 3. Update Disk .Database Update WHEN UPDATE IS COMPLETE If the update is successful. Steps 1-10.INSERT Data Base Disk #1 into DTU or PDTU. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 5-3 . UPDATE DISK INVALID UPDATE COMPLETE PRESS ENTER TO RESTART NAV Figure 5-6 UPDATE ABORTED ENTER CHOICE: 1 RETRY UPDATE < (INSERT DISK 1) 2 RESTART NAV < (REMOVE DISK) Figure 5-7 4.

0 Dec/96 .Database Update THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 5-4 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

VNAV Altitude Constraint) Barometric Altitude Basic Operating Weight Bearing to Waypoint Bright Rev. Airport Reference Point Antenna Switching Unit Air Traffic Control Automatic Satellite Azimuth Relative to Aircraft Position B Baro BASIC OP WT BRG BRT AT or BELOW (Ref. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 6-1 .List of Abbreviations & Definitions SECTION 6 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS DEFINITION A ADC ADF AFIS AFM AHRS ALT APRCH AR ARINC ARP ASU ATC AUTO AZ AT or ABOVE (Ref. to VNAV Altitude Constraint) Air Data Computer Automatic Direction Finder Airborne Flight Information System Aircraft Flight Manual Attitude Heading Reference System Altitude Approach DME Arc Aeronautical Radio. Inc.

List of Abbreviations & Definitions DEFINITION CDI CDU CH CLIMB GRAD CRUISE ALT Course Deviation Indicator Control Display Unit Channel Current Aircraft Climb Performance in feet per Nautical Mile Cruise Altitude d DB DEF DIF DIR DIS DME DN DTK Direct To (Laterally) Database Default Difference Direct Distance Distance Measuring Equipment Down Desired Track EFIS ECD EL ELEV ENRTE EST CROSSING ETA ETA @ ETE EXP Electronic Flight Instrument System Envelope to Cycle Discrepancy Satellite Elevation Above the Horizon Elevation Enroute Estimated Crossing Altitude Estimated Time of Arrival Estimated Time of Arrival at Destination Estimated Time Enroute Expires GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. 0 Dec/96 6-2 .

Exclusion meaning the capability of the system to exclude one or more failed satellites from the prediction solution.includes NMU. Flight Management System . Flight Level Final Approach Fix Fault Detection and Exclusion. Detection meaning the capability of the system to detect a satellite failure that will affect navigation. 0 Dec/96 Heading Horizontal Dilution of Precision Satellite Health (Good or Bad) GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 6-3 . to VNAV Altitude Constraint) Greenwich Mean Time Global Positioning System Group Repetition Interval Groundspeed HDG HDOP HLTH Rev. CDU and optional RPU Flight Path Angle Flight Plan Feet per minute From Waypoint Frequency feet FMS FPA FPL FPM FR FREQ FT G GMT GPS GRI GS Glide path (Ref. thus.List of Abbreviations & Definitions DEFINITION FCF FL FAF FDE Final Course (Alignment) Fix. preventing a satellite failure from affecting navigation.

0 Dec/96 .List of Abbreviations & Definitions DEFINITION HP HPE HSI Holding Pattern Horizontal Position Error (A Quality Factor for the GPS.) Horizontal Situation Indicator IAF ICAO IDENT ILS INBOUND CRS INS IRS Initial Approach Fix International Civil Aviation Organization Identifier Instrument Landing System Inbound Holding or Procedure Turn course Inertial Navigation System Inertial Reference System Jeppesen Name of Navigation Database Source KEY KG kHz CDU Keyboard Entry Kilogram/Kilograms Kilohertz LAT LB LCS LEG DIST LON LORAN Latitude Pound/Pounds LORAN-C System Leg Distance Longitude LOng RAnge Navigation 6-4 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

List of Abbreviations & Definitions DEFINITION MAG MAG VAR MAN MAN ALT MAP MHz MSG Magnetic Magnetic Variation Manual Entry Manual Altitude Missed Approach Point Megahertz Message NAV NAVAID NDB Navigation Navigation Aid (Typically a Radio Station Providing VOR and/or DME Position Data) NAV Database or Non-Directional Beacon NM NOTAM NX NXT Nautical Miles Notice to Airman Next Waypoint Next OM Outer Marker POS PRESEL ALT #PRESL PREV or PRV PRN PT Rev. 0 Dec/96 Position (Present or Waypoint) Preselect Altitude Preselected Altitude Profile Point Previous Pseudo Random Noise (GPS Satellite Number) Procedure Turn GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 6-5 .

List of Abbreviations & Definitions DEFINITION RAD RAIM REM REQ FPM RCVD RMI RNAV RNG RPU RW Radial Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring Remaining Required Feet Per Minute Received Radio Magnetic Indicator Area Navigation or type of Non Precision Approach Range Receiver Processor Unit (Contains the VLF Omega) Runway SAT SID SM SNR STAR SXTK Satellite (PRN) Number Standard Instrument Departure Software MOD Level Signal to Noise Ratio Standard Terminal Arrival Selected Crosstrack T TACAN TAS TK TKE True ( Heading or Track) or whether a Satellite is being tracked or not. 0 Dec/96 . TACtical Air Navigation True Airspeed Track Angle Track Error 6-6 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 6-7 .List of Abbreviations & Definitions DEFINITION #TOC #TOD TRANS LEVEL TRCK TRMNL Top of Climb Profile Point Top of Descent Profile Point Transition Level (The Altitude at which Altitudes Become Flight Levels) Track (Satellite Status) Terminal VAR VERT DEV VHF VLF VNAV VOR VORTAC VPU Magnetic Variation Vertical Deviation Very High Frequency Very Low Frequency Vertical Navigation VHF Omnirange VHF Omnidirectional Range TACAN VORTAC Position Unit Waypoint WPT WW A Point Defined in Space Used in Navigation Waypoint NDB Worldwide Coverage XPDR XTK Transponder Crosstrack Rev.

0 Dec/96 .List of Abbreviations & Definitions THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 6-8 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

Rev.SECTION 7 AFIS AIRBORNE FLIGHT INFORMATION SYSTEM AND SATELLITE DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM This section applies only to aircraft equipped with an AFIS system. and its operation. The purpose of this section is to acquaint users of AFIS Flight Plan and Weather Advisory Services with the equipment. as they contain elements provided by the National Weather Service and information supplied by the pilot. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System AFIS Operation . Therefore. it is the responsibility of the pilot in command to exercise reasonable and prudent judgment in the use of these ADVISORY services. AFIS services are ADVISORY only. its capabilities.

0 Dec/96 .THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System AFIS Operation Rev.

but deteriorates below this flight level. SITA covers Europe. These interfaces consist of three major capabilities: 1. the Aleutians. Southeast Asia. 3 Oct/02 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-1 . Data Transfer Unit (DTU). requesting pre-departure clearance. AFIS interfaces with ARINC. ARINC provides coverage within the continental United States. including the amount of processing time and the length of the message. Depending on the nature of the update request. Puerto Rico. effect the turnaround time for information. Saipan. Digital transfer of AFIS Flight Plan and weather data into the Nav Management System for display and performance monitoring on the GNS-X C129 Color CDU. the Caribbean. and parts of Canada. Data Management Unit (DMU). Alaska. Many variables. performance updates. data link coverage is excellent above Flight Level 200. the pilot should expect a turnaround time of approximately five minutes when using the VHF network and twelve minutes when using the satellite network. and Antenna Switching Unit (ASU). the South Pacific. Guam. AFIS consists of the following components: Global Data Center (GDC). and sending or receiving messages.AFIS Operation DESCRIPTION AFIS is an Airborne Flight Information System that provides integrated flight planning and performance management interfaces to the GNS-X C129 Nav Management System. Mexico. Rev. Access to ground based Global Data Center computers from a Personal Computer for the purpose of generating or retrieving performance optimized flight plans and current aviation weather. weather. Satellite data link coverage is excellent both on the ground and in-flight between 70° North and 70° South. and 3. 2. SITA and AVICOM VHF networks and the Inmarsat satellite network to provide a communication link between the aircraft and the Global Data Center. In most areas while using the VHF networks. and South and Central America and AVICOM covers Japan. Hawaii. Air/ground computer link interfacing the GNS-X C129 Nav Management System to the ground based Global Data Center computers for the purpose of providing enroute flight plan.

Pressing the annunciator again. the ASU defaults to the voice transmitter. if AFIS is configured for a shared antenna. If AFIS is configured for non-shared antenna or there is no configuration module. Pressing the AFIS annunciator on the instrument panel switches the transmit side of the antenna to the DMU data transmitter. DATA MANAGEMENT UNIT (DMU) The Data Management Unit (DMU) computer formats the disk information and presents it to the GNS-X C129 for display on the CDU. This radio is tuned automatically by the DMU computer to the appropriate ground station for the purpose of transmitting data to and receiving data from the Global Data Center while in flight. and message forwarding services to AFIS operators on a subscription basis.5 inch micro floppy disk drive mounted in the cockpit. The ASU switches the transmit side of the antenna between the DMU data transmitter and the VHF voice transmitter. The DMU also incorporates a data quality VHF transceiver. During power up.AFIS Operation GLOBAL DATA CENTER (GDC) The Global Data Center (GDC) is a ground based computer facility built and operated by Honeywell for the purpose of providing flight planning. aviation weather. 7-2 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. or pressing the "push to talk" button on the VHF communications radio switches the transmit side of the antenna back to the voice transmitter. The GDC communicates with the operator via data quality telephone lines to a Personal Computer as well as through the ACARS and satellite networks directly to the aircraft in flight. 0 Dec/96 . ANTENNA SWITCHING UNIT (ASU) The Antenna Switching Unit (ASU) is required for those installations where the DMU transceiver shares an existing VHF communications antenna. DATA TRANSFER UNIT (DTU) The Data Transfer Unit (DTU) is a 3. during power up the system will assume an antenna is dedicated to AFIS. the AFIS Flight Plan and weather data are transferred to and stored in the Data Management Unit. Once the GNS-X C129 is switched on and the disk inserted in the DTU.

(Figure 7-1) NO DISK: Either no disk was inserted into the DTU prior to power up or the DTU cannot read the disk. The SCU also contains information to allow it to tune the appropriate satellite operating region automatically and to the appropriate ground stations. this page appears directly after the Initialization Page. The DTU reads the inserted disk and displays one of the following messages: NO AFIS FLT PLANS ON DISK: There are no AFIS Flight Plans stored on the disk. and Satellite Antenna. Rev.AFIS Operation The Satellite Data Communications System consists of the following components: Satellite Communications Unit (SCU). 0 Dec/96 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-3 . SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS UNIT (SCU) The Satellite Communications Unit (SCU) incorporates the satellite transceiver and instruction for transmitting to and receiving data from the satellite network. High Power Amplifier/ Low Noise Amplifier (HPA/LNA). SATELLITE ANTENNA The antenna is designed to meet the Inmarsat system specification. AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/4 NO AFIS FLT PLANS ON DISK Figure 7-1 AIRCRAFT TYPE: The Global designated aircraft type as transferred from the disk or obtained by an Update or Recall procedure. PAGE DISPLAY DEFINITIONS AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST PAGE If the GNS-X C129 is configured for AFIS. HIGH POWER AMPLIFIER/ LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER (HPA/LNA) The High Power Amplifier/ Low Noise Amplifier (HPA/LNA) amplifies transmitted and received information while minimizing noise. READING DISK: The DTU is transferring data from the disk to the DMU.

FL: AFIS planned flight level for leg being flown.AFIS Operation NOTE: Once the system is initialized. (Figure 73) The FROM waypoint can be replaced by DIR TO for DIRECT TO. 7-4 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. AFIS FLT PLAN LIST: A list of AFIS generated Flight Plan origin/destination identifiers with date of issue. UPDA-XXXX: (Where XXXX is an ident) Indicates a Flight Plan Update for an active Flight Plan has occurred. AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/4 < < < < KABE-KVNY KAPA-KTEB KBUR-KLGA KBZN-KLAN KDAL-KDEN KDAL-KJFK 04JAN9O 04JAN90 04JAN90 04JAN90 04JAN90 04JAN90 Figure 7-2 REPLACE ACTIVE FPL?: Allows a selected AFIS Flight Plan to replace an existing Active Flight Plan. FLIGHT PLAN PROGRESS (NAVIGATION PAGE 5) HEC:KVNY: Current FROM and TO waypoints. NOTE: Field is dashes when aircraft is projected to be climbing or descending. the page appears between the Active Flight Plan Page and the first GNS-X C129 FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page. LOADING FLIGHT PLAN: The system is loading a selected AFIS Flight Plan. PLAN: Planned NAVIGATION 5/5 HEC:KVNY PLAN F REM 2150 FF P/E 625 ETA 00:06 TAS 460 GS 448 WIND 330/ 40 FL390 ACT 3380 0 18:52 460 460 360/ 0 < Figure 7-3 This column is AFIS planned data either transferred from the disk or received via the data link. (Figure 7-2) NOTE: Additional pages can be accessed when more than 6 Flight Plans are listed by DEPRESSING the FPL Key to access page. 0 Dec/96 .

FF P/E: Fuel Flow per Engine Planned: AFIS planned fuel flow per engine for leg displayed. NOTE: Actual fields become dashes when cursor is positioned over the leg identifiers. (Figure 7-5). ACT: Actual This column is GNS-X C129 data.AFIS Operation NOTE: Planned fields become dashes when no planned data is available for the current leg. < < NAVIGATION 5/5 DIR TO:PSB PLAN F REM -----FF P/E ---ETA ----TAS --GS --FL390 ACT 11952 0 05:26 300 300 Figure 7-4 NAVIGATION 5/5 HEC:KVNY F REQ FF P/E ETE TAS GS PLAN 375 625 0+16 460 448 FL390 ACT ----------------- Figure 7-5 NOTE: Field changes to F REQ when cursor is positioned over the leg identifiers F REQ: Fuel Required Planned: The AFIS planned fuel required to fly the leg displayed. ETA: Estimated Time of Arrival Planned: The sum of the AFIS planned time enroute for the leg displayed and the actual time of arrival over the previous waypoint. (Figure 7-4). This is an averaged quantity. Actual: The estimated time of arrival over TO waypoint based on current groundspeed. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-5 . Rev. Actual: The total fuel on board as calculated by the GNS-X C129. F REM: Fuel Remaining Planned: AFIS planned fuel remaining at aircraft present position based on DMU interpolated values. Actual: Total actual fuel flow divided by the number of engines.

GS: Groundspeed Planned: AFIS planned groundspeed for leg displayed. (Figure 7-6) ETE: Estimated Time Enroute Planned: The AFIS planned time enroute for leg displayed. The GS value shown is the same as on NAVIGATION Page 1.AFIS Operation NOTE: Field changes to ETE when cursor is positioned over the leg identifiers. and route Operator inputs used in generating Flight Plan Performance bias entered by operator 1 2 3 < 4 5 < 6 7 < 8 < AFIS MENU AFIS FLT PLAN SIGMENTS TERMINAL WX WINDS ALOFT RECALL AFIS FPL SEND AFIS MSG DISPL AFIS MSG OPERATING MODES Figure 7-7 7-6 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. 0 Dec/96 . Actual: Actual wind for leg as computed by the system. Direction is displayed relative to True North with velocity in knots. WIND: Planned: AFIS forecast wind for leg displayed. TAS: True Airspeed Planned: AFIS planned true airspeed for leg displayed. AFIS MENU PAGE AFIS FLT PLAN: Review of the AFIS Flight Plan displaying: • • • • Fuel and time requirements Weights. The TAS value shown is the same as on NAVIGATION Page 3. flight level. Direction is displayed relative to True North with velocity in knots. Actual: Actual groundspeed of the aircraft as calculated by the GNSX C129. < NAVIGATION 5/5 PGS:HEC PLAN F REQ 624 FF P/E 619 ETE 0+20 TAS 457 GS 452 WIND 340/ 39 FL390 ACT -------------------/--- Figure 7-6 Actual: Actual true airspeed of aircraft.

AFIS Operation SIGMETS: Review of all SIGMETS(SIGnificant METeorology) transferred via the disk and/or received via the data link. TERMINAL WX: Review of all Terminal Weather transferred via the disk and/or received via the data link. RECALL AFIS FPL: Allows operator to recall a previously accessed flight plan and associated weather from the Global Data Center via the data link. (Figure 7-8) When there is an enroute update to the flight plan. Additional requests can be entered. DISPL AFIS MSG: Allows operator to display flight related messages received via the data link. SEND AFIS MSG: Allows operator to send non-flight related text messages via the satellite data link and flight related text messages via the satellite or VHF data link. 3 Oct/02 AFIS FLT PLAN 1/4 FUEL TIME FR KSNA TO KJFK 8806 4+30 HOLDING --------TO -----------RESERVE 2000 1+03 TOTALS 10806 5+33 Figure 7-8 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-7 . SAT (satellite) NETWORK PRINTER CTRL. AFIS FLT PLAN PAGE 1 FUEL AND TIME REQUIREMENTS FR: The origin airport identifier. the identifier will change to Rev. WINDS ALOFT: Review of all Winds Aloft identifiers transferred via the disk and/or received via the data link. SITA/AVICOM) and if applicable. OPERATING MODES: Allows operator to select operating mode for: • • • • • AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT VHF NETWORK (ARINC. Additional requests can be entered. AFIS FLT PLAN PAGES The AFIS Flight Plan Pages are accessed by selecting Option 1 on the AFIS MENU Page.

TO: The TO waypoint identifier. 0 Dec/96 . 7-8 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. RESERVE TIME: Projected flight time remaining at TO waypoint to consume the displayed RESERVE FUEL. AFIS FLT PLAN 1/4 FUEL TIME FR UPDA TO KJFK 6400 4+04 HOLDING --------TO -----------RESERVE 5563 2+32 TOTALS 11963 6+36 Figure 7-9 TO/TIME: The estimated time enroute in hours and minutes from the FROM waypoint to the TO waypoint as transferred from the disk or updated through the data link. UPDATE refers to the Lat/Lon position of aircraft at time of last update request. HOLDING/TIME: The holding time in hours and minutes as transferred from disk or received via the data link. HOLDING/FUEL: Projected fuel required for Holding Time as transferred from disk or received via the data link. RESERVE FUEL: Projected reserve fuel at TO waypoint as transferred from the disk or received via the data link. (Figure 7-9). TO/FUEL: Projected fuel required from FROM waypoint to TO waypoint as transferred from disk or updated enroute via the data link. TOTALS: Sum of planned enroute and reserve fuel and sum of planned enroute and reserve time. TO/TIME: The estimated time enroute in hours and minutes from TO waypoint to alternate airport as transferred from disk or received via the data link. TO/FUEL: Projected fuel required from TO waypoint to alternate airport as transferred from disk or received via the data link.AFIS Operation UPDATE.

FPL LDWT: Flight planned landing weight of aircraft at destination as transferred from disk or received via the data link.AFIS Operation AFIS FLT PLAN PAGE 2 WEIGHTS. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-9 . (Figure 7-11) NOTE: RAMP WT changes to GROSS WT if there is an automatic FUEL FLOW input. NOTE: Pressing the AFIS or NXT Key displays the remainder of the route (up to 50 waypoints). FUEL REMAINING quantity. Rev. payload. (Figure 7-10) GROSS WT: Sum of basic operating weight. AFIS FLT PLAN 2/4 RAMP WT 30365 FPL LDWT 21559 FLT LVL 410/450 ROUTE KSNA-HEC-PGS-DBLCYS-J148-ONL-J94DBQ-GIJ-J554-CRLPSB-KJFK Figure 7-10 AFIS FLT PLAN 2/4 RAMP WT 30365 FPL LDWT 21559 FLT LVL 410/450 ROUTE KSNA-HEC-PGS-DBLCYS-J148-ONL-J94DBQ-GIJ-J554-CRLPSB-KJFK Figure 7-11 FLT LVL: Planned flight level(s) as transferred from disk or received via the data link. ROUTE: Planned route of flight as computed by Global Data Center and transferred from disk or received via the data link. and fuel remaining as calculated by GNS-X C129. FLIGHT LEVEL AND ROUTE RAMP WT: Planned ramp weight in lbs prior to starting engines as transferred from disk or received via the data link. and input for basic operating weight and PAYLOAD input. UPDATE: Waypoint identifier defining position of aircraft at time of last update request.

(Figure 7-13) BASIC OP WT: AFIS planned basic operating weight as transferred from disk or received via the data link. Figure 7-13 This field changes to UPDATE FUEL when a flight plan is updated and refers to the actual fuel remaining at time of last update request. PERF OPTION: AFIS planned cruise mode as transferred from disk or received via the data link. AFIS FLT PLAN 3/4 FROM UPDA TO KJFK UPDATE TIME 22:03 BASIC OP WT 18959 PAYLOAD 1200 RAMP FUEL 11963 RESERVE FUEL 5563 PERF OPTION M80 7-10 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. Alternate cruise mode options may be requested and updated via the data link. DEP TIME: Estimated time of departure in GMT. TO DEP TIME BASIC OP WT PAYLOAD RAMP FUEL RESERVE FUEL PERF OPTION M80 KJFK 22:00 18959 600 10806 2000 / F Figure 7-12 RAMP FUEL: AFIS planned total trip fuel as transferred from disk or received via data link. FPL RES FUEL: AFIS planned reserve fuel remaining at destination as transferred from disk or received via the data link. 0 Dec/96 . PAYLOAD: AFIS planned payload weight as transferred from disk or received via data link. This field changes to RESERVE FUEL when a flight plan is updated and refers to the updated estimate of fuel remaining at destination. or UPDATE waypoint defining position of aircraft at time of last update AFIS FLT PLAN 3/4 request. This field changes to UPDATE TIME when a flight plan is updated and indicates time of issued update. (Figure 7-12) FROM KSNA TO: Destination waypoint transferred from disk or received via the data link.AFIS Operation AFIS FLT PLAN PAGE 3 OPERATOR INPUTS FROM: Origin airport identifier as transferred from disk or received via the data link.

This page allows a review of all SIGMETS transferred from disk or received via the airborne data link. waypoint. No entry is required if FR is NAT. Figure 7-14 AFIS FLT PLAN 4/4 MIN FLT LVL --MAX FLT LVL --HOLD TIME ----ALTERNATE ---CLIMB F/T 100 -ARRIV F/T 100 5 < AFIS SIGMETS 1/7 FR KSNA TO KJFK CONVECTIVE SIGMET 51C VALID UNTIL 1955Z MO FROM 40S IRK-50WSW SGF Figure 7-15 < AFIS SIGMETS 1/29 FR NAT TO NAT TRACKS FLS 310 370 INCLUSIVE APRIL 01/1130Z TO APRIL 01/1900Z A 63/30 63/40 63/50 Figure 7-16 Rev. waypoint. FR: Desired start VOR. or NAT (North Atlantic Tracks). (Figure 7-14) SIGMETS PAGES AFIS SIGMETS pages are accessed by selecting Option 2 on the AFIS MENU Page. NOTE: Date field will remain blank if no date is supplied on disk or by UPDATE. VORTAC ident. airport. (Figure 7-15 or 7-16) NOTE: Parentheses remain until a SIGMET update is received via the data link. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-11 . DATE: Issue date of SIGMET. This field may be blank if transferred from disk. Lat/Lon or VORTAC ident. SIGMETS may consist of one or more pages of text and display their FAA code names followed by text.AFIS Operation AFIS FLT PLAN PAGE 4 PERFORMANCE BIAS This page allows a review of the operator entered performance bias data transferred from disk or received via the data link. airport. Lat/Lon. TO: Desired end VOR.

NOTE: This field only appears when the FR or TO fields are in parentheses. a weather update request is sent to the Global Data Center via data link. a SIGMET update request is sent to the Global Data Center via data link. AFIS TERMINAL WX < < < < (KSNA) (KSTL) (KMKC) (KENO) (KDQO) > > > > TRANSMIT REQUEST? Figure 7-18 7-12 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. The parentheses disappear when weather updates have been received via the data link. the message NO SIGMETS ON DISK appears. If there are no SIGMETS via a Flight Plan update the message reads NO SIGMETS. VHF or satellite network must also be enabled.AFIS Operation TRANSMIT REQUEST?: When cursor is on this field and ENTER is pressed. TRANSMIT REQUEST?: When cursor is on this field and ENTER is pressed. 0 Dec/96 . DATA LINK DISABLED will appear if the data link is disabled and the request will not be transmitted. The identifiers in parentheses represent pilot entered requests for additional weather not stored in the DMU. Terminal identifiers for which associated weather data is available to review are listed. (Figure 7-18) DATA LINK DISABLED: Aircraft equipped with the Antenna Switching Unit must DEPRESS momentary AFIS annunciator to enable the air to ground data link. (Figure 7-17) TERMINAL WEATHER PAGES < AFIS SIGMETS 1/1 FR KSNA TO KMIA NO SIGMENTS Figure 7-17 The TERMINAL WEATHER Menu Page is accessed by selecting Option 3 on the AFIS MENU Page. If no SIGMETS are on disk.

DATE: Issue date of actual weather. airport. This field may be blank if transferred from disk. They allow review of Terminal Weather by identifier as transferred from disk or received by the Global Data Center via the data link. WINDS ALOFT DATA PAGES These pages are accessed by selecting a wind identifier on the WINDS ALOFT MENU page.AFIS Operation TERMINAL WX DATA PAGES These pages are accessed by selecting a terminal weather identifier on the TERMINAL WEATHER Menu Page. < < < < (SNA ) (STL ) (MKC ) > > > > TRANSMIT REQUEST? Figure 7-20 They allow review of Winds Aloft data by VOR. Weather available for review includes: • • • METAR (Aviation Routine Weather Report) NOTAMS (Notices to Airmen) PIREPS (Pilot Reports) TERMINAL WX > KDEN 1/12 10JAN97 METAR: 10/1710 101703Z COR 04008KT 1SM -SN BR BKN016 BKN025 OVC036 10/1710 M16/M17 A2994 RMK AO2 P0000 TAF: 101308Z 101312 Figure 7-19 WINDS ALOFT PAGES The AFIS WINDS ALOFT Menu Page is accessed by selecting Option 4 on the AFIS MENU Page. Lat/Lon or VORTAC locations. Rev. for which associated weather data is available. airport. waypoint. waypoint. AFIS WINDS ALOFT (ENO ) (DQO ) The WIND identifiers represent VOR. Lat/Lon or VORTAC identifier as transferred from disk or received via the data link. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-13 .

AFIS Operation DATE/TIME: Actual day and time of the issue of the wind information. ETD: Estimated time of departure in GMT of recalled AFIS Flight Plan . FPL-#: A Global Data Center generated Flight Plan number. (Figure 7-22) DATE: Issue date of recalled AFIS Flight Plan. 0 Dec/96 . If FPL# is entered. Entered as an alpha character followed by four numeric digits. This field may be blank if transferred from disk. The number is read 12th day 2356 ZULU. (Figure 7-21) Wind data available to review includes: • • • • Flight Level Wind Direction (True North) Wind Velocity (Knots) Temperature Celsius) (Degrees Figure 7-21 SNA WINDS ALOFT 122356Z 000/ 320/ 290/ 260/ 270/ 280/ 1 2 4 6 9 13 18000 24000 30000 34000 39000 45000 -9 -21 -36 -46 -55 -63 RECALL AFIS FPL PAGE This page is accessed by selecting Option 5 on the AFIS MENU Page. TO: Destination of recalled AFIS Flight Plan. (Figure 7-23) < RECALL AFIS FPL < FPL-# D8751 DATE ETD FR TO TRANSMIT REQUEST? Figure 7-22 RECALL AFIS FPL FPL-# DATE 29MAY91 ETD 12:00 FR KSNA TO KLAX Figure 7-23 7-14 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. FR: Origin of recalled AFIS Flight Plan. This page allows the pilot to recall previously computed AFIS Flight Plan and Weather requests from the Global Data Center via the data link. other entries are not required.

FROM: Sender's identification (name or tail number). the recall request is sent to the Global Data Center via data link. SEND AFIS MESSAGE PAGE This page is accessed by selecting Option 6 on the AFIS MENU Page. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-15 . PPM: Preprogrammed messages that can be stored in non-volatile memory. MESSAGE TEXT: Fifteen lines of text entry available. VHF or satellite network must also be enabled. must DEPRESS momentary AFIS annunciator to enable the air to ground data link. VHF or satellite network must also be enabled. selected and sent without being re-entered. $ % SEND AFIS MSG TO: GLOBAL PPM FR: N214SC #:FAX 752 0604 DELAYED DUE TO WX NEW ETA IS 1400Z > < SEND MESSAGE? > Figure 7-24 Rev. must DEPRESS momentary AFIS annunciator to enable the air to ground data link. See Table A-1 for possible address variations and the method in which the Global Data Center processes the message. ↑ ↓ indicate that pressing the Line Select Key adjacent the arrow will move the cursor in the direction of the arrow. #: Receiver's address. TO: Receiver of message. SEND MESSAGE: When cursor is over this field and ENTER is pressed the message is sent via the data link. (Figure 7-22) DATA LINK DISABLED: Aircraft equipped with the Antenna Switching Unit. Text must be flight related when using the VHF network operating mode.AFIS Operation TRANSMIT REQUEST?: When cursor is on this field and ENTER is pressed. (Figure 7-24) DATA LINK DISABLED: Aircraft equipped with the Antenna Switching Unit.

AFIS Operation

Phone number • GDC will deliver message verbally to given number. AFIS-equipped aircraft • GDC will deliver message to aircraft specified. "A" followed by phone number • GDC will deliver message to PC at given number. "AI" followed by Country Code, City Code, and phone number • GDC will deliver message to PC located outside the US or Canada. "F" followed by phone number • GDC will deliver message to FAX machine at given number "FI" followed by Country Code, City Code and phone number • GDC will deliver message FAX machine located outside the US or Canada. "A" followed by ARINC or SITA address • GDC will deliver message to ARINC or SITA address given. Auto Forward Code • GDC will deliver message to PC, FAX, or ARINC/SITA as defined in GDC database. GDC Code • GDC will search database for phone number and special contact name or message associated with code and deliver message verbally. ADCUS XXX • GDC will search database for customs phone number at specified airport and deliver message verbally. PDC XXX • GDC will search database for pre-departure clearance and forward to aircraft if found. Global Defined Codes • BASEOPS International • • • Air Routing International Universal Weather Jeppesen Data Plan

#206 869 6450 #N4322B #A206 869 6458 #AI4118106530

#F206 869 6464 #FI4118108708

#AHDQGLXH #GWSOPS

#GWSPJC

#ADCUS TEB

#PDC LAX

• GDC •

Medlink Message will be printed at GDC further action.

#BASEOPS or #BOPS #ARC #UNIVERSAL or #UV or #UVAIR #JETPLAN or #DATAPLAN or #JEPPESEN #MEDLINK #GDC

AFIS Addresses Table 1

7-16

GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System

Rev. 0 Dec/96

AFIS Operation
PPM MENU PAGE (PREPROGRAMMED MESSAGES) This page is accessed from the SEND MESSAGE Page by selecting PPM in the upper right hand corner. PPM can only be selected when an entry has been made in the TO or # fields on the SEND MESSAGE Page. The TO, FROM, and # data are used when sending a preprogrammed message. Titles for up to six preprogrammed messages can be listed for selection to review, change, and send. PREPROGRAMMED MESSAGE PAGES These pages display the message text for each preprogrammed message title selected from the PPM MENU Page. Up to seven lines of text may be entered. Preprogrammed Messages will remain in nonvolatile memory and can be removed by editing the title on the PREPROGRAMMED MSG Menu Page.
<

PPM MENU
< <

1 SNA-PRC STD MSG 2 PRC-SNA STD MSG 3 MSG MECH 4 < 5 6 <

Figure 7-25

PREPROGRAMMED MSG NEW ETA MKC**** NEW ETA IS 1300 MKC HAVE A GOOD DAY

<

SEND MESSAGE?

>

Figure 7-26

Rev. 0 Dec/96

GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System

7-17

AFIS Operation
DISPLAY AFIS MSG PAGE The message page is displayed by selecting Option 7 on the AFIS MENU Page. All text messages sent to the tail number of the aircraft being flown appear in this section. Up to 15 pages of text can be stored according to time received, with the newest message appearing first. Messages can originate from: • • • Another AFIS equipped aircraft, third party, or Global Data Center.
DISPLAY AFIS MSG 3/7 7-JUN-90 20:00Z FR:OFFICE TO:CAPTAIN PLEASE CALL HOME ASAP. 7-JUN-90 20:04Z FR:222 TO:111

Figure 7-27

OPERATING MODES PAGE (FOR AFIS USERS EQUIPPED WITH SATELLITE DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM) Operating modes information is accessed by selecting option 8 on the AFIS MENU Page. AUTO REPORT: ON: The aircraft will automatically report position and station ID for weather updates to the Global Data Center via the data link on a timed basis. OFF: The automatic reporting capability has been manually inhibited by the pilot. AUTO WX UPDT (WEATHER UPDATE): ON: The Global Data Center will automatically send weather/wind updates for the displayed idents when new information is issued. OFF: The auto weather update function is not enabled.
AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT VHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK OFF ON ON ON
> > >

ACTIVE LINK: ARINC

Figure 7-28

7-18

GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System

Rev. 3 Oct/02

AFIS Operation
VHF NETWORK: Ground networks that AFIS interfaces with to establish a data link with the Global Data Center. ON: The appropriate VHF network will automatically be selected whenever the aircraft present position is within the specified boundaries. (Figure 7-28) OFF: Network is not enabled.

SAT NETWORK: Satellite network that AFIS interfaces with to establish a data link with the Global Data Center. ON: The appropriate satellite region will automatically be selected whenever the aircraft present position is within the specified boundaries. OFF: Network is not enabled.

PRINTER CTRL Allows access to the Printer Control Page. ACTIVE LINK: Indicates the network in service, i.e. ARINC, SITA, or SATCOM. (Figure 7-29) NONE: All networks are turned OFF or current position does not correspond with the manually selected boundaries.
AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT VHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL OFF ON OFF ON
> > >

ACTIVE LINK: SATCOM

Figure 7-29 NOTE: The VHF network has precedence over the satellite network in areas of shared coverage and must be turned OFF in order for SATCOM to be the Active Link. AUTO REPORT, AUTO WX UPDT and OPERATING MODE selection status are stored in non-volatile memory. If the operator turns to OFF the operator must reselect to turn ON.

Rev. 3 Oct/02

GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System

7-19

AFIS Operation
VHF LINK CONTROL PAGE This page is accessed when the VHF Network is turned ON. ARINC, SITA/AVICOM: Ground networks that AFIS interfaces with to establish a data link with the Global Data Center. AUTO: The VHF network will automatically be selected whenever the aircraft present position is within the appropriate boundaries. (Figure 7-30)
AFIS OPERATING MODES VHF LINK CONTROL ARINC SITA/AVICOM AUTO AUTO
> >

Figure 7-30

MAN (manual): The desired network will be maintained independent of the present position. In manual, the system will only allow transmission when present position is within the appropriate boundaries. All other networks will be turned OFF if one is in MAN. OFF: Network is not enabled.

SAT LINK CONTROL PAGE This page is accessed when the SAT Network is turned ON. SAT COMM: AUTO: The satellite network will automatically be selected whenever the aircraft present position is within the appropriate boundaries and VHF Network is turned OFF or is not in VHF coverage. MAN (manual): The desired region will be maintained independent of the present position. In manual, the system will only allow transmission when present position is within the appropriate boundaries and VHF network is turned OFF or is not in VHF coverage. OFF: Network is not enabled.

7-20

GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System

Rev. 3 Oct/02

AFIS Operation
REGION: The four satellite regions, West Atlantic, East Atlantic, Pacific Ocean and Indian Ocean, that AFIS interfaces with to establish a data link with the Global Data Center. (Figure 7-31) LINK: OPERATIONAL: Message indicating the SAT COMM link is enabled. NONE: Current position does not correspond with the manually selected boundaries or satellite link is not operational. ACTIVATE?: Use to enable satellite network in AUTO or MAN. (Figure 7-32)

$ %

AFIS OPERATING MODES SAT LINK CONTROL SAT COM: MAN REGION: E. ATLANTIC

LINK:OPERATIONAL

Figure 7-31
AFIS OPERATING MODES SAT LINK CONTROL SAT COM: MAN REGION: W. ATLANTIC

LINK:ACTIVATE?

Figure 7-32 OPERATING MODES PAGE (FOR AFIS USERS NOT EQUIPPED WITH SATELLITE DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM) Operating Modes information is accessed by selecting Option 8 on the AFIS MENU Page. AUTO REPORT: ON: The aircraft will automatically report position and station ID for weather updates to the Global Data Center via the data link on a timed basis. OFF: The automatic reporting capability has been manually inhibited by the pilot.

Rev. 0 Dec/96

GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System

7-21

AFIS Operation
AUTO WX UPDT (WEATHER UPDATE): ON: The Global Data Center will automatically send weather/wind updates for the displayed idents when new information is issued. OFF: The auto weather update function is not enabled. ARINC, SITA, AVICOM: Ground networks that AFIS interfaces with to establish a data link with the Global Data Center.

AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT ARINC SITA/AVICOM PRINTER CTRL ON ON AUTO OFF
> > >

ACTIVE LINK: ARINC

Figure 7-33

AUTO: The desired network will automatically be selected whenever the aircraft present position is within the appropriate boundaries. MAN (manual): The desired network will be maintained independent of the present position. In manual, the system will only allow transmission when present position is within the appropriate boundaries. OFF: Network is not enabled.

NOTE: If a ground network is placed in manual mode, all others will go to OFF. PRINTER CTRL Allows access to the Printer Control Page. ACTIVE LINK: Indicates the network in service, i.e. ARINC, SITA, AVICOM. NONE: All networks are turned OFF or current position does not correspond with the selected mode.
AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT ARINC SITA/AVICOM PRINTER CTRL OFF ON OFF AUTO
> > >

ACTIVE LINK: NONE

Figure 7-34

NOTE: AUTO REPORT, AUTO WX UPDT and OPERATING MODE selection status are stored in non-volatile memory. If the operator turns to OFF or MAN, the operator must reselect to turn ON.
Rev. 3 Oct/02

7-22

GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System

PAYLOAD: Current aircraft payload verified or amended by the pilot. FUEL REM: Actual fuel remaining as calculated by the GNS-X C129 or amended by the pilot. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System DATA LINK DISABLED 7-23 .AFIS Operation ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN PAGE (FOR AFIS FLIGHT PLAN UPDATING) AFIS UPDATE: Allows pilot to: • • • Amend an existing AFIS Flight Plan Update SIGMETS Request a new AFIS Flight Plan < < < < ACTIVE FPL 1/1 KSEA . CRUISE MODE: Current aircraft Cruise Mode as verified or amended by the pilot. as entered by the pilot. Rev. TRANSMIT REQUEST: When cursor is over this field and ENTER is pressed. VHF or satellite network must also be enabled. must DEPRESS momentary AFIS annunciator to enable the air to ground data link.KLAX ELMAA HQM KLAX ****** AFIS UPDATE ETA ERASE > > AFIS UPDATE VERIFICATION PAGE ACTUAL FL: Actual flight level of aircraft rounded to nearest 100 ft. the update request is sent via the data link. (Figure 7-36) DEPART ARRIVE < APPROACH Figure 7-35 AFIS UPDATE ACTUAL FL 410 ASSIGNED FL 370 PAYLOAD 1200 FUEL REM 11985 CRUISE MODE M80 TRANSMIT REQUEST? Figure 7-36 AFIS UPDATE ACTUAL FL ASSIGNED FL PAYLOAD FUEL REM CRUISE MODE 410 370 1200 11985 DATA LINK DISABLED: Aircraft equipped with the Figure 7-37 Antenna Switching Unit. ASSIGNED FL: Current Flight Level assigned by ATC as verified or amended by the pilot.

the MSG Key will flash and a flashing asterisk will appear next to the new message. FPL UPDATED The DMU has received an AFIS Flight Plan update from the Global Data Center. UPLINK FAIL The last AFIS uplink attempt by the ground network was not accepted by the DMU. DOWNLINK FAIL The last AFIS downlink request contained an invalid character and was not transmitted to the ground network. SYSTEM MESSAGES ADVISORY: Figure 7-38 SYSTEM MESSAGES 1/1 *SEE AFIS MSG *WX UPDATED DATA CENTER AK NDB. Configuration information in the DMU has been changed to agree with interfaced configuration module Rev. Global Data Center has acknowledged a AFIS CONFIG CHG. SIGMETS UPDATED The DMU has received an AFIS SIGMETS update from the Global Data Center. When new messages are added.WW EXP 31MAY The following are the advisory messages which pertain to AFIS and may appear on the GNS-X C129 SYSTEM MESSAGES Page. SYSTEM MESSAGE EXPLANATION WX UPDATED The DMU has received an AFIS terminal weather update from the Global Data Center. 0 Dec/96 7-24 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System .AFIS Operation SYSTEM MESSAGES PAGE AFIS related messages appear on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page (see Section 2 of the Operators Manual). FPL RECALLED The DMU has received a previously accessed AFIS Flight Plan from the Global Data Center. 1 NO COMM AFIS update request initiated by the pilot has not been acknowledged by the ground communications network. DATA CENTER AK downlink request. WINDS UPDATED The DMU has received an AFIS Winds Aloft update from the Global Data Center.

NOTE: Message may not cause MSG Annunciator to flash. SEE AFIS MSG There is a text message on the AFIS MESSAGES page which requires acknowledgement and possibly pilot action. Rev.AFIS Operation AFIS CONFIG FAIL Configuration module has failed. DMU nonvolatile memory configuration information will be used. ACTION REQUIRED: The following are the action required messages which pertain to AFIS and may appear on the GNS-X C129 SYSTEM MESSAGES Page. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-25 . AFIS CONFIG LOST DMU non-volatile memory has lost its configuration information and the configuration module has failed.

0 Dec/96 .AFIS Operation THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 7-26 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

and Initial Position.DEPRESS until desired AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page appears. DEPRESS momentary AFIS annunciator to enable the air to ground data link. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-27 . KORD-KSNA 06APR90 3. The page also appears between the Active Flight Plan Page and the first GNS-X C129 FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page. This letter and the CYUL-KJFK 06APR9O date distinguish one FPL from KJFK-KORD 06APR90 < the other. (Figure 7-40) < KSNA-KSTL 09APR90 REPLACE ACTIVE FPL? Figure 7-40 Rev. 2. Select AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page using either (a) or (b). TO ENTER AN AFIS FLIGHT PLAN 1. NOTE: For aircraft equipped with the Antenna Switching Unit. (Figure 7-39) NOTE: Desired flight plan may be found on a subsequent page if more than six flight plans have been either transferred from the disk or received via the data link. FPL Key . Line Select Key DEPRESS to place cursor over desired Flight Plan.INSERT disk into DTU.AFIS Operation SYSTEM OPERATION PRE-DEPARTURE AFIS FLIGHT PLAN SELECTION The AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page appears after the Initialization Page. < < < AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/4 CYUL-KJFK KJFK-KORD KORD-KSNA KSNA-KSTL GUIII 06APR9O 06APR90 06APR90 09APR90 Figure 7-39 b. If there is more than one Flight Plan with the same Departure/ Destination pair a random letter will be displayed AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/4 between the Depart?Dest pair < and the date. a. GMT. Initialization Page Enter Date. Preprogrammed AFIS Disk . AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page appears.

Observe AFIS Planned data vs. ENROUTE REVIEWING FLIGHT PLAN PROGRESS 1. Current Leg Data . 0 Dec/96 . DEPRESS ENTER to replace the Active Flight Plan with the AFIS Flight Plan.VERIFY. ENTER Key . NAV Key . Actual GNS-X C129 calculated data. < NAVIGATION 5/5 PRC: GUP FL410 PLAN ACT F REM 9642 9685 FF P/E 1832 1800 ETA 02:09 02:08 TAS 488 485 GS 507 519 WIND 300/ 26 310/ 38 Figure 7-41 NAVIGATION 5/5 PRC: GUP PLAN F REQ 1330 FF P/E 1832 ETE 0+22 TAS 488 GS 507 WIND 300/ 26 FL410 ACT -------------------/--- < Figure 7-42 < NAVIGATION 5/5 DIR TO ICT PLAN F REQ -----FF P/E ---ETA ----TAS --GS --WIND ---/--FL--ACT 9475 1800 03:17 485 491 310/ 38 Figure 7-43 7-28 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. (Figure 7-42) NOTE: ACTUAL data fields become dashes. 4.DEPRESS. 5. F REM field becomes F REQ and ETA field becomes ETE.DEPRESS to review Planned data for future legs of the Active AFIS Flight Plan. Flight Plan Progress Page appears.AFIS Operation 4. REVIEWING AFIS PLANNED LEG DATA 3.DEPRESS until NAVIGATION Page 5. The initial leg must be established on the NAV Page so the system can navigate normally. NOTE: If an Active Flight Plan exists. ACTIVE FPL . 6. (Figure 7-41) 2. FPL Date . Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Leg Identifiers.CONFIRM.CONFIRM. the message REPLACE ACTIVE FPL? appears. ENTER Key . AFIS Flight Plan becomes the Active Flight Plan.

6. (Figure 7-45) If the Flight Plan has been updated. AFIS FLT PLAN. the PLAN fields display dashes. NOTE: If the current leg displayed does not agree with a planned AFIS leg.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page. 1 2 3 < 4 5 < 6 7 < 8 < AFIS MENU AFIS FLT PLAN SIGMETS TERMINAL WX WINDS ALOFT RECALL AFIS FPL SEND AFIS MSG DISPL AFIS MSG OPERATING MODES Figure 7-44 AFIS FLT PLAN 1/4 FUEL TIME FR KSNA TO KSTL 10859 2+51 HOLDING --------TO -----------RESERVE 2500 0+45 TOTALS 13359 3+36 Figure 7-45 AFIS FLT PLAN 1/4 FUEL TIME FR UPDATE TO KSTL 9285 1+58 HOLDING --------TO -----------RESERVE 2700 0+49 TOTALS 11985 2+47 Figure 7-46 Rev. 2. Line Select Key . 0 Dec/96 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-29 .Place cursor over menu Option 1. REVIEWING AFIS FLIGHT PLAN DATA 1. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to remove cursor from page and return to Current Leg Progress. AFIS FLIGHT PLAN PAGE 1 4. Line Select Key . AFIS Key . the FROM identifier (origin airport) will be changed to UPDATE.AFIS Operation 5. BACK or PRV Key . (Figure 7-46) Fuel and time data change as a result of the updated information. REVIEW fuel and time data. Refer to Updating AFIS Flight Plan for update procedure. (Figure 744) 3.DEPRESS.DEPRESS to review Planned data for previous legs of the AFIS Flight Plan. (Figure 7-43) If AFIS Flight Plan is updated via the data link. new values will appear. The TOTALS reflect the changes in the TO and RESERVE fields.

(Figure 7-48) 7. NOTE: If Automatic Fuel Flow is interfaced to the GNS-X C129. followed by the updated route to destination. the first route identifier will be UPDATE.AFIS Operation 5. AFIS FLT PLAN 2/4 RAMP WT 52185 FPL LDWT 42700 FLT LVL 410 ROUTE KSNA-MUSEL-TRMJ134-STL-KSTL Figure 7-47 AFIS FLT PLAN 2/4 RAMP WT 51900 FPL LDWT 42500 FLT LVL 370 ROUTE UPDATE-ICT-J134STL-KSTL Figure 7-48 7-30 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. WEIGHTS. FLIGHT LEVEL and ROUTE . AFIS FLIGHT PLAN PAGE 2 6. FPL LDWT and FLT LVL values may change as data is updated. NOTE: Pressing the PRV or BACK Key will re-display the AFIS MENU Page with the cursor positioned over Option 1. NOTE: DEPRESSING PRV or BACK Key will display AFIS FLT PLAN Page 1. Subsequent pages of the Route will appear as needed (up to 50 waypoints) or AFIS FLT PLAN Page 3 appears.REVIEW (Figure 7-47). RAMP WT changes to GROSS WT after the engines are started and the GROSS WT value field decreases on a periodic basis as the GNS-X C129 recalculates. 0 Dec/96 .DEPRESS to display AFIS Flight Plan Page 2. AFIS or NXT Key . If the Flight Plan has been updated. AFIS or NXT Key DEPRESS.

AFIS FLT PLAN 4/4 MIN FLT LVL 330 MAX FLT LVL 410 HOLD TIME ----ALTERNATE ---CLIMB F/T ----ARRIV F/T ----AFIS FLT PLAN 3/4 FROM KSNA TO KSTL DEP TIME 23:45 BASIC OP WT 39000 PAYLOAD 1200 RAMP FUEL 13359 RESERVE FUEL 2500 PERF OPTION M80 / 2 Figure 7-49 AFIS FLT PLAN FROM TO DEP TIME BASIC OP WT PAYLOAD RAMP FUEL RESERVE FUEL PERF OPTION M80 3/4 UPDATE KSTL 00:54 39000 1200 11985 2700 / 2 Figure 7-50 Figure 7-51 Rev. AFIS FLIGHT PLAN PAGE 4 10. AFIS or NXT Key DEPRESS to display AFIS FLT PLAN Page 4. and the values in the respective fields change to reflect the updated information.AFIS Operation AFIS FLIGHT PLAN PAGE 3 8. Pilot Inputs . (Figure 7-49) NOTE: If there has been an update to the flight plan: FROM identifier (origin airport) changes to UPDATE. NOTE: DEPRESSING PRV or BACK Key will display AFIS FLT PLAN Page 3. RAMP FUEL changes to UPDATE FUEL. (Figure 7-51) 11. FPL RES FUEL changes to RESERVE FUEL. DEP TIME changes to UPDATE TIME. AFIS or NXT Key DEPRESS to return to AFIS MENU Page. where the cursor will be positioned over Option 2. (Figure 7-50) 9. Performance Bias Data REVIEW. NOTE: Pressing the BACK or PRV Key throughout the Flight Plan Pages will cause the previous Flight Plan Page to appear.REVIEW. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-31 .

DEPRESS. FROM Identifier . ENTER Key . 7. 2.VERIFY or INSERT.DEPRESS to display first SIGMETS Page. AFIS Key . ENTER Key .DEPRESS. (Figure 7-52 or 7-53) NOTE: If no SIGMETS have been recorded on the disk. The request is downlinked and the system will display the AFIS MENU Page with the cursor over Option 3.VERIFY or INSERT. Depress AFIS. Line Select Key .AFIS Operation SIGMETS REVIEW/UPDATE 1. 3. a page appears displaying the message NO SIGMETS ON DISK. 0 Dec/96 7-32 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System . The cursor will automatically move to the TO Identifier field. The cursor will automatically move to TRANSMIT REQUEST? (Figure 7-54) 9. 4. If there are no SIGMETS via a Flight Plan update the message reads NO SIGMETS.DEPRESS. PRV. TO Identifier.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page. 6. 8. Select Key . or BACK Key to return to AFIS MENU Page. < < AFIS SIGMETS 1/2 9APR95 FR KLAS TO KLAX SIGMET ECHO 7 VALID UNTIL 222205 CA FROM RNO TO EED TO Figure 7-52 AFIS SIGMETS 1/26 20OCT95 FR NAT TO NAT TRACKS FLS 310 370 INCLUSIVE OCT 20/11 30Z TO OCT 20 190002 A 53/15 52/20 50/30 Figure 7-53 AFIS SIGMETS FR (KSNA) TO (KMIA) NO SIGMETS TRANSMIT REQUEST? Figure 7-54 Rev.DEPRESS TO POSITION cursor over FROM field 5.DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 2. SIGMETS. ENTER Key . ENTER Key .

If the desired identifier is enclosed in parentheses.AFIS Operation NOTE: Wait for DATA CENTER AK message if sending multiple requests. TERMINAL WEATHER MENU . AFIS Key . Line Select Key . pressing the ENTER Key will cause it to blink. 2. which will create a cursor over the first blank identifier position. If no identifiers are displayed. ENTER Key . 6. 5. A ( ) around the FR and TO waypoints indicates that the updated information has not yet been received. 10. TERMINAL WX. (Figure 7-55) 3.DEPRESS. ENTER Key . ENTER Key .DEPRESS.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page. INSERT an airport identifier.DATA UPDATE AND REVIEW 1. Subsequent SIGMETS Pages will appear or AFIS MENU Page returns with cursor positioned over Option 3.DEPRESS to position cursor over TRANSMIT REQUEST? TERMINAL WX < < < < AFIS MENU 1 2 3 < 4 5 < 6 7 < 8 < AFIS FLT PLAN SIGMETS TERMINAL WX WINDS ALOFT RECALL AFIS FPL SEND AFIS MSG DISPL AFIS MSG OPERATING MODES Figure 7-55 KSNA KSTL (KMKC) (ENO) (DQO) > > > > TRANSMIT REQUEST? Figure 7-56 Rev.DEPRESS 7. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired Terminal Wx airport identifier. they may be inserted by pressing the Line Select Key. indicating no weather information is available for that identifier. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 3.DEPRESS to display TERMINAL WX Menu Page. AFIS or NXT Key . (Figure 7-56) 4. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-33 .

(Figure 7-57) 10. The data text fields will go blank.AFIS Operation 8. TO INSERT A NEW IDENTIFIER: 11. 16.DEPRESS.DATA UPDATE AND REVIEW 1. Weather information .INSERT. (Figure 7-59) AFIS MENU 1 2 3 < 4 5 < 6 7 < 8 < TERMINAL WX > KDEN 1/12 10JAN97 METAR: 10/1710 101703Z COR 04008KT 1SM -SN BR BKN016 BKN025 OVC036 10/1710 M16/M17 A2994 RMK AO2 P0000 TAF: 101308Z 101312 Figure 7-57 AFIS FLT PLAN SIGMETS TERMINAL WX WINDS ALOFT RECALL AFIS FPL SEND AFIS MSG DISPL AFIS MSG OPERATING MODES Figure 7-59 Rev. 12. 15. and the cursor positioned at the location of the original identifier selected. 9.DEPRESS. The TERMINAL WX Menu Page appears with the new identifier in place of the original identifier. TO DELETE TEXT WHEN THERE IS NO DATA ENTRY IN PROGRESS: 14. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 4. WINDS ALOFT MENU . Identifiers listed on this page will be transmitted to the ground via the data link. NOTE: Wait for DATA CENTER AK message if sending multiple requests. Depress BACK key. WINDS ALOFT. ENTER Key . If there are identifiers: Placing the cursor over the selected identifier on the terminal weather and pressing ENTER will display the weather information for the airport. ENTER Key. DELETE? will appear. 2.REVIEW. Line Select .DEPRESS to position the cursor over the identifier field. 0 Dec/96 7-34 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System .Depress to delete the airport identifier. 13. ENTER Key . If there is no data available for this new identifier. IDENTIFIER .DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page. Place cursor over airport identifier on TERMINAL WX page. it will appear in parentheses. AFIS Key .

Press Line Select Key to position the cursor over the identifier field. Identifiers listed on this page will be transmitted to the ground via the data link. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired Wind identifier.DEPRESS. Rev. Wind information REVIEW. upon depressing the ENTER Key. (Figure 7-60) 4. indicating no weather information is available for that identifier. ENTER Key . NOTE: Wait for DATA CENTER AK message if sending multiple requests.DEPRESS 7. Line Select Key .DEPRESS. (Usually a VOR or intersection) 6. 9. < < < < AFIS WINDS ALOFT KSNA KSTL (MKC) TRANSMIT REQUEST? (ENO) (DQO) > > > > If the desired identifier is enclosed in parentheses. INSERT an identifier. The data text fields will go blank. 5. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to display WINDS ALOFT Menu Page.INSERT. WINDS ALOFT 122356Z 310/23-17 290/34-31 290/44-47 300/53-54 310/68-56 310/57-59 ICT 18000 24000 30000 34000 39000 45000 Figure 7-61 TO INSERT A NEW IDENTIFIER: 11. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-35 . IDENTIFIER . the WINDS ALOFT Data Pages pertaining to the selected identifier appear. ENTER Key . (Figure 7-61) 10. 12.AFIS Operation 3. If no identifiers are displayed. ENTER Key . they may be inserted by pressing the Line Select Key. Figure 7-60 pressing the ENTER Key will cause it to blink. which will create a cursor over the first blank identifier position.DEPRESS to position cursor over TRANSMIT REQUEST? 8. If there are identifiers.

If there is no data available for the new identifier. (Figure 7-64) < AFIS MENU 1 2 3 < 4 5 < 6 7 < 8 < AFIS FLT PLAN SIGMETS TERMINAL WX WINDS ALOFT RECALL AFIS FPL SEND AFIS MSG DISPL AFIS MSG OPERATING MODES Figure 7-63 RECALL AFIS FPL FPL-# A1234 DATE ETD FR TO Figure 7-64 7-36 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.DEPRESS.INSERT desired AFIS Flight Plan number. 2. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 5. RECALLING AFIS FLIGHT PLAN This procedure allows a previously accessed AFIS Flight Plan and associated weather to be recalled from the Global Data Center. (Figure 7-63) 3. TO DELETE TEXT WHEN THERE IS NO DATA ENTRY IN PROGRESS: 14. AFIS Key . Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor next to FPL # field. 15. Depress BACK key the the ENTER Key. 4. RECALL OPTION 1: 1.AFIS Operation 13. ENTER Key . RECALL AFIS FPL Page appears. 0 Dec/96 . Place cursor over identifier on AFIS WINDS ALOFT page.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page. The WINDS ALOFT Menu Page appears with the new identifier in place of the original identifier.DEPRESS. 5. RECALL AFIS FPL. FPL # . ENTER Key . it will appear in parentheses. and the cursor positioned at the location of the original identifier selected.

INSERT origin ICAO Identifier. FR field . Rev. ENTER Key . month. ENTER Key . 3. if DATA LINK DISABLED message appears DEPRESS momentary AFIS annunciator to enable the air to ground data link. year. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-37 . Wait for DATA CENTER AK message if sending multiple requests.INSERT destination ICAO Identifier. TO field .DEPRESS to initiate recalling of AFIS Flight Plan from Global Data Center. digits only) of AFIS Flight Plan being recalled. ETD . Also enable VHF or satellite network.DEPRESS. ENTER Key . ENTER Key .DEPRESS. 6. ENTER Key .INSERT issue date (day.INSERT estimated time of departure in GMT of AFIS Flight Plan being recalled. Cursor will position itself over date field. 8. ENTER Key . (Figure 766) Figure 7-66 2. DATE .DEPRESS. Cursor is positioned over TRANSMIT REQUEST? (Figure 7-65) 7. 5. 4. < RECALL AFIS FPL < FPL-# A1234 DATE ETD FR TO TRANSMIT REQUEST? Figure 7-65 RECALL AFIS FPL FPL-# DATE ETD FR TO RECALL OPTION 2: If Flight Plan Number field is blank: 1. NOTE: For aircraft equipped with the Antenna Switching Unit.DEPRESS.DEPRESS. 7.AFIS Operation 6.

TO .Winds and Term Wx are automatically updated once the FPL is recalled.Depress twice to transmit request. Cursor is positioned over TRANSMIT REQUEST? (Figure 7-67) 10.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page.DEPRESS. 6. SEND AFIS MSG.Depress to position cursor over #: field. SEND AFIS MESSAGE Page appears.INSERT receiver of message. 2. AFIS Key .DEPRESS.PDCXXX (XXX is departure airport identifier). < RECALL AFIS FPL < FPL-# DATE07MAR90 ETD 14:30 FR KSNA TO KDEN TRANSMIT REQUEST? Figure 7-67 AFIS MENU 1 2 3 < 4 5 < 6 7 < 8 < AFIS FLT PLAN SIGMETS TERMINAL WX WINDS ALOFT RECALL AFIS FPL SEND AFIS MSG DISPL AFIS MSG OPERATING MODES Figure 7-68 $ % SEND AFIS MSG MESSAGE PPM TO: FR: #: SEND MESSAGE? > Figure 7-69 7-38 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. INSERT . 0 Dec/96 . SENDING A TEXT MESSAGE OR PDC 1.DEPRESS to initiate recalling of AFIS Flight Plan from Global Data Center. ENTER Key . 5. ENTER Key . (Figure 769) If not requesting PDC proceed to step 7 4. AFIS MENU Page will appear with cursor positioned over Option 6. (Figure 7-68) 3. ENTER Key . ENTER Key . NOTE: SIGMETS .AFIS Operation 9. Line Select Key . NOTE: Wait for DATA CENTER AK message if sending multiple requests. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 6. 7.

The SP Key may be used as a spacer to separate words.INSERT text message using the ENTER Key to access each successive line. 9. The BACK Key may be used to delete characters one at a time from right to left. The PRV Key may be used to move the cursor one space to the left. See Table 1 for possible addresses. 10. e. Fifteen lines of text can be entered. d. $ % < $ % SEND AFIS MSG MESSAGE PPM TO: DISPATCH FR: N2175C #: SNABCDE DELAYED DUE TO WX NEW ETA IS 1430Z SEND MESSAGE? > > Figure 7-70 SEND AFIS MSG DELAYED DUE TO WX NEW ETA IS 1430Z PLS ARR GND TRANS ALSO PLS HAV MECH AVAIL TO DISCUSS POS MAINT PROB SEND MESSAGE? > < > Figure 7-71 b.INSERT sender's identification (name or tail number). 11. FR . (Figure 7-71) The following guidelines are used for entering and editing text: a. ENTER Key .INSERT receiver's address.DEPRESS. (Figure 7-70) NOTE: The cursor remains fixed and the page display moves up or down one line at a time through the cursor. ENTER Key . 12.AFIS Operation 8. Rev.DEPRESS. Entering a character causes the character at the cursor position and all the characters to the right to be shifted one position. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-39 . Message . 13. The NXT Key may be used to move the cursor one space to the right. c. ENTER Key .DEPRESS. # .

Line Select Key . 11. 0 Dec/96 . ENTER Key . $ % SEND AFIS MSG DELAYED DUE TO WX NEW ETA IS 1430Z PLS ARR GND TRANS ALSO PLS HAV MECH AVAIL TO DISCUSS POS MAINT PROB SEND MESSAGE? > < > Figure 7-72 NOTE: Wait for DATA CENTER AK message if sending multiple requests. The message is sent to the Global Data Center via the data link. (Figure 7-72) 12.DEPRESS. TO RETURN TO THE AFIS MENU PAGE 13.AFIS Operation f. in order for the cursor to appear over SEND MESSAGE? field.DEPRESS to position over SEND MESSAGE? It will be necessary to press the ENTER Key after 15 lines of text. The Line Select Key moves cursor to SEND MESSAGE? field if a TO or # entry field has been inserted. Press AFIS or NXT Key with the cursor off the page. or if there are two succeeding blank lines. g. Top two left Line Select keys move cursor up and down page. 7-40 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

(Figure 7-74) 4. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the PPM field. FR: N2175C 1. MESSAGE TITLE . If no message has been programmed the display will be blank. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-41 . ENTER Key . PPM MENU < < 1 ETA CHANGE 2 FILE FLT PLAN REQ 3 HOTEL RESERVATIONS 4 < 5 6 < Figure 7-74 NOTE: Whenever a title is changed or erased. Insert message as required up to 7 lines of text. Rev.DEPRESS to position cursor over desired message title or blank title field. type characters over the old Title. (Figure 7-73) An entry in SEND AFIS MSG $ > the TO or # field must be made MESSAGE PPM before access to PPM is avail% TO: DISPATCH able. Up to six messages can be listed on the PPM MENU Page which appears. A new title may be entered with a maximum of 18 characters. < #: SNABCDE DELAYED DUE TO WX NEW ETA IS 1430Z SEND MESSAGE? > 2. the preprogrammed message associated with the title will be erased also. 5. Figure 7-73 3. The BACK Key can be used to delete characters one at a time.DEPRESS.VERIFY or ENTER.DEPRESS. Line Select Key .AFIS Operation SENDING/BUILDING A PREPROGRAMMED MESSAGE The PREPROGRAMMED MESSAGES MENU Page is accessed from the SEND AFIS MSG Page. ENTER Key . To change an existing title. The preprogrammed message associated with that title will appear.

DEPRESS. The NXT Key may be used to move the cursor one space to the right. a. d. ENTER Key . Entering a character causes the character at the cursor position and all the characters to the right to be shifted one position. The PRV Key may be used to move the cursor one space to the left. TEXT . CONTINUE SENDING MESSAGE 7.AFIS Operation EDITING/ENTERING A PREPROGRAMMED MESSAGE 6. Wait for DATA CENTER AK message if sending multiple requests. b. TO. The message will be downlinked and the AFIS MENU Page will appear. NXT Key . c. PPM MENU < < 1 ETA CHANGE 2 FILE FLT PLAN REQ 3 HOTEL RESERVATIONS 4 < 5 6 < Figure 7-75 PREPROGRAMMED MSG ETA CHANGE NEW ETA IS 1300 KPRC < HAVE A GOOD DAY < SEND MESSAGE? > Figure 7-76 NOTE: DATA LINK DISABLED will appear in the SEND MESSAGE? field if the downlink is disabled. 0 Dec/96 7-42 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System . FROM and # field information of SEND MESSAGE Page will be used in downlink message. Rev. e.DEPRESS to position cursor over the SEND MESSAGE? field.EDIT or ENTER using the following guidelines. (Figure 7-76) 8. The BACK Key may be used to delete characters one at a time from right to left. The SP Key may be used as a spacer to separate words. It will be necessary to press the ENTER Key after seven lines of text in order for the SEND MESSAGE? field to appear.

Subsequent message pages appear or old AFIS MENU Page returns with cursor positioned over Option 8. MESSAGE . The following procedures allow the function to be turned OFF and back ON.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page.REVIEW. PRV or BACK Key DEPRESS. NEW ETA IS 1430Z. NXT. DISPLAY AFIS MSG Page appears. ENTER Key . DISPL AFIS MSG. Rev. NOTE: Messages will remain in the system until the system is powered off. (Figure 7-77) 3. (Figure 7-78) 5. 2. 4.DEPRESS. 1 2 3 < 4 5 < 6 7 < 8 < AFIS MENU AFIS FLT PLAN SIGMETS TERMINAL WX WINDS ALOFT RECALL AFIS FPL SEND AFIS MSG DISPL AFIS MSG OPERATING MODES Figure 7-77 DISPLAY AFIS MSG 1/1 DISPATCH: MESSAGE RECEIVED. AFIS. Figure 7-78 SELECTING OPERATING MODES (FOR AFIS USERS EQUIPPED WITH SATELLITE DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM) AUTO REPORTING When the system is initialized.AFIS Operation AFIS MESSAGES REVIEW 1. TRANSPORTATION ARRANGED. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-43 . the Automatic Reporting and Auto Wx update function will retain the status at aircraft shutdown. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 7. AFIS Key .

Figure 7-79 4. ENTER Key . then AUTO REPORT and AUTO WX UPDATE will be OFF. (Figure 7-79) 3. ACTIVE LINK: ARINC Figure 7-81 7-44 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 8. (Figure 7-81) ACTIVE LINK: ARINC Figure 7-80 6. (Figure 7-80) AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT VHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL ON ON ON ON > > > 5. OPERATING MODES. 3 Oct/02 . 1 2 3 < 4 5 < 6 7 < 8 < AFIS MENU AFIS FLT PLAN SIGMETS TERMINAL WX WINDS ALOFT RECALL AFIS FPL SEND AFIS MSG DISPL AFIS MSG OPERATING MODES 2. AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT VHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL OFF ON ON ON > > > NOTE: If all networks are OFF.DEPRESS.DEPRESS. Line Select Key .DEPRESS to turn OFF the AUTO REPORT or AUTO WX UPDATE function.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page.AFIS Operation TURNING AUTO REPORT / AUTO WX UPDATE OFF 1. AFIS Key . OFF appears in the cursor. BACK Key . Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over ON option of AUTO REPORT or AUTO WX UPDATE field.

(Figure 7-82) 3. ON appears in the cursor.DEPRESS.DEPRESS to turn ON the AUTO REPORT or AUTO WX UPDATE function. OPERATING MODES. BACK Key .DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 8.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page. AFIS FLT PLAN SIGMETS TERMINAL WX WINDS ALOFT RECALL AFIS FPL SEND AFIS MSG DISPL AFIS MSG OPERATING MODES 4. Line Select Key . AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT VHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL ON ON ON ON > > > ACTIVE LINK: ARINC Figure 7-84 Rev. ENTER Key . AFIS MENU 1 2 3 < 4 5 < 6 7 < 8 < 2. 3 Oct/02 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-45 .AFIS Operation RETURNING TO AUTO REPORT/AUTO WX UPDATE 1. Figure 7-83 AFIS OPERATING MODES NOTE: If all networks are OFF. (Figure 7-83) Figure 7-82 AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT VHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL OFF ON ON ON > > > 5. then AUTO REPORT and AUTO WX UPDATE will be OFF. ENTER Key . AFIS Key . (Figure 7-84) ACTIVE LINK: ARINC 6.DEPRESS. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over OFF option of AUTO REPORT or AUTO WX UPDATE field.

Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 8. the Automatic Weather Update function will retain the status at aircraft shutdown. NOTE: A Weather Update Request must be performed to notify the GDC of the change in status of AUTO WX UPDT. TURNING AUTO WX UPDT OFF 1. ENTER Key . AFIS MENU 1 2 3 < 4 5 < 6 7 < 8 < AFIS FLT PLAN SIGMETS TERMINAL WX WINDS ALOFT RECALL AFIS FPL SEND AFIS MSG DISPL AFIS MSG OPERATING MODES Figure 7-85 AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT VHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL ON ON ON ON > > > ACTIVE LINK: ARINC Figure 7-86 AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT VHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL ON OFF ON ON > > > ACTIVE LINK: ARINC Figure 7-87 7-46 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.DEPRESS to turn OFF the AUTO WX UPDT function.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page. BACK Key . The following procedures allow the function to be turned OFF and back ON.DEPRESS.DEPRESS. OFF appears in the cursor. 2. ENTER Key .AFIS Operation AUTO WEATHER UPDATE When the system is initialized. OPERATING MODES. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over ON option of AUTO WX UPDT field. (Figure 7-86) 5. (Figure 785) 3. AFIS Key . 3 Oct/02 . 4. (Figure 7-87) 6.

(Figure 7-89) 5. 1 2 3 < 4 5 < 6 7 < 8 < AFIS MENU AFIS FLT PLAN SIGMETS TERMINAL WX WINDS ALOFT RECALL AFIS FPL SEND AFIS MSG DISPL AFIS MSG OPERATING MODES 2. AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT VHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL OFF ON ON ON > > > NOTE: A Weather Update Request must be performed to notify the GDC of the change in status of AUTO WX UPDT. OPERATING MODES. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over OFF option of AUTO WX UPDT field. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 8. 3 Oct/02 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-47 .AFIS Operation RETURNING TO AUTO WX UPDT 1.DEPRESS to turn ON the AUTO WX UPDT function. BACK Key . AFIS Key . ENTER Key . ACTIVE LINK: ARINC Figure 7-90 Rev. (Figure 788) Figure 7-88 3.DEPRESS. (Figure 7-90) ACTIVE LINK: ARINC Figure 7-89 6. ON appears in the cursor. ENTER Key .DEPRESS.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page. AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT VHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL OFF OFF ON ON > > > 4.

1. ENTER Key . turned OFF.DEPRESS to position cursor over ON option of VHF NETWORK field. AFIS MENU 1 2 3 < 4 5 < 6 7 < 8 < AFIS FLT PLAN SIGMETS TERMINAL WX WINDS ALOFT RECALL AFIS FPL SEND AFIS MSG DISPL AFIS MSG OPERATING MODES Figure 7-91 AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT VHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL ON ON ON ON > > > ACTIVE LINK: ARINC Figure 7-92 AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT VHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL ON ON OFF? ON > > > ACTIVE LINK: SATCOM NOTE: The ACTIVE LINK information at the bottom of the page Figure 7-93 indicates the network that is being serviced at that time. (Figure 7-91) 3. Line Select Key . ENTER Key . all networks will prefill with the status at system shut-down. 2. (Figure 7-93) 6. 4.DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 8. BACK Key .AFIS Operation VHF AND SATELLITE NETWORK OPERATING MODES The status of each network is held in non-volatile memory. TURNING VHF NETWORK OFF The VHF network has precedence over the satellite network in areas of shared coverage and must be turned OFF in order for SATCOM to be the Active Link. AFIS Key . OPERATING MODES. The following procedures allow the VHF and satellite networks to be manually operated. or returned to AUTO. (Figure 7-92) 5. When the system is initialized.DEPRESS.DEPRESS. NONE will be displayed.DEPRESS to turn the VHF network OFF.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page. 3 Oct/02 . If all networks are turned OFF or none are operational. Line Select Key . OFF? appears in the cursor. 7-48 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

DEPRESS. 3 Oct/02 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-49 . BACK Key . (Figure 7-96) Figure 7-95 NOTE: The ACTIVE LINK information at the bottom of the page indicates the network that is being serviced at that time.DEPRESS to turn VHF network on. AFIS OPERATING MODES VHF LINK CONTROL ARINC SITA/AVICOM AUTO AUTO > > 7. (Figure 7-94) Figure 7-94 AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT VHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL ON ON ON ? ON > > > 5. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 8. Line Select Key . ENTER Key . 3. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over AUTO option of desired ground network. AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT VHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL ON ON OFF ON > > > 2.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page. (Figure 7-95) ACTIVE LINK: ARINC 6. AFIS Key . ON? appears in the cursor. OPERATING MODES. VHF LINK CONTROL Page appears. ENTER Key .DEPRESS. Figure 7-96 Rev.DEPRESS to position cursor over OFF option of VHF NETWORK field. ACTIVE LINK: SATCOM 4.AFIS Operation TURNING VHF NETWORK ON 1.

12. 14. (Figure 7-97) 10. 8. NOTE: If MAN is selected. if mode is set to AUTO. BACK Key . 9.DEPRESS until MAN or OFF appears in the cursor.DEPRESS until AUTO appears in cursor. AFIS OPERATING MODES VHF LINK CONTROL ARINC SITA/AVICOM AUTO OFF > > AFIS OPERATING MODES VHF LINK CONTROL ARINC SITA/AVICOM MAN OFF > > Figure 7-98 7-50 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. RETURNING TO AUTO 11.DEPRESS to position cursor over OFF or MAN option of desired ground network.AFIS Operation TURNING AUTO TO MAN OR OFF NOTE: SITA/AVICOM are two different ground networks covering different regions.DEPRESS to select MAN or OFF. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 to Figure 7-97 turn OFF desired ground networks or DEPRESS ENTER Key to cursor through option fields and return to AFIS OPERATING MODEs Page. The appropriate network is automatically selected for operation based on current Lat/Lon location of aircraft. (Figure 7-98) 13. Line Select Key . all other networks will indicate OFF.DEPRESS to select AUTO option. ENTER Key . BACK Key . 3 Oct/02 . ENTER Key . Repeat Steps 11 through 13 to return desired ground networks to AUTO or DEPRESS ENTER Key to cursor through option fields and return to AFIS Operating Modes Page.

DEPRESS. (Figure 7-100) AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT VHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL ON ON OFF ON > > > 5.DEPRESS to turn the satellite network OFF. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over ON option of SAT (satellite) NETWORK field. OPERATING MODES. If all networks are turned OFF or none are operational. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 8. (Figure 7-101) AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT VHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL ON ON OFF OFF? > > > NOTE: The ACTIVE LINK information at the bottom of the page indicates the network that is being serviced at that time.AFIS Operation TURNING SATELLITE NETWORK OFF 1. ENTER Key . ENTER Key .DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page. (Figure 799) 3. ACTIVE LINK: NONE Figure 7-101 Rev. 3 Oct/02 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-51 . OFF? appears in the cursor. AFIS Key . BACK Key . NONE will be displayed. ACTIVE LINK: SATCOM Figure 7-100 6. Figure 7-99 4. 1 2 3 < 4 5 < 6 7 < 8 < AFIS MENU AFIS FLT PLAN SIGMETS TERMINAL WX WINDS ALOFT RECALL AFIS FPL SEND AFIS MSG DISPL AFIS MSG OPERATING MODES 2.DEPRESS.

SAT (satellite) LINK CONTROL Page appears with cursor over AUTO. Line Select Key . AFIS Key . (Figure 7-102) 5.DEPRESS. 3.DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 8. Rev. Line Select Key . 1. 3 Oct/02 7-52 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System .DEPRESS. ATLANTIC LINK:OPERATIONAL 6. ENTER Key . BACK Key . ENTER Key . (Figure 7-103) NOTE: The ACTIVE LINK information at the bottom of the page indicates the network that is being serviced at that time. ON? appears in the cursor.DEPRESS to position cursor over OFF option of SAT NETWORK field. (Figure 7-104) Figure 7-104 DEPRESS ENTER Key to cursor through option fields and return to AFIS OPERATING MODES Page or proceed to Step 7.AFIS Operation TURNING SATELLITE NETWORK ON The satellite network must be turned ON to send non-flight related messages. the VHF NETWORK must be turned OFF in order for SATCOM to be the Active Link.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page. 2. If the VHF network cannot be received and the SATCOM mode is set to ON the system will automatically select the SATCOM mode for transmit and receive.DEPRESS to turn satellite network on. 4. OPERATING MODES. Since the VHF network has precedence over the satellite network in areas of shared coverage. AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT VHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL ON ON OFF OFF > > > ACTIVE LINK: NONE Figure 7-102 AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT VHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL ON ON OFF ON ? > > > ACTIVE LINK: SATCOM Figure 7-103 AFIS OPERATING MODES $ SAT LINK CONTROL % SAT COM: AUTO REGION: W.

DEPRESS to select AUTO option. BACK Key .DEPRESS until desired region appears in cursor. (Figure 7-106) NOTE: All other regions are now considered OFF. ENTER Key . ENTER Key . Atlantic.DEPRESS. RETURNING TO AUTO 12. or Indian. Cursor moves to REGION field. 0 Dec/96 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-53 . either W. 11.DEPRESS to select region. 14. ENTER Key . Cursor moves to the LINK field. Rev. AFIS OPERATING MODES $ SAT LINK CONTROL % SAT COM: MAN REGION: PACIFIC LINK:OPERATIONAL Figure 7-105 AFIS OPERATING MODES $ SAT LINK CONTROL % SAT COM: MAN REGION: PACIFIC LINK:ACTIVATE? Figure 7-106 NOTE: When in MAN mode.DEPRESS to ACTIVATE the SAT network link as operational and return to AFIS OPERATING MODES Page. E. 13.AFIS Operation TURNING AUTO TO MAN 7. Pacific. Line Select Key . ENTER Key . 8.DEPRESS until AUTO appears in cursor. 9. BACK Key . the ACTIVE LINK will display NONE until the aircraft is within the boundaries of the selected region. 15. Cursor moves to LINK field. (Figure 7-105) 10. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to ACTIVATE the SAT network link as operational and return to AFIS OPERATING MODES Page.DEPRESS to position cursor over MAN field. Line Select Key DEPRESS until MAN appears in the cursor. Atlantic.

printer port 2 (PRT2).DEPRESS to set Message Destination field to its present value (PRT1. printer port 2 (PRT2).DEPRESS to position cursor over OPERATING MODES. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU page. Auto Form Feed currently applies to the -0211 and the -2011 DMUs. Users may print messages or weather to either or both printer ports. 1. Line Select Key .DEPRESS to cycle destination field between PRT1. AFIS key . 2.DEPRESS to position cursor over OPERATING MODES. ENTER Key . PRT2. Messages can be sent to printer port 1 (PRT1). or BOTH. ENTER Key . 4. or BOTH. Line Select Key . and BOTH. Automatic printing is also available. are accessed on the PRINTER CONTROL page. PRT2. 3 Oct/02 7-54 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System . Weather can be sent to printer port 1 (PRT1).AFIS Operation PRINTER CTRL The AFIS DMU has two RS-232 printer interfaces. 5. as well as Auto Form Feed control. Access the PRINTER CONTROL page by line selecting the PRINTER CTRL field on the OPERATING MODES page and pressing ENTER. or BOTH. SEL will appear in the field.DEPRESS to position cursor over the PRINTER CTRL field. BACK Key . AFIS key . 2.DEPRESS to access the PRINTER CONTROL page.DEPRESS. 1.DEPRESS to position cursor over MESSAGE DEST. 3. Controls for these options. Rev. 7. 8. 6.) WEATHER DEST The Weather Destination field is used to assign the printer port that will be used when weather is printed. Line Select Key . MESSAGE DEST The Message Destination field is used to assign the printer port that will be used when messages are printed.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU page. Line Select Key .

and BOTH. BACK Key . ENTER Key .DEPRESS to position cursor over SEL option of PRINTER CTRL field. Line Select Key . AFIS key . 7. Setting the Auto Form Feed option to NO will print messages and weather reports on the same page until the page is full.DEPRESS to set Message Destination field to its present value (PRT1. 5.DEPRESS to position cursor over OPERATING MODES. 3 Oct/02 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-55 . after each message or weather report is printed. will cause the printer to Form Feed. 6.) Auto Form Feed currently applies to the -0211 and the -2011 DMUs. 3.DEPRESS.DEPRESS to position cursor over WEATHER DEST. ENTER Key . PRT2. ENTER Key .AFIS Operation 3.DEPRESS to position cursor over SEL option of PRINTER CTRL field. or eject the page. 2. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to toggle Auto Form Feed option between YES and NO. 4. when set to YES. Rev. 8. or BOTH.DEPRESS to set Auto Form Feed to its present value (YES or NO.DEPRESS.DEPRESS to cycle destination field between PRT1. 8. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU page. Line Select Key . 4. then eject the page.DEPRESS to position cursor over AUTO FORM FEED. BACK Key . 6. 1. Line Select Key . Line Select Key . PRT2. Line Select Key . 5.) AUTO FORM FEED The Auto Form Feed option.DEPRESS to access the PRINTER CONTROL page. 7. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to access the PRINTER CONTROL page.

6.DEPRESS to position cursor over SEL option of PRINTER CTRL field. 7. Line Select Key .) AUTO PRINT WX The Auto Print Weather field is used to select or deselect the automatic printing of weather. 8. If AUTO PRINT MSG is set to NO. 4.DEPRESS to set Auto Print Message field to its present value (YES or NO. ENTER Key . 3 Oct/02 7-56 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System . 5. then messages will automatically be printed upon receipt.DEPRESS to position cursor over SEL option of PRINTER CTRL field.DEPRESS to access the PRINTER CONTROL page. 2. If AUTO PRINT WX is set to NO. then weather will automatically be printed upon receipt. 2.DEPRESS to position cursor over AUTO Rev. Line Select Key .DEPRESS to toggle Auto Print Message field between YES and NO. AFIS key .DEPRESS to position cursor over AUTO PRINT MSG.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU page. If AUTO PRINT MSG is set to YES. 5. 6.DEPRESS to position cursor over OPERATING MODES. Line Select Key . ENTER Key . ENTER Key .AFIS Operation AUTO PRINT MSG The Auto Print Message field is used to select or deselect the automatic printing of messages. 4. 1. 1.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU page. then weather will not be printed upon receipt. Line Select Key .DEPRESS to access the PRINTER CONTROL page.DEPRESS to position cursor over OPERATING MODES. then messages will not be printed upon receipt.DEPRESS. If AUTO PRINT WX is set to YES. AFIS key . Line Select Key . ENTER Key . ENTER Key . Line Select Key . 3. 3.DEPRESS. BACK Key .

7.DEPRESS to toggle Auto Print Weather field between YES and NO. where D1234 is the flight plan number. Leave the TO and FR fields blank.DEPRESS to set Auto Print Weather field to its present value (YES or NO. Select SEND AFIS MSG from the AFIS MENU. Enable AUTO PRINT WX from the printer control page of the AFIS OPERATING MODES page. to YES. PRINTER CONTROL page. type: PRFPD1234. 2. and/or individually at any time. Rev. line select one of the white caret symbols at the bottom of the message page. The PRINT MESSAGE? prompt will display. When uplinked. To Manually Print a Message: 1. 5. 4. 8. Press ENTER to send the message to the printer currently selected for messages. Select AUTO PRINT MSG from the AFIS OPERATING MODES. Transmit the request to the GDC. 3. To Automatically Print Messages Upon Receipt: 1. While reviewing the message.AFIS Operation PRINT WX. At the address (#) field. PRINTING MESSAGES Messages may be printed automatically as the message is uplinked. BACK Key . All uplinked messages will print automatically upon receipt. 3 Oct/02 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-57 . 2. 1.) PRINTING PROCEDURES PRINTING FLIGHT PLANS Following is a step by step procedure to print a flight plan in the aircraft: Note: The aircraft must be specially REGISTERED with the Global Data Center (GDC) for this feature. ENTER Key . the flight plan will be treated like weather and will print automatically.

Send messages to printer two. Send messages to both printers. leave the TO and FR fields blank.there is a space between the command and the numeral. leave the TO and FR fields blank. 3. 3 Oct/02 . Winds Aloft. Winds Aloft.AFIS Operation To Manually Print All Messages: 1. type ONE of the following commands: MSG 1 MSG 2 MSG 3 Send messages to printer one. select the SEND AFIS MSG page. Press ENTER again to initiate printing to the specified printer(s). PRINTER CONTROL page. At the address (#) field. To Automatically Print SIGMETS. From the AFIS MENU. Winds Aloft. PRINTING WEATHER SIGMETS. and Terminal Weather may be printed automatically or manually. 7-58 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. On the send message page. All SIGMETS. From the AFIS MENU. Send SIGMETS to both printers. or Terminal Weather: 1. Send Winds Aloft to printer one. To Manually Print All SIGMETS. 2. On the send message page. ex. Send Winds Aloft to both printers. Send Winds Aloft to printer two. type ONE of the following commands (note. Send SIGMETS to printer two. select the SEND AFIS MSG page. and Terminal Weather Upon Receipt: 1. and Terminal Weather reports will print automatically as they are received. Select AUTO PRINT WX from the AFIS OPERATING MODES. 2. SIG<space>1): SIG 1 SIG 2 SIG 3 WND 1 WND 2 WND 3 Send SIGMETS to printer one. At the address (#) field. Press ENTER until the SEND MESSAGE? prompt is displayed. Winds Aloft.

AFIS Operation TWX 1 TWX 2 TWX 3 Send Terminal Weather to printer one. 3 Oct/02 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-59 . Send Terminal Weather to printer two. Press ENTER until the SEND MESSAGE? prompt is displayed. Press ENTER again to initiate printing to the specified printer. Rev. Send Terminal Weather to both printers. 3.

AFIS MENU 1 2 3 < 4 5 < 6 7 < 8 < AFIS FLT PLAN SIGMETS TERMINAL WX WINDS ALOFT RECALL AFIS FPL SEND AFIS MSG DISPL AFIS MSG OPERATING MODES Figure 7-107 AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT ARINC SITA/AVICOM PRINTER CTRL ON ON AUTO OFF > > > ACTIVE LINK: ARINC Figure 7-108 AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT ARINC SITA/AVICOM PRINTER CTRL OFF ON AUTO OFF > > > ACTIVE LINK: ARINC Figure 7-109 Rev.DEPRESS. TURNING AUTO REPORT OFF 1. OPERATING MODES. 4. (Figure 7-109) 6. ENTER Key . ENTER Key . Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over ON option of AUTO REPORT field. 2. (Figure 7-108) 5.AFIS Operation SELECTING OPERATING MODES (FOR AFIS USERS NOT EQUIPPED WITH SATELLITE DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM) AUTO REPORTING When the system is initialized. The following procedures allow the function to be turned OFF and back ON. the Automatic Reporting and or Auto Wx update function will retain the status at aircraft shutdown. (Figure 7107) 3. 3 Oct/02 7-60 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System . AFIS Key . Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 8. NOTE: If all ground networks are OFF. then AUTO REPORT will be OFF.DEPRESS. BACK Key .DEPRESS to turn OFF the AUTO REPORT function.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page. OFF appears in the cursor.

DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 8. OPERATING MODES.DEPRESS to turn ON the AUTO REPORT function. ACTIVE LINK: ARINC 6. AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT ARINC SITA/AVICOM PRINTER CTRL ON ON AUTO OFF > > > ACTIVE LINK: ARINC Figure 7-112 Rev. BACK Key . 1 2 3 < 4 5 < 6 7 < 8 < AFIS MENU AFIS FLT PLAN SIGMETS TERMINAL WX WINDS ALOFT RECALL AFIS FPL SEND AFIS MSG DISPL AFIS MSG OPERATING MODES 2. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over OFF option of AUTO REPORT field. (Figure 7-112) Figure 7-111 AFIS OPERATING MODES NOTE: If all ground networks are OFF.AFIS Operation RETURNING TO AUTO REPORT 1.DEPRESS.DEPRESS. (Figure 7110) 3. Figure 7-110 4. AFIS Key . (Figure 7-111) AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT ARINC SITA/AVICOM PRINTER CTRL OFF ON AUTO OFF > > > 5. ENTER Key . ON appears in the cursor. then AUTO REPORT will be OFF. ENTER Key . 3 Oct/02 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-61 .

(Figure 7114) 5.DEPRESS. The following procedures allow the function to be turned OFF and back ON.DEPRESS to turn OFF the AUTO WX UPDT function. AFIS MENU 1 2 3 < 4 5 < 6 7 < 8 < AFIS FLT PLAN SIGMETS TERMINAL WX WINDS ALOFT RECALL AFIS FPL SEND AFIS MSG DISPL AFIS MSG OPERATING MODES Figure 7-113 2. OPERATING MODES. Line Select Key . the Automatic Weather Update function will retain the status at aircraft shutdown. 4. BACK Key . AFIS Key . ACTIVE LINK: ARINC Figure 7-115 7-62 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. 3 Oct/02 . TURNING AUTO WX UPDT OFF 1. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over ON option of AUTO WX UPDT field. (Figure 7-113) 3.DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 8. (Figure 7-115) AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT ARINC SITA/AVICOM PRINTER CTRL ON ON AUTO OFF > > > ACTIVE LINK: ARINC Figure 7-114 AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT ARINC SITA/AVICOM PRINTER CTRL ON OFF AUTO OFF > > > 6.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page.DEPRESS.AFIS Operation AUTO WEATHER UPDATE When the system is initialized. OFF appears in the cursor. ENTER Key . ENTER Key .

(Figure 7-118) ACTIVE LINK: ARINC Figure 7-117 6. ENTER Key .DEPRESS. AFIS Key .DEPRESS to turn ON the AUTO WX UPDT function. BACK Key .DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over OFF option of AUTO WX UPDT field. AFIS MENU 1 2 3 < 4 5 < 6 7 < 8 < 2. Figure 7-116 4. 3 Oct/02 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-63 . Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 8. (Figure 7-117) AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT ARINC SITA/AVICOM PRINTER CTRL OFF OFF AUTO OFF > > > 5. AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT ARINC SITA/AVICOM PRINTER CTRL ON ON AUTO OFF > > > NOTE: A Weather Update Request must be performed to notify the GDC of the change in status of AUTO WX UPDT. ON appears in the cursor. ACTIVE LINK: ARINC Figure 7-118 Rev.DEPRESS. ENTER Key .AFIS Operation RETURNING TO AUTO WX UPDT 1. (Figure 7116) AFIS FLT PLAN SIGMETS TERMINAL WX WINDS ALOFT RECALL AFIS FPL SEND AFIS MSG DISPL AFIS MSG OPERATING MODES 3. OPERATING MODES.

all networks will prefill with the status at system shut-down.DEPRESS.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page. turned OFF.DEPRESS until MAN or OFF appears in the cursor.DEPRESS to select MAN or OFF mode. 2. ENTER Key . (Figure 7-120) 5. or returned to AUTO. OPERATING MODES. ENTER Key . NOTE: SITA/AVICOM are two different ground networks covering different regions. AUTO TO MAN OR OFF MODE 1. 3 Oct/02 .AFIS Operation GROUND NETWORK OPERATING MODES The status of each network is held in non-volatile memory. BACK Key . Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 8. 4. The following procedures allow the ground networks to be manually operated. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over AUTO option of desired ground network field. (Figure 7119) 3. 6. all other networks will indicate OFF. The appropriate network is selected for operation based on current Lat/Lon location of aircraft. AFIS Key . (Figure 7-121) AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT ARINC SITA/AVICOM PRINTER CTRL ON ON MAN OFF > > > AFIS MENU 1 2 3 < 4 5 < 6 7 < 8 < AFIS FLT PLAN SIGMETS TERMINAL WX WINDS ALOFT RECALL AFIS FPL SEND AFIS MSG DISPL AFIS MSG OPERATING MODES Figure 7-119 AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT ARINC SITA/AVICOM PRINTER CTRL ON ON AUTO AUTO > > > ACTIVE LINK: ARINC Figure 7-120 ACTIVE LINK: ARINC Figure 7-121 NOTE: If MAN is selected. When the system is initialized. 7-64 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 8. NONE will be displayed. the operator must reselect to turn ON.DEPRESS to select AUTO mode. The ACTIVE LINK information at the bottom of the page indicates the network that is being serviced at that time. and OPERATING MODE selection status are stored in non-volatile memory. 3 Oct/02 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-65 . If the operator turns to OFF or MAN. ENTER Key . AFIS Key . ENTER Key . OPERATING MODES. (Figure 7122) 3. 2.DEPRESS until AUTO appears in the cursor.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over MAN or OFF option of ground network field. AUTO WX UPDT. BACK Key . (Figure 7-124) 6. NOTE: AUTO REPORT.DEPRESS. 4.AFIS Operation RETURNING TO AUTO 1. If the system is operating in automatic mode and the network selected by the present position information is turned OFF or none are operational. (Figure 7-123) 5. 1 2 3 < 4 5 < 6 7 < 8 < AFIS MENU AFIS FLT PLAN SIGMETS TERMINAL WX WINDS ALOFT RECALL AFIS FPL SEND AFIS MSG DISPL AFIS MSG OPERATING MODES Figure 7-122 AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT ARINC SITA/AVICOM PRINTER CTRL ON ON OFF OFF > > > ACTIVE LINK: NONE Figure 7-123 AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT ARINC SITA/AVICOM PRINTER CTRL ON ON AUTO OFF > > > ACTIVE LINK: ARINC Figure 7-124 Rev.

3. PAYLOAD value . 12.DEPRESS. ASSIGNED FL value .DEPRESS.DEPRESS. (Figure 7-126) NOTE: Values entered are checked against aircraft limitations stored in GDC computers. Amend and re-enter to advance cursor. ENTER Key .VERIFY or INSERT amended fuel remaining value. 7-66 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. ENTER Key . Invalid entries prevent cursor movement and cause the field to flash.VERIFY or INSERT amended payload value. < ACTIVE FPL 1/1 FR RW19R ----TO ORD ----< AZO ----KDTW ----< ****** < < 1 2 3 4 DEPART ARRIVE ERASE AFIS UPDATED ETE ERASE > Figure 7-125 AFIS FPL UPDATE ACTUAL FL ASSIGNED FL PAYLOAD FUEL REM CRUISE MODE Figure 7-126 NOTE: SIGMETS Winds and Terminal Wx are automatically updated when a AFIS FPL update is received. FUEL REM value . FPL Key . 10. ACTUAL FL value . AFIS FPL UPDATE Page appears with cursor positioned over ACTUAL FL value field.VERIFY or INSERT actual flight level.VERIFY or INSERT new flight level assignment. 6. 9. Line Select Key .DEPRESS. 5. Active Flight Plan .DEPRESS until cursor is positioned over AFIS UPDATE? (Figure 7125) 4. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to display Active Flight Plan Page. 3 Oct/02 . ENTER Key .VERIFY the Active Flight Plan route or AMEND as necessary. 8. 7. 11.AFIS Operation UPDATING AFIS FLIGHT PLAN AND WEATHER UPDATING AFIS FLIGHT PLAN 1. 2.DEPRESS. ENTER Key .

SELECTING UPDATE AS ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 1. if DATA LINK DISABLED message appears DEPRESS momentary AFIS annunciator to enable the air to ground data link. ACTIVE FPL Page will appear. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to replace Active Flight Plan with Updated Flight Plan. 14. Updated Flight Plan becomes the Active Flight Plan. ACTIVE FPL . Also enable VHF or satellite network.AFIS Operation 13.DEPRESS to initiate a Flight Plan Update. (Figure 7-129) 5.CONFIRM. AFIS FPL UPDATE ACTUAL FL ASSIGNED FL PAYLOAD FUEL REM CRUISE MODE 410 370 1200 11985 M80 TRANSMIT REQUEST? Figure 7-127 NOTE: For aircraft equipped with the Antenna Switching Unit. 3 Oct/02 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-67 .DEPRESS to position cursor over Updated Flight Plan. CRUISE MODE . (Figure 7-127) 15. Wait for DATA CENTER AK message if sending multiple requests. ENTER Key .VERIFY or INSERT an amended cruise mode. AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/4 < < CYUL-KJFK UPDA-KORD 06APR9O 16APR90 REPLACE ACTIVE FPL? Figure 7-128 AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/4 < < CYUL-KJFK UPDA-KORD 06APR9O 16APR90 REPLACE ACTIVE FPL? Figure 7-129 Rev. FPL Key . The cursor positions over TRANSMIT REQUEST? field. Line Select Key .DEPRESS.DEPRESS. ENTER Key . (Figure 7-128) 2.DEPRESS until AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page appears with Updated Flight Plan (UPDA . 3. Cursor positions itself over REPLACE ACTIVE FPL? 4.XXXX). ENTER Key .

DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page. Figure 7-131 < < AFIS SIGMETS 1/2 9APR90 FR (KSNA) TO (KMIA) ALPHA 2: SEV CAT EXT FR SO CENT VA THRU DE AT 14000 TO 24000 FT. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to display first SIGMETS Page. NOTE: Parentheses appear indicating a request has not yet been sent or received. Desired Identifier . 8. 5. Desired Identifier . 2. ENTER Key .DEPRESS. NOTE: When an updated SIGMET is received it replaces all previous SIGMETS. 10.INSERT.DEPRESS to initiate a SIGMET update. a North Atlantic Tracks update is sent. 3 Oct/02 . AFIS Key . (Figure 7-130) 3. 7. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over TO field.INSERT. If NAT is entered as FR option. ENTER Key .AFIS Operation UPDATING SIGMETS 1. 6. 4. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over TRANSMIT REQUEST? (Figure 7-131) 11.DEPRESS. SIGMETS. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 2. ENTER Key . 9. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over FROM field. TRANSMIT REQUEST? Figure 7-130 AFIS SIGMETS 1/2 9APR90 FR KSNA TO KMIA SIGMET ECHO 7 VALID UNTIL 222205 CA FROM RNO TO EED TO AFIS SIGMETS 1/26 20OCT91 FR NAT TO NAT TRACKS FLS 310 370 INCLUSIVE OCT 20/11 30Z TO OCT 20 190002 A 53/15 52/20 50/30 Figure 7-132 7-68 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. (Figure 7-132) Wait for DATA CENTER AK if sending multiple requests.

The newly entered ID appears in parentheses on the Menu. place cursor over an existing identifier. 3 Oct/02 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-69 . Repeat Steps (5) and (6) to enter additional requests. ENTER Key .DEPRESS to position cursor over TRANSMIT REQUEST? 9.AFIS Operation UPDATING WEATHER 1. when no field is available. 7. 6. 8. 2. 1 2 3 < 4 5 < 6 7 < 8 < AFIS MENU AFIS FLT PLAN SIGMETS TERMINAL WX WINDS ALOFT RECALL AFIS FPL SEND AFIS MSG DISPL AFIS MSG OPERATING MODES Figure 7-133 TERMINAL WX < < < < KSNA KSTL (KMKC) (ENO) (DQO) > > > > TRANSMIT REQUEST? Figure 7-134 Rev. ENTER Key . (Figure 7-134) NOTE: If desired. Line Select Key .DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 3.DEPRESS. 5.DEPRESS. 4. NOTE: Wait for DATA CENTER AK if sending multiple requests. (Figure 7-133) 3. Identifiers listed on this page will be transmitted to the ground via the data link.DEPRESS to display TERMINAL WX Menu Page.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page. AFIS Key . Line Select Key .DEPRESS to position cursor in next available field. Terminal ICAO Identifier INSERT. TERMINAL WX. Line Select Key . ENTER Key .

INSERT. Line Select Key . IDENTIFIER .AFIS Operation TO UPDATE TERMINAL WEATHER DATA PAGES 10. Desired Identifier . WINDS ALOFT. place cursor over existing identifier. 5. 2.DEPRESS. it will appear in parentheses. ENTER Key . (Figure 7-138) NOTE: If desired. UPDATING WINDS ALOFT 1.DEPRESS to position the cursor over the identifier field.INSERT. If there is no data available for the new identifier. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 4. The TERMINAL WEATHER Menu Page appears with the new identifier in place of the original identifier. when no field is available. 4. 12.DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page. ENTER Key . (Figure 7-137) 3. Access the TERMINAL WEATHER Data Page (Figure 7-135) by selecting an Identifier on the TERMINAL WX MENU Page. AFIS Key . and the cursor positioned at the location of the original identifier selected. The data text fields will go blank.DEPRESS to display WINDS ALOFT Menu Page. 13. 1 2 3 < 4 5 < 6 7 < 8 < AFIS MENU AFIS FLT PLAN SIGMETS TERMINAL WX WINDS ALOFT RECALL AFIS FPL SEND AFIS MSG DISPL AFIS MSG OPERATING MODES Figure 7-137 TERMINAL WX < < < < KSNA KSTL (MKC) (ENO) (DQO) > > > > TRANSMIT REQUEST? Figure 7-138 7-70 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor in next available field. TO INSERT A NEW IDENTIFIER TERMINAL WX > KDEN 1/12 10JAN97 METAR: 10/1710 101703Z COR 04008KT 1SM -SN BR BKN016 BKN025 OVC036 10/1710 M16/M17 A2994 RMK AO2 P0000 TAF: 101308Z 101312 Figure 7-135 11. 3 Oct/02 .

8. TO UPDATE THE WINDS ALOFT DATA PAGES 10.DEPRESS to position the cursor over the identifier field. 12. The WINDS ALOFT Menu Page appears with the new identifier in place of the original identifier.DEPRESS. waypoint. WINDS ALOFT 122356Z 310/23-17 290/34-31 290/44-47 300/53-54 310/68-56 310/57-59 ICT 18000 24000 30000 34000 39000 45000 Figure 7-139 13. If there is no data available for the new identifier. Repeat Steps (5) and (6) to enter additional requests. The data text fields will go blank. Line Select Key . The newly entered ID appears in parentheses on the Menu. IDENTIFIER . 3 Oct/02 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-71 .DEPRESS to position cursor over TRANSMIT REQUEST? 9. ENTER Key . airport.DEPRESS. NOTE: Wait for DATA CENTER AK if sending multiple requests. Line Select Key . TO INSERT A NEW IDENTIFIER 11. ENTER Key . Lat/Lon or VORTAC ident.INSERT. Access the WINDS ALOFT Data Pages (Figure 7-139) by selecting an identifier on the WINDS ALOFT menu Page. 7. 6.AFIS Operation NOTE: Identifier can be VOR.DEPRESS. Rev. ENTER Key . it will appear in parentheses. and the cursor positioned at the location of the original identifier selected. Identifiers listed on this page will be transmitted to the ground via the data link.

3 Oct/02 .AFIS Operation THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 7-72 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13. . . . . . . . . 3-37. . 2-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Alert . . . . . . . . . . 2-13~2-14. . 7-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51. . . . . 3-4~3-5. . . . . . . 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18. . . . . 3-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40~3-41. . . . . . . . . . 3-3~3-4. . . 2-81. . . . 2-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105 Airdata . . . . 2-65. . 3-37. . . 3-93. . 2-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70. 3-36~3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 Rev. . . . . 3-45. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Aircraft Weight . . 2-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68. . . 1-5. . . . . . 3-54 ARINC. . 3-73. . 2-18. . . . . . . . . . 3-63. . . . 3-75. . 1-6. . . . . . . . 3-80. . . . . . 2-21. 2-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Airport Reference Point(s) . . 7-24 Airborne Flight Information System (AFIS) 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 VOR Airway . . . . 2-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Airways Enroute Airway . . 2-57. . . . . 2-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26. . . . . . 3-67. . . . 7-1~7-66 Aircraft Type . . . 3-7~3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7. . . . 3-84~3-85 Altitude Trajectory . . 6-1 ADI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System I-1 . . . . . 2-29. . . . 3-86 Altitude Preselector. . . . . 3-54. . . . . . . . 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3~2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133 Airspeed . . . 3-44~3-49. 3-114 ARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3~6-6 Approach Armed Mode . 2-37 ADF . . 2-7~2-12. . 2-37. . . . . 2-9 Red Airway . 2-68. . . . . . . 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85. . 2-79. . . 3-17 Jet Airway . . . . . 2-67. . . . . . 2-2. . . . . . 2-78. 1-1 APPR/APRCH. . . . . . 3-114 APPROACH CANCELED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41. . . . . 2-72. . . 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78. . . . . . . . . 2-9 Upper Green . . 2-19. . . . . . 3-74 Advisory . . . . . 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27. . . . 3-118 Airport Continuation Records . . . . . . . . 7-19~7-20. 1-2. . . . . . 3-114. . . .Index A ACARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55 Airspace . . . 1-2. . . . . 6-1. . . . . . 2-80. . 2-43. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-127. . . . . . . . . . 3-29. . . . . . . 2-71. . . . 3-61~3-63. . 3-32~3-42. . . . . . . . 7-22 Armed . . . . 6-1 Airports . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73. . . 3-116. 2-30. . . . . . 6-1 Asterisk. . . 3-82. . . . . . . . . . 3-35~3-36. . . . . . . . 3-39. . . . . 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78. . . . . . . 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16~3-17. . . 7-2 Actual Vertical Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78. . . . . . 6-1 APPROACH. . . .

. 7-62 Auto Leg Change. 3-49. . . . . . . . . 2-72. . . . 3-108~3-109 Auto Report . . . . . 1-1. . . . . 4-1~4-2. . . . . . . . . 7-18~7-19. . 1-1. . . . . . . . . . 2-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117~3-118 Automatic Fuel Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21~7-22. 2-20. . . . . . 2-80. . . . . . 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Circling Type Approach . . . . 7-23 Atlantic . . 3-137 CONFIG . 6-1. . . 3-37. . 7-24~7-25 Constraint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44~7-45. . . . . . 2-4. . . . . . . 7-22. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55. . . 4-5. 2-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86 I-2 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. . . . 7-58 B BARO . . . . . . . . . . 2-52. 2-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41. 7-50. . . . . . . . . . 7-1~7-66 Channel . . . . . . 2-18. . . . . . 3-82. . 3-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89 Compass . . . . . . . . 2-68. . 2-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54 CDU . 2-43. . . . . 2-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 ATC . . . . . . 3-72~3-73. . . . . . . . . 2-78. 3-44. 3-10. . . . . 2-13. 3-116. . . . . . . . 7-59 Auto-computed . . . . . . 2-20~2-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56 AVICOM . 1-4. . . . . 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37. . . . .2 Composite Position . . . . . 3-82~3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110~3-113. 7-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72~3-75. . . . . 3-1 BUSY-STANDBY . 3-137 CDI Sensitivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5. . . . . . . . 3-76. . . . . . . 3-102. . . . . . . . . 3-36. . . . 2-18. . . . . . 2-30. . . . 3-112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95~3-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 Company Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1. 2-53~2-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-130. . . . . 2-30. . . . . 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117 Cross-at . 3-36. . . 3-39~3-40. 2-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . 3-125. . 7-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54~7-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7. 7-30 Automatic Weather Update . . . . . . 2-2. . . . . 2-29. . . . . . . 3-78~3-80. . . 3-128 Auto-TAS . . . . . 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . 2-27. . 5-1. 3-61 C CALC . . . . 2-35. . 2-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86. . . 2-10. . . . . . 6-3 Constraint Altitude . . . . . 7-7. 2-67. . . 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1. . 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Computation . . .Index At or Above/Below. . . . . . . . . . 3-10. . . . . . . 2-12. . . . 6-1 Brightness . . . 1-3. . 2-11~2-13. . . . 2-81 Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78. 1 Aug/97 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36. . . . . 3-54 COMMs . . . 2-53. . . 2-25~2-26. . . . 2-53. . . 2-47~2-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11. . . . 3-80. . . 1-1. . . . 2-27~2-28. . 3-136 Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Coordinate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 Closest Airport . 7-20. . 2-36~2-37. . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Battery . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33~7-35. . . . 3-114. . . . . . 7-37. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18~2-19. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78 Cross-BETWEEN . 7-10. . 6-7 Digital Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120. . . . 3-77. . . . .Index Cross-AT-or-BELOW . . . . . . . 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71~3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13~3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63. . . . 2-50. . . . . . . 2-78. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42. 2-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133 DEF . 7-42. . . . . . . . 2-74. . . . . . . . . . . 3-86 Displacement (DISPL) . 3-2. . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Discontinuity . . . . . . . 7-23. . 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . 7-61 Data-base. . . . . . . . 2-4. . . 2-45. . 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74~3-78. 3-80 Cross-between . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41. . . . . . . . . 3-63~3-64. . . . . . . 6-2. . . . 3-83. . . . . . 2-82. . . 3-125 Desired Track . . 2-14. . . . . . . . . . 3-65~3-66. . . . . . . . 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System I-3 . . 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 Database Expiration Date. . . 2-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Rev. . . . . . . . . . 3-46. . . . . . 2-65. 6-2 DEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18~2-19. . . . 6-2. . 2-34. 2-57. . . . . . . . . 2-65. . 7-61~7-63. . . . . . . . . . 3-51~3-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 CRS . . . . 6-2 DEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49. . . . . . . . 2-78~2-79. . . 3-78 Cross-AT-or-ABOVE . . . . . . . 2-5 Departure-destination . 3-78. . . . . . . . . 7-42. . . . . . . 7-65 DATA LINK DISABLED . . . . . . 2-24. . . . . . . 6-4 Cruise Altitude . . . . . . . 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66~2-68. . . . . . . . . . . 3-123. . . . . . . . . 7-43 DIST . . 3-2 Dead Reckoning . . . . . . . 2-48. . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Discrete . . . . . . . 3-103~3-104. . . . . . . . . . 3-83. . . . . . 3-76 Deselect . 3-59. . . . . . 2-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Direct To. . . . . . . 2-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126. . . . . . . . 2-14. 3-80 Crossfill . . . . . 2-48. . 3-108. . . 7-31 Departing . . . . 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100~3-101. 7-12. . . . . . . . 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74. 2-73. 2-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77. . . . 2-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 D DATA CENTER AK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35~3-36. . . . . . . . . . 3-114. . . . . . . 2-11. . 7-24. . . . . . . . . 2-35~2-37. 7-40. . . . 1-2 Crosstrack Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41~3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1. . 3-58 Crosswind . . . . . . . 3-114. . . . . . 2-26. . . . . . 3-58~3-60. . . . . . 6-2 Cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37~7-38. . 3-78. . 7-27 Deviation(s) (DEV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110 Declination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18. 3-13 Descents . . . . .

. . 3-65~3-66 EXP . . . 3-107. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 ELEV. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75. . . 2-19 DRK . . . . . . . . . . 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65. 6-1 DN . . . . . . . . . 2-57. . . . . . 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79. . . . . 3-99. 3-129 Errors . . 3-137 I-4 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. 2-15. . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Estimated Time Enroute (ETE) . 2-15~2-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82. . . 1-1. . . . 2-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18. . . 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44~3-47. . . . . . . . . . 2-14. . . . . . . . . 3-54~3-62. . . . . . 7-5. . . . 2-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44. . . . . . . 2-47. . 3-126~3-127 Exit Hold . . 6-2 Downlink . . . . . . 2-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . 3-46. . . . 6-4 FCF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 EX . . . . . . . 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37. . . . . 2-26. . . . . . . . . 3-85~3-86. . . . . . 7-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) . . 6-2 E EFIS . . . . . . . . . . 3-114. . . . 2-79. . . 2-19. . . . 2-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35. . . . 2-79 F FAA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Dec/96 . . . . . . . 2-44. . . 6-2. . . . . 3-118 EST . . . . . . 6-3 FDE Computation . . . . . . 3-33. . . . . . . . 2-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60. . . . . . 2-18 Estimated Position Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43. 2-10. 7-11 Factor. . . . . . . . . 7-42 Drift Angle . . 3-129 ENTR SET HDG . 3-72. . . . . . . . 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115. . 2-16~2-17. 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81. . . . . . . . . . . 2-13. . . . . . 3-60 ENRTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51~3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74. . . . 3-99. . 1-6. . . . . . . . . 3-2 EXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index DME Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Expiration . . . . . . . . . 7-28 Estimated Time of Departure (ETD) . . . 2-37. . . . . 6-2 Estimated Fuel Remaining . . . . . . . 2-48. . . . . . . . . . 2-4. . . 2-11. . . . 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99. . . . 2-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 ENTR . . . . . 3-67 Exit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 DTK 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4. . 3-41. . . . . . . . 2-15~2-17. . . . 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39. . . . . . 7-14. . . . 2-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14. . . . 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Endpoint . . . . . . . 2-79. . . 2-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49. . . . . . 2-81. . . . . . .

. . . . . . . 7-4. 3-108. . . 2-68. 3-89. . . 7-60 Flight Path Angle (FPA) . . 3-40~3-41. . . . . . . . . . 2-1. . . . . . . . 3-96. . . . . . . 3-62. . . 2-20. . . 3-39. . 2-8. . 7-1~7-2. . . . . . . 7-9. . . 2-49~2-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69. . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Heading Mode. . . . . . . . . 1-2. . . . 6-6 Frequency (FREQ) . 3-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3. . . . . . . 3-91. . . . 2-78 3-33. 2-52. . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9. . . 3-99~3-101. . 3-126 FF . . . . 3-125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5~7-6 Guidance . . . . 3-7. . . . . 3-48. . . . . . . 2-12. 3-104 GRAD . . . . . . . . . . 3-57~3-61 Headwind. . . . . . . . 3-44. . . . . 2-36. . . . . . 6-3~6-5 GPS Time . . . . 6-3. . . 3-102~3-103. . . . 3-95. 2-14. . . . . . . . . 2-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40. 2-36. . 3-95~3-96. . . . 2-81. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71~3-80. . 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103 Functions . 7-30 Fuel Plan . . . 2-80. . . . 3-137 Fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73. . . . 3-112~3-113. . . . . 3-75. . . . . . . 2-48. . . . . 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1. . . . . 2-52. . . 7-39. . . . . 7-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37. . . . . . 7-5. 2-78. 2-9. 3-98~3-104. 3-80. . . . . . . 3-44~3-46. . . . . . . . 2-72. . . 7-14. . 6-3 FPL FULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17. . . 2-29~2-31. . . . . . . . . . 2-47. . 2-77. . . . .Index FDE Prediction . . . . . . . 2-49. . 3-37. . . 2-43. . 2-30. . . . 2-36~2-37. . . . . . . . 3-134~3-135. 3-41. . . . . . 3-105. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59~2-60. . . . . . . . 2-70. . . . 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System I-5 . 2-78. . . . . . . . . . 2-9~2-11. . . 3-14. . . . . . . . . 3-83 Guidelines. . . . . . . . 2-46~2-47. . 7-42 H H-field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134. . . . . . . 7-5 Final Approach Course Alignment Fix . 2-48. . . . . . . . . 3-15. . 7-57. . . . . . . . 7-60 Glide Path . . . 3-82. . . . . 6-3. . 2-37. . . . 2-67. . . . 2-12. . . . . . . . . 2-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68. . . . . . 6-3 Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37~3-39. . . . . . 2-52. 2-75. . 2-12. . . . . . . 2-44. . 3-25~3-26 FPM . . 2-80. . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 Fuel Flow . . . 3-10. . . . . 2-35. . 3-103~3-104 Fuel Status. . . . . . . 7-1. . . . . . . . . . 2-45. . . . 2-18 Rev. . . . . 7-23. . . . . . . . . . 2-11. . . . . . . . . 2-49~2-51. . . . . . . 3-119 HDOP. . . 7-6. . . 3-110. . 3-46. . . . . . . . . . . 2-37. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100 G GDC . . . . . . . . 2-50. . . . . 2-44. 2-40. . . . . . . . 3-75. . . . . 2-77. . . . . . . . . 6-2 Groundspeed . . 2-9. . . . . . 3-16. . . . . 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30. . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Flight Level . . . . . . 2-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Final Approach Fix (FAF) . 3-37. . . . . . . . . 6-3. . . 3-100. . . . . 1-2. . . . . . . . . . 7-46~7-47. . . . 3-131. . . . . . . . . 2-9. . . . . 6-3 GPS 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4. . 3-71. . 2-42. . . . . 3-36~3-37. . 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-133 Idents . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Initial Approach Fix (IAF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3~6-4 Horizontal Position Error (HPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20. . . . . . . . 2-25. . . 2-15~2-16. . . 6-4 Indented Waypoints . . . . 3-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52. . . . 7-54. . . . . . . 2-61. . . 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81. . . . 7-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Holding Fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63~3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56. 2-10. 2-4. . . . 2-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4. . . . . . . . . . 2-79. . 3-66. 6-4 HPA . . 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5. . . . . . . . . . 2-29. 6-4 Holding Pattern Entry Direct Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4. . . . . 2-61. . 3-130. . . 7-1 Inactive . . . . 2-61. . . 2-10. . . 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109. . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21. . . . . . . . . 3-46. . . . . . 2-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 ID . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33. . . . . . . 7-22 ILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39 Identifying . . . . . . . 7-58 INMARSAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117~3-118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65~2-67. . . . . . . 3-66 I-6 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75. . . . 7-65 Ident-insert . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79. . . . . . . 2-17. . . . 2-61. . . . . 3-63. . . . . 3-131 Installation . 3-66~3-68 Holding Pattern . . . . . . . . . 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Holding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16. . . . . . . . 3-17 I ICAO Airport Identifier . . . . . . 2-16. . . . . . 2-65. . . . . . 2-3. . 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Dec/96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65~2-67. . . . . 2-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15~2-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Initialize(d) 2-30. . . . . . . 2-31. . . 2-13. . . 7-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25~3-26. 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . 7-15. . . . . . . 3-114 Inbound CRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13. . . . 2-35. 1-2. . . 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43. . . . . . . . 7-48. . . . 2-61. 3-52. . . . . 3-63 Parallel Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index HLTH . . 7-4. . . . . . . . . . 7-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 Holding Status Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 HQM . . . . 2-64 Teardrop Entry . . . . . . . . 2-10 Inertial Reference System. . . . . . . 2-67. . . . . . . . . 7-63. . . . . . . 6-4 In-flight . . . . . . . 1-2. . . . . . 7-19. . . 2-61. . 2-16 Horizontal . . . . . 3-133 Identification . . . . 7-3 INS . . . . 2-15~2-17. . . . . . . 3-37. . . . . . . . . 3-107. 2-73. . . . . . . . . 2-8. 3-91. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36. . . . . . . . 2-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 4-1~4-2. 2-5. . . . . . 3-61 Intercept Messages . . . 3-15. . . . . . 3-85~3-86. . . 2-72. . . . . . . 7-28~7-29 Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134~3-135 L Land(ing) . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Latitude insert . . . . . . 3-5. . . . . . 2-15. . . . . . . . . . . 5-2. . . 7-13. . 6-4 LVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98. . . . . . . . 3-61 Intercept . . . . . . . 3-53~3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65 Longitude insert . . . 7-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74~2-75. . . . . . 2-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47. . . . . . 3-59~3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52. . . . 2-72 Invert . . . . 2-13. . . . . . . . . 1-1. . . . . . . . . 7-30 Leg Change Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109. . . . 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 K KG KHZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53~3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112 Latitudes . 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . 3-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103 Legs . 7-11. . 2-27 Load(ing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49. . . 2-17. . . . . 6-6 INTERCEPT BEYOND FIX. . . . . . . . . . 6-4 KTs . . . . . . . . . . 2-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58. . 3-16. . . 7-60 Line-of-sight . . 2-32~2-34. . . . . 7-30 Rev. . . . . . 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96. . . . . . . 3-47~3-49. . 3-57. . . . . . . . . 3-112 LORAN . . . . . . . . . . 2-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44~3-45. . . . . . . . . 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System I-7 . 7-4 LOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19~7-22 Intersections . . . . . . . . 2-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81. . . . . . . . 7-1. . . . . . . . . . . 3-59~3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107~3-108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128 LB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56~2-57. . . 3-55~3-56. 4-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104. . . 3-114 Interfaced Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1. . . . . . . . . 3-14 IRS-align . . . . . . . 3-55. . . . . . . . . 3-121. . . . . . 3-15 J Jeppesen . . . . 3-107. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15. . . 3-37 LON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112~3-113. . . 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57. 3-5. 6-4 LDWT . . . 6-4 . . . 2-51. . 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109 Leg Fuel . . . . . . . . . . 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96. . 2-57. . .

. . . 2-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118 Manual Fuel Flow . . . . . . . . . 7-62 NAV RDY-VERIFY POSITION . . 2-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 NDB-WW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-108~3-109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52. . . . . . . 1-2. . 7-11. . . . . . . 6-5. . . . . 2-48 MAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39 Naming . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 NO AUTO LEG CHG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61. . . . 7-15. . . 2-35 MEM . . . . . . . . . 1-2. . . . 2-67. . .Index M MAG . . 2-77. . . . . 2-79. . . . 2-8. . . . 2-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Missed Approach Procedure . . . . . . 7-1 N Name . . 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102 Manual Ground Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16. . . . . 3-128. . . . 3-130 Navigate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36~3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33. . . . . 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . 3-95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90 NB . . 6-7 MAN HDG REQD . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126~3-127 NO COURSE INTERCEPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 Missed Approach Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11. 2-1 I-8 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. . . . . . . 3-132 Message Section . . . . . . . . . . 2-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15. . . 3-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Magnetic Variation . . . . . . . 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 NAT . 2-79 NO AFIS FLT PLANS ON DISK. . . . 0 Dec/96 . . . . . 7-28 Navigational. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7. . . . . . . . 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69~2-70. . . 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7. 3-61 No Data Received . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 NDB . . . . . . . . . 3-48~3-49 MOD . . . . 2-65 MDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 NO APPROACH AVAILABLE . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 NAVs . . . . . . 3-132 MEM FULL . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 NO ARC INTERCEPT. . . . . . . . . . . 3-119 MAN TAS REQD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77. . . . . . . . . . 2-68. . . 3-110 Navaids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77. . . . . . . . . 3-115. . . . . . 2-76 Miscompare. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40. . . . . . . . . . . 2-68. . . . . . . . 7-12. . . 2-5. . . . . . 3-47. . . . . 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index NO DISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134~3-135 Offset(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84 Non-ICAO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 Overflying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51. . . . . . . . . . . 3-116. . . . 3-54. . . 3-112~3-113 Rev. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 NO ROOM ON FPL. 3-127. . . . . 3-83 Personalized . . . . . . . . . . 3-107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Non-directional. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 NO FPL AVAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 NOTAMS . . . . 2-2 Path Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7. . . . 2-73. . . . 2-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68. . . . . . . . . 2-52~2-53. . . . . . . . . 3-3 Non-precision . . . 3-118. . . . . . 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 Non-standard. . . . . . . . . 1-4. . . . . . 3-3 Non-IRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131~3-134 Omega Stations . . . . . . . 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System I-9 . . . . . . 2-13~2-14. . 2-6. . . . . . 2-42. . . . 7-13 NX . . . 7-13 Plan Crossing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Options . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40. . . 3-66. . . . . . . . 3-131~3-133 PIREPS . . . . . . . 2-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 NO STARS AVAILABLE . . . . . . 3-81. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78. . 2-66. . . . . . . . . . 3-105 Part Number . . 3-19 NO SIGMETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111~3-112 Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100. . . . . 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44. . . 3-114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11~2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36. . . 2-22. 2-75. . . . . . . . . . 3-79~3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37~3-39 P Parallax Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 NO SIDS AVAILABLE . . . . . . . . . 2-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 O Oceanic/Remote Operation . . . 7-10 Outer Markers . . . 2-70. . . . . . . . 2-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 Position Fix. . . 3-73~3-74. . . . . 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30. 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 NOPT . . . . . . . . 1-2. . 2-61. . . . . . . 6-5 Non-enterable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118~3-119 Required Vertical Speed. . . . . . . . . . 1-1. . 0 Dec/96 . . . . . . 3-110 READING DISK . . 2-20. . . . 3-131 Radios . . 3-86 Prompts . . . . . . . . . 2-53~2-54 Quality Factor (QUAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94 RAIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89 Pseudo-VORTAC . . . . . . . . . 3-114 I-10 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. 2-8. . . . . . . . 3-1. . . 2-81. . . . . . 2-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37. . 3-110~3-113. . 6-4 R RAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113. 6-5 Prev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Prefill. . . . . 2-41. 3-110. 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5~2-7. . . . . 3-44. . . . . . . . . 3-86 PRED IN PROGRESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Procedure Turn 2-4. . . . . 2-19. . . . 2-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58~3-60 Q QTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44. . . . . . . 2-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39. 3-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118 PPM . . . . . . . . 3-117 RDY-verify . 3-77. . . . . . . . . 6-6 Roll . 3-16. 3-55~3-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73. . . . . . 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6. . 3-84. . . 7-5. . 3-33. . .Index Position Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2. . 2-44 RNAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4~6-5 Program . . . . . . 1-5. . . . . . . 2-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51. 2-58. . . . . . 3-75. . 3-44. . 2-67. . . 1-2. . . . 6-6 REQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 RCVD . 7-27 Pre-selected . . . . 6-6 Radar (Vectors). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 RCVR . . . . . . . . . . 1-2. . . 7-15. . 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83. . 7-41 Pre-departure . . . . . . . 2-22. . 2-24. . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring . 2-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81. . 2-42. . . . . . . . 3-126 Radial insert . . . . . . . . . . 3-57. . . . . 2-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84. . . . 3-39~3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1. . . . 2-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15~2-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81. . . . . . . . . . 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 RNG . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8. . . . 7-58 Preselector (PRESL) . . 2-82 RDY . . 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 REQD . . . . . . . . . 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . 2-48. . . . . . . . . . . 3-5. . . 3-114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52 SATS. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 Runways (RWY) . . . 2-31. . . . . . . . . . 3-121. . . 3-75. . . . . 2-79 Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 SIGMET . . 3-54 Sensor Messages . . . . 3-78. . 2-81. . . . . . . . . . . 2-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36. . . . . . . . . 3-116. 2-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132 Rev. . . . . . . . . . . 2-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75. . . 2-3~2-4. . . . . . . . . . . 7-19. . . . . . . . 7-3 SEL . . . . 3-116. . . 6-6 Software Modification Status . 3-137 STAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System I-11 . . 2-19. . 7-43. .Index Routes . 7-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114 Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12. . . 3-33. . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Status Messages . . . . . . . . 2-3~2-4. . . . 2-6. 1-2. . . . . 3-27~3-31. 2-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-129 Sequences . . . . . . . . . . 3-73. . . . . 1-4. . . . 2-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7~3-9. . . . . . . . . 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29~3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73. 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Signal-to-noise (SNR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33. 2-8. . . . 1-4. . 2-80. . 3-24 Rubidium . 3-80. . . . . . . 2-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8. . . . . . . . 2-24. . . 5-1 Sensitivity . . . . . . . 2-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-135 Scaling . . 3-95. . . 2-24 Standby . . . . . . . 3-44~3-46 SCU . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16~3-23. . . 7-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125. . . . . . . 7-48. 2-34. . 6-6 Station Amplitude Ranging . . . . . . 2-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62 Signal . . . 3-133. . 2-80. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134 SPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54. . 3-16~3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7~3-9. . . . . 2-82 Runway Thresholds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11~7-12. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 Shutdown . . . . 3-36 SEL RWY FROM STAR PG . . 3-36 Selected Crosstrack . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33. . . . . . 2-53. . 3-36~3-37. . . . 3-1. . . . . . 3-33. . 3-39~3-41. . . . . . . . 2-76. . . . . . . . 3-82. . . . . 2-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 STD . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42. . 3-82. . . . . . . 3-35~3-36 S SATCOM . . . . 2-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54. . . . . . . . 3-20. . . . 2-10. . . . . . . . . 7-58 SID 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7~2-8. . . . . . . . . . . 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3. . . . . . . . . . 2-80. . . . . . . 2-46. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2. . 2-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2. . . . 2-1. . 2-82 Steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28. . . . . . . 2-18. . . . . . . . 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39. . . . . . . . . 3-126~3-127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Transceiver. 3-16. . . . . . . 2-80. . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 I-12 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Dec/96 . . . . . . . . . 3-72. 1-2. . . . . . . 6-6 Too Far . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4. . 7-59 U UG . . . . . . . 2-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6~6-7 Tailwind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Transitions. . . . . 2-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79. 2-29 Unstable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-127 STRG (INVALID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Takeoff . . . . . 2-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-137 UNCERT. . . . . . . . . 3-130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36~2-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119. . . . . 2-79. . 3-130. 3-128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41. 2-9 Unavailable (UNAVAIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71~3-73. . . . . 2-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36~2-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Test . . . 3-117. . . . . . . 2-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 TRMNL.Index Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Top of Descent (TOD) . . . . 3-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Trajectory . . . . . 7-2 Transponder . . . . . . . . . . 7-22. . 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61. . . 2-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104 Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21. . . . . 2-43 TRANS . . . . . . . . 3-1. . 3-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104. . . . . . 3-46. . . . . . . . . . 3-109~3-110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77. 2-20. . . 6-7 True Airspeed (TAS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102. . . . . . 2-20. . 7-2 SYNC . . 3-7. . . . . . 2-65. 3-71. . . . . . . . . 2-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58. . . . 3-58 Subscription . . . 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30~2-31. . . . . . . . 2-23. . . . . . . . 5-1~5-2 TKE . . . 2-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36~2-37. . . 2-19. . . . . . . . . . 7-2~7-3 Transition Level . . . 3-35 Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Top of Climb (TOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Taxi TK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132. . . . . 2-18. . 2-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-130. . . . 2-60. . . 3-78. . . . . . . 2-40. . . 3-91. 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80. . . . . . . . . 7-5 Track Angle (Error) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75. 2-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24~7-25 T TACAN . . . . . . . . 3-84. . . . . . 2-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19. . . . . . . . . 2-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82 System Messages. . 6-7 Total Fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . 3-83. . . 3-130 UTC . . 4-20 VNAV Direct To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1. . 3-112~3-113. 7-3~7-4. . . . . . . . . . 2-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81. . . . 2-40 VNAV Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Vertical Waypoint . . . . . . . . . 7-28 VSPD . . . 7-1. 7-7~7-12. . . . 3-26. . . . . 7-29~7-34. . . . . . . . . . . 3-131. . 7-61 UPDA-XXXX. . . . . . . . . . . 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3. . . 3-117~3-118. . . . . 3-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33~7-35. . . . . . . 5-1. . . . . . . . . 3-85~3-87 Duplicate Waypoint . . . . . . . . 3-95. . . 7-15 Vectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80. . . . 2-37. . . . . . 3-104 Variations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18~7-19. . . . . . . . . 2-45. . . . 2-33~2-34. 7-12~7-13. . . . . . . . 3-84 VLF/Omega. . . . . . . . . 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133 Descent Reference Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56~7-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10. . . . 3-17~3-18. . . 6-7 Vertical Deviation . . . . 7-65 Rev. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 VS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66. . . . . 2-20. . . 7-28. . . . . . 2-76. . . . . . 3-63 Waypoint-to-waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index UPDA . 3-107~3-108. . . . 3-103~3-105. . 2-80. 3-114. . . . . . . . . . . 3-83 VNAV Mode . . . . 3-2. 2-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107. . . 3-95. . 7-23 VERIFY POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74~3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4~7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37. . 3-117 VERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78. . . . . . . . . 7-63. . . . . . . . . 3-44 Velocity (ies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77. . . . 2-77~2-78. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35. . . . . . . . . . 2-45~2-46. . . . 3-11 External Waypoint . . . 7-24 USING MAN HDG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Warn(ing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2. . . . . . . . 3-126 Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 V Valids . . . . . . . 2-42. . . . . 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70. . . . . . . 3-119. 2-20. . . 7-60~7-65 Uplink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6. . 2-41. . . . . . 2-81 W Warm-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132. . . . . . . 7-14 Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39. . 7-43~7-47. 2-30. . . . 3-127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110~3-113. . . 3-75 Waypoints Database Waypoint . . . . 2-35~2-37. . . . . . . . . . 3-100. . . . . . . . . . 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21~7-24. . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System I-13 . . . 2-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10. . . 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84 VNAV Waypoint . . . . . . 3-104 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51~2-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7. . . . . . . 3-127. . . . 3-114. . . 3-132 WPTS . . . 3-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-127 VNAV Profile Waypoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134 Offset Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6. . . . . . . . . 7-35 WPT MEM FULL . . . . . . 3-15~3-16. . . . . . 2-14. . . . . . . . . 2-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117 Weight-on-wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73~3-77. . . . . . . . . 3-105. . . 3-100. . 7-22. . 2-72 Obsolete Waypoint. . . . . . . 2-75. . . 7-9~7-10 Wind . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13~7-14. . . . . . . . . . 3-66 XPDR. . . . 3-112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-130 Special Waypoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44. . . . . .Index Intersection Waypoint . . . . . . . . 3-79~3-83. 3-33 WSH . . . . . . . . . 2-5. . . . . . . . 2-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 Oceanic Waypoint . . . . . . . . 2-14. . . . . 2-21. . . . . . . 3-81. . 3-132 Power Off Waypoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Weight-off-wheels . . . . . . . . . 2-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131~3-134 Pilot Entered Waypoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59. . . 7-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118. . . . 3-116 Waypoints of STAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73. . . . . . . 2-23. 2-72. . . . . . . . . 6-1. . 3-51. . . . 3-107. 2-53. . . . . 2-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46. . . . . . 3-127. . . . . 2-17. . . 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Dec/96 . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Y Z I-14 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Rev. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 X XFILL . . . . . 3-93. . . . 6-7 XTK 2-18. 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Kansas 66061 FAX 913-791-1302 Telephone: (913) 782-0400 006-08872-0000 Rev 3 10/02 N . One Technology Center 23500 West 105th Street Olathe.Honeywell International Inc.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful